
Glass TC 4l)t 

Book ^S/^ 

Copyright^ 



COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



?y 

CHARLES PHILIP WAGNER 

University of Michigan 



Ann Arbor, Mich. 

THE ANN, ARBOR PRESS 
I909 



copyright, i909 
By Chari.es Philip Wagner. 







ICLA251357 



PREFACE 

The present grammar represents the third stage of an 
experiment which the author has been carrying on in his 
classes, in the attempt to provide the maximum of material 
for oral work, without sacrificing that drill in the elements 
of Grammar which, in his opinion, must form the basis of 
all language study pursued under the artificial conditions 
of the class room, The first stage was the use, for three 
seasons, of a pamphlet. of conversation material, the second, 
the use in a class of beginners, of the advance sheets of a 
large share of this book. 

In certain important respects, the result of this experi- 
ment presents a radical departure from the types of gram- 
mar now r most in vogue. Detached sentences have been 
used in a few exercises for drill w r ork; but elsewhere they 
have been discarded because of their failure to provide the 
important element of interest. In their place, connected 
dialogue and description have been introduced, based on a 
carefully selected vocabulary of every-day words, and illus- 
trating the facts of form and syntax which make up the 
first part of each lesson. The sort of foot-note which tells 
the student to "use the subjunctive" or to "omit the arti- 
cle" without telling him why, has been discarded as well. 
s The English to Spanish exercise has been banished from 
the current lesson because of the difficulty of, doing satis- 
factory composition work with new material. Every fourth 
lesson has been made a composition lesson, containing only 
familiar material in new combinations, and preceded by a 
synopsis of the review on which it is based. 

The grammatical facts about a given part of speech will 
be found somewhat more scattered than is usual, the ar- 
rangement having been determined largely by the desire 
to present as soon as possible the facts of the verb and the 



IV SPANISH GRAMMAR 

personal pronoun, and occasionally by the exigencies of the 
connected exercise. Certain matter often given a prominent 
place will be found relegated to the later lessons. A case in 
point is the use of the intimate pronouns and the other 
forms related to them, although the forms themselves are 
given early in the paradigms. Model verbs are not used, 
and the student is made to build up the regular verbs from 
stem and endings. So far as possible, he is made to do 
this also with irregular verbs, whose regular forms are 
omitted from the general section devoted to verbs. This 
section has been reduced to its lowest terms, and should 
not prove at all terrifying to the beginner. The reference 
list of irregular verbs contains only such as. might be en- 
countered in the average non-technical text. 

A word as to how the lessons may be used will not be 
out of place here, though in this regard every teacher will 
work out his own salvation. Whether the lessons are found 
to be too long or not, will depend on the character of each 
class, and the length of the recitation period. They may 
be conveniently divided before or after the vocabulary. In 
either case the sentences used to illustrate rules may prop- 
erly be considered to form a part of the first half-lesson. 
As to the oral exercise, the author's practice is as follows. 
The first part is read aloud sentence by sentence by the 
teacher, and translated, with books closed, by members of 
the class. It is then translated orally by the teacher and 
re-translated into Spanish by the class. Next, the questions 
in the last part of the exercise are asked by the teacher and 
answered by the class, and finally, each pupil is made to 
ask a question bearing on the lesson. Whether all or a 
part of this program is carried out, depends upon the other 
work assigned for the hour. The questions are not at all 
exhaustive, and represent only a part of what the ingenious 
teacher can do with the material. On completing the book, 
the method here employed may be used with any text the 
class may be using as a reader. ■ 



PREFACE V 

In the composition lessons, the synopsis has been found 
a great help in controlling the review, and a full hour may 
he devoted to it if desired. The teacher who feels that these 
lessons do not provide sufficient composition material, may 
pass from them to any good composition book. 

It is hoped that users of this grammar will communi- 
cate freely with the author about desirable changes and 
necessary corrections. It is desired to improve the book 
in every possible way in any future edition.* 

The author's sincerest thanks are due to his colleagues. 
Professor James P. Bird and Mr. Herbert A. Kenyon, for 
valuable suggestions and for reading the proof, and to Sr. 
D. Augusto Valenzuela of Bogota and Sr. D. Guillermo 
Fernandez of Mexico City for revising the Spanish exer- 
cises. 

C. P. W. 

Ann Arbor, Sept.. 1909. 



CONTENTS 

PAGE 

Pronunciation ....... i 

Essentials oe Grammar ...... 9 

LESSONS 

I. Gender and number of nouns. Definite and indefi- 
nite articles. Possessive Case o 

II. The verb. Infinitives. Stem and Endings. Pres- 
ent Indicative. Non-inflection of Spanish noun. 
Indirect object. Word-order . . . .11 

III. Subject pronouns. Tener, tener que and deber. 

Expression of purpose. Word-order . . 16 

IV. Synopsis of review. Composition ... 20 

V. Adjectives, gender, number, agreement, position 
and substantive use. Ser. Numerals 1-10. Age. 
Word-order . . . . . . .21 

VI. Past participle. Haber. Perfect tense. Present 
participle. Bstar. Comparison of ser and 
estar . . . . . . . .25 

VII. Possessive adjectives and pronouns. Special use 

of masculine plural of nouns and pronouns 29 

VIII. Synopsis of review. Composition 33 

IX. Noun of material. Personal object. Agreement 
of adjectives. Demonstrative adjectives . and 
pronouns. Prepositional forms of personal pro- 
nouns. Ir. Idiomatic ..... 34 

X. Object forms of personal pronouns. Position. 
Double pronoun object construction. Poder, 
querer, decir, hacer. Gustar .... 39 

XI. Imperfect and past definite. Irregular imperfects. 

Orthographical irregularities. The pluperfect . 44 



Vlll 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



LESSONS PAGE 

XII. Synopsis of review. Composition ... 48 

XIII. Reflexive pronouns and verbs. Que and cudl. Ver. 49 

XIV. Irregular past definites. Infirfitives after preposi- 

tions. Numerals 11-39. Tener idiomatic. Time 

of day ........ 54 

XV. Future and conditional. Future and conditional 

perfects. Comparison. Use of the articles . 57 

XVI. Synopsis of review. Composition ... 61 

XVII. The subjunctive in subject and object clauses. Se- 
quence of tenses. Dependent infinitives . . 62 

XVIII. Radical-changing verbs. Adjectives that lose the 

final letter .... . . . . .66 

XIX. Constructions with two object pronouns. Neuter 

gender. Dar. Acabar. Omission of articles 70 

XX. Synopsis of review. Composition ... 74 

XXI. Subjunctive in main clauses and as imperative. Ir- 
regular present subjunctives. Inceptive verbs. 
Greeting and leave-taking .... 75 

XXII. Imperfect subjunctives. Conditions contrary to 
fact. Quisiera. Salir and venir. Days, months, 
and seasons ....... 79 

XXIII. Subjunctive in adjective and adverb clauses. In- 

definite negative words. Use of infinitive. The 
weather ........ 83 

XXIV. Synopsis of review. Composition 87 

XXV. Future subjunctive. Endings of imperative. More 
orthographical changes. Conocer and saber. 
Cardinal points. Distance. Cualquiera. Agra- 
decer . . . . . . . .88 

XXVI. Subjunctive in object clauses. Pcdir and comprar. 
Uno. Demonstratives as correlatives. Definite 
articles used for demonstratives and personal 
pronouns. Adverbs in -mcntc . . .93 



CONTENTS IX 

LESSONS PAGE 

XXVII. Cardinal numerals. Relative pronouns. Causative 
construction. Object pronouns impersonally 
used. Haber idiomatic. ..... 97 

XXVIII. Synopsis of review. Composition . . . 102 

XXIX. Clauses depending on prepositions. Verbs with 
subjunctive or infinitive. Possessive adjectives 
(long forms). Indirect object to express pos- 
session. Parecer, hacer falta, and poner. Tal 103 

XXI£. Compound tenses of the subjunctive. Compari- 
son. Cuyo. Valer ...... 108 

XXXI. Irregular use of tenses. The perfect of the past 
definite. Personal objective. Nunca and jamas. 
Si and no. Definite article. Traer . .112 

XXXII. Synopsis of review. Composition . . .117 

XXXIII. Hacer in time expressions. Oir. Oir and ver with 

an object and an infinitive. Todo. Impersonal 
verb with indirect object . . . . .118 

XXXIV. Position of adjectives. Grande and santo. Otro. 

Cada. Sino. Ann. Dar idiomatic . . . 122 

XXXV. More about personal pronouns. Reciprocal con- 
struction. Adverbial clauses involving two sub- 
junctives. Impersonal verbs. Andar . . 127 

XXXVI. Synopsis of review. Composition . . .131 

XXXVII. The passive and its substitutes. Bstar with the 
past participle. Dcjar. Ac or dar se de and re- 
cordar. Idioms. ...... 133 

XXXVIII. El cuerpo humano 138 

XXXIX. Omission of indefinite article. Verbs in -uir. Con- 
cluir. Mayor and menor. Joven and viejo. 
Correlatives 140 

XL. Review and composition 143 

XLL Use of the imperative mode. Irregular impera- 
tives. Prometer. Volver a. Jugar. Caer and 
reir 144 



X SPANISH GRAMMAR 

LESSONS PAGE 

XLII. Spanish money. Price. Suffixes -evo, -eria, -ito, 
-illo, -uelo . Traducir. Ni and tampoco. Shop- 
ping ...... .147 

XLIII. Idiomatic. Dimensions. Prepositions . . 150 

" XLIV. Ordinal numerals. Noun construction. Definite 

article. Suffixes of nationality. Caber. Madrid 153 

The Verb. Paradigms and List of Irregular Verbs . 157 

English-Spanish Vocabulary . . . . . 177 

Index . . 193 






\ 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



PRONUNCIATION 

1. The Alphabet. The signs of the Spanish alphabet 
are: a, b, c, ch, d, e, f, g, h, i j, (k), I, 11, m y n, n> 
o, P, q> r, rr, s, t, u, v, (w), x, y, z. 

The combinations ch, 11, n, and rr are considered letters of the 
alphabet. They are to be found in the dictionaries after c, I, n t 
and r respectively. 

k and w do not properly belong to the Spanish alphabet. They 
are used in a few foreign words only, k has the sound of English 
k and zv that of English v or w. 

Mute or silent letters are common in English. Spanish letters 
are almost invariably pronounced. There are two important ex- 
ceptions. 

h is always mute, and must be ignored in pronunciation. 

i< is mute if it follows q or g and at the same time precedes 
e or i : that is to say, it is mute in the combination gue, gui, que, 
qui. 

2. The Vowels. The vowels are a, e, i, o, u. They 
are graded according to their resonance into strong (a, e, o) 
and weak (i, u) vowels. Each vowel has its distinct, char- 
acteristic sound. 

a has the sound of English a in "father." 
e has the sound of English a in "fate." 
i has the sound of English i in "machine." 
o has the sound of English o in "no." 
u has the sound of English oo in "moon." 

Note. It is certain that the vowels sometimes assume natter, or more 
open sounds than those given above ; but as this is the result of purely 
natural causes, such as unaccented position in the word, or proximity of 
other sounds that interfere with the full vowel sound, and since the English 
speaking student has a natural tendency to flatten the Spanish vowels, it seems 
advisable to ignore these distinctions here. 



2 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

3. Diphthongs and Triphthongs. (a) An English 
diphthong consists of two vowels pronounced as a single 
sound. The Spanish diphthong is a combination of two 
vowels so rapidly pronounced as to make but a single syl- 
lable. The vowels lose little of their individual value. 

(b) Two vowels side by side do not necessarily make a 
diphthong. The only possible diphthongs are composed of 
a strong and a weak vowel (a, e, o, with i, u), or of two 
w^eak vowels (i with u). The possible combinations are, 
then: ai, ei, oi, au, eu, ou, iu, or, transposing the vowels, 
ia, ie, io, ua, ue, uo, ui. 

(c) When a diphthong stands in an unstressed syllable, 
neither vowel is stressed more than the other. When a 
diphthong stands in a stressed syllable, a decided stress is 
placed on the strong vowel, or, in case the diphthong con : 
sist of two weak vowels, on the second weak vowel. 

(d) A triphthong is a combination of a strong vowel be- 
tween two weak vowels, occurring in a stressed syllable. 
Possible triphthongs are iai, iei, uai, uei, iau. 

(e) The letter y is sometimes found in a diphthong or 
triphthong as the last letter of a word instead of i. Ex. : 
hay, doy, buey. 

4. The Consonants, f, 1, m, n, p, and x need not be 
discussed, since they sound alike in English and Spanish. 

b, v. The English b is made by pressing the lips firmly 
together and violently separating them. In making the 
Spanish b, the pressure is the merest contact, and the re- 
sulting sound is much fainter. It is something between 
our v and w. This sound has a somewhat more explosive 
character after m or n, and when it is uttered emphatically. 
Spanish v is made in the same way as Spanish b, and is 
identical with it in sound, but it is never written before 
consonants. 



PRONUNCIATION 



3 



ch. This sound is identical with the English ch in 
"cheese." 

d is similar to the English sound, but is made by putting 
the tongue against the upper teeth instead of against the 
palate. This different contact gives Spanish d a sound 
very much like English th in "these." 

j has the sound of a very roughly aspirated h. It is 
quite like German ch in "Bach." 

11 has the sound of English Hi in "million." 

n has the sound of English ni in "onion." 

q never occurs except before u, when it has the sound 
of English k. 

r is never slighted. It is always pronounced very dis- 
tinctly, and with a distinct roll when coming at the begin- 
ning of a word, when final, or after another consonant. 

rr is an r that is trilled with the tip of the tongue. 

s has the sound of s in "sister," never that of s in 
"please." 

t is similar to English t, but, like Spanish d, is made 
against the upper teeth instead of against the palate. 

y has sometimes the consonant value of English y in 
"yes," and is sometimes identical with Spanish i. 

z has the sound of English mute th in "thing." 

5. c, g. These consonants differ from the other Span- 
ish consonants in that each has two quite different sounds. 

c before a, o, u, or a consonant, has the same sound as 
Spanish qu (English k). 

c before e or i has the sound of Spanish z (English th 
in "thing"). 

g before a, o, u, has the sound of English g in "go." 

g before e or i, has the sound of Spanish j (rough h- 
sound). 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



c, qu, z, g, gu, j, gii. The sounds represented by these 
spellings, and their relation to each other, offer the chief 
difficulty in the spelling of Spanish. The following table 
will help to make these matters clear : 



ENGLISH 
SOUND 


SPANISH SPELLING 


Before Vowels 


Before Consonant 
or When Final 


a 


e i 


o 


u 


k 


ca 


que 


qui 


CO 


cu 


c 


thin ' 'thing" 


za 


ce 


ci 


zo 


zu 


z 


gin "go" 


ga 


gue 


gui 


go 


gu 


g 


rough h-sound 


ja 


ge 


gi 


JO 


JU 


— 


gw-sound 


gua 


giie 


gui 


guo. 


— 


— 



Note a. In que, qui, gue, gui, the u is silent, as already stated 
in i. It is merely an orthographical sign-post, to show that the 
preceding consonant. is pronounced as before a, o, u. In these com- 
binations, ue and ui do not, of course, make diphthongs. In giie, 
gui, the diaeresis causes the u to be pronounced, and ue, ui are 
diphthongs. 

Note b. In a few words / or z may be written before e or i. 
Ex. : traje, paje, dije, jeronimo, zigzag, zinc, etc. 

6. Syllabification, a. In dividing a word into sylla- 
bles, groups of consonants of which the second is 1 or r, 
may not be separated. Exceptions to this rule are the 
groups rl, si, tl, and sr. 

(Inseparable) la-bra-dor, de-cla-rar, re-fre-nar, re-gla. (Sep- 
arable) es-la-bon, Is-ra-el, At-las, Car-los. 

b. A single consonant between vowels begins a sylla- 
ble, ch, 11, n, rr, and x are considered single consonants. 

me-dal, o-lor, a-mi-go, cie-no, pa-na-de-ro, ma-cho, ca-lle, ba-rra, 
e-xa-men. 

c. The second of two consonants not inseparable, un- 
less it be an s, begins a syllable. 

ser-vir, cuan-to, en-ga-no, res-pon-der, ar-zo-bis-po, es-ta-do, 
ins-truc-cion, cons-ti-tuir, pers-pi-ca-cia, trans-pi-rar. 

d. The second of two vowels that do not make a diph- 
thong, begins a syllable. 

cre-er, bre-a, co-o-pe-rar, ma-cs-tro, pa-is, co-mi-ais, ba-id. 



PRONUNCIATION 5 

e. Spanish compounds are regularly divided according 
10 their elements. 

des-am-pa-ro, nos-otros, vos-otros. 

7. Stress and Accent. The following simple rules for 
determining the stressed syllable of a Spanish word, are 
now universally followed, although a different system pre- 
vails in books issued previous to 1888, at which time these 
rules were fixed by the Spanish Academy. 

a. A word ending in a vowel, or n or s, is regularly stressed 
on the next to the last syllable (penult). 

alto, grande, tierra, aman, imposible, antiguo, venia, fragua, etc. 

b. A word ending in a consonant, other than n or s, is regu- 
larly stressed on the last syllable. 

usted, mujer, abril, vecindad. 

c. Many words are irregular, and do not conform to these 
rules. Such words always have the syllable to be stressed plainly 
indicated by the acute accent (') over the vowel. 

hable, lie go, comi, tendrds, iambien. (Exceptions to a.) 
huesped, cardcter, drbol, etc. (Exceptions to b.) 

d. Any word stressed farther back than the next to the last 
syllable, must have the acute accent on the stressed syllable. 

dnima, espiritu, digamelo, timidamente. 

e. Monosyllables regularly require no written accent. 

rey, yo, de, cal. 

f. A written accent placed over a syllable that contains a 
diphthong, falls on the strong vowel, or on the second of two weak 
vowels, in accordance with the principle expressed in 3 c. A triph- 
thong takes the accent over the strong vowel. 

8. The Acute Accent. The acute accent is the only 
accent used in modern Spanish. 

a. The acute accent is used chiefly to point out irregularly 
stressed syllables, as indicated in 7. 

b. It is also used to break up a diphthong: that is, to show 
that contiguous vowels which would normally make a diphthong 
or triphthong (see 3 b), belong to different syllables. When used 
in this way the accent stands always over a weak vowel (over the 
first weak in the case of two weaks, over the weak in the case of 
a strong and a weak, and over the first weak of a triphthong). 

baul, pais, impios, Huido, comiais. 



O SPANISH GRAMMAR 

c. It is often used to distinguish two words which are spelled 
and pronounced the same, but which have a different meaning or 
use. 

tu, you tu, your 

el, he el, the 

este, this one este, this (adj.) ■ 

d. With a few monosyllables it is used arbitrarily. 

a, 6, u, e, di, vi, fiue, etc. 

9. Capitalization. The use of the capitals in Spanish 
is in general the same as in English. 

'Exceptions, (a) The pronoun yo, "I," the days of the week, 
the months of the year, and proper adjectives, are not capitalized 
when they stand in the body of a sentence, (b) Adjectives of na- 
tionality used as nouns, may or may not be capitalized, (c) Names 
of languages are not capitalized. Ex. : Los Espanoles hablan es- 
panol. The Spaniards speak Spanish. 

10. Punctuation. The chief peculiarities of Spanish 
punctuation are: — a. Inverted question marks (i) and ex- 
clamation points (i) at the beginning of questions and 
exclamations, b. Use of the dash instead of quotation 
marks in dialogue, c. In an extensive quotation, the use 
of the quotation mark (") at the beginning of each line. 
d. Frequent use of suspension points (...) to indicate an 
incomplete sentence. 

11. Irregularities of Pronunciation. The pronuncia- 
tion of Spanish indicated above, is based on the speech of 
an educated native of Madrid. The Spanish of certain parts 
of Spain, and of certain Spanish-American countries varies 
somewhat from this standard, but no more than the Eng- 
lish of London and of New York and of New Orleans dif- 
fer from each other. It is thought that an exposition of 
the peculiarities of the Spanish spoken outside of Castile, 
would tend, at this point, to confuse the student. In prac- 
tice they are very readily acquired by anyone who has a 
tolerable facility in the use of the Castilian. 



PRONUNCIATION 



Any individual words that may be irregular in pronun- 
ciation, will be commented on as they occur in the follow- 
ing; lessons. 



X t5 



12. Some Suggestions, (a) There are many Spanish 

words that are written like the corresponding English words 

of Latin origin. The student, coming across them for the 

first time, has a tendency to pronounce them in the familiar 

way. He may be sure in advance that he is wrong. Such 

words require especial care. 

con-ti-nen-tal, per-so-nal, doc-tor, va-lor, di-ges-tion, re-H-gion, 
cir-cu-lar, me-tal, crisis, ter-mi-nal. 

b. Many English vowels are impure, and end in a glide, as 
can be seen by pronouncing, rather slowly, "can" (ca-un), "spell" 
(spe-ul), "bone" (bo-un). The Spanish vowels are free from this 
glide, and are enunciated with a certain crispness. 

c. In a Spanish word, no matter how long, each vowel has its 
characteristic sound. It does not break down into an indeterminate 
u-sound, as internal vowels often do in English, when not accented. 

ca-rac-te-ris-ti-co, characteristic. 
res-pon-si-bi-li-dad, responsibility. 
ex-tra-or-di-na-ria-men-te, extraordinarily. 

d. Those who have studied French must be careful not to give 
the syllables an, on, en, etc., the French nasal sound, nor to pro- 
nounce final e as mute, in the syllables de, me, te, se, : que, etc. 

e. Always stress a syllable that has a written accent. 

fdcil, dificil, cardcter, nacion, retorico, telegrafo, telefono, etc. 

/. In writing, remember that doubled consonants almost never 
occur in Spanish. 

inmenso, immense; atencion, attention; aniversario, anniversary; 
aiirmar, affirm; aproximar, approximate; pasando, passing. 

EXERCISES IN PRONUNCIATION. 

Note. This exercise after being used for oral drill, should be used as 
a dictation exercise. The reason for each written accent should be brought out. 

a, e, i, o, u, f, I, m, n, p, r, s, t: me, le, la, lo, fe, ni, no, en, 
el, un, fil, pan, amo, pena, mono, polo, mula, fano, foro, era, fulano, 
meloso, lesa, liso, panela, minuto, peseta, Teresa, tiro, sumo, ma- 
rino, perulero, tupe, papa, sali, amo, Peru, eran, pusimos. 

ch, h, 11, n, r final and initial, rr : chucha, chino, hache, macho, 
hallar, nulla, lloroso, rollo, relleno, pillito, ella, manana, fiapa, pena, 



8 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

arioso, rine, rufiar, safiudo, rana, arre, parra, arrimar, marrullero, 
horror, sur, ahora, vehiculo. 

d, b, v, y. boda, beber, bayeta, badila, sabido, fabula, burro, 
madera, red, tened, de, don, maduro, vivir, varonil, voto, revelar, 
pavura, villa, raya, yerro, huye, yema, yo, hoyo. 

c $ Q u , z, g, g u , j '• calle, toco, recuperar, cecina, decimo, racimo, 
duque, maquina, caza, zurron, zizaiia, haz, coz, pagar, logico, geologo, 
guerra, guijo, guiar, caja, j anion, majadero, judicar, figura, Jesus, 
jiba, zero, cero, zorro, mazo, jumelos, quemar, gula. 

Inseparable consonant groups : tabla, blando, brazo, abrasar, 
clima, tecla, crocodilo, necrosis, drama, padre, flor, franela, peri- 
frasis, gloton, miraglo, grefia, vinagre, pluma, aplomo, profeta, 
apretado, tren, patrono. 

Separable consonant groups: esbelto, escaldar, esforzar, es- 
grima, eslabon, esmalta, esparcido, esquela, esquina, estanco, Car- 
lota, doctor, empresa, hombre, manzana, olmo, fornido, ordenes, 
alerta, cesante, excepto, apto, burgo, expansivo, atlantico, balcon, 
alhaja, falange, carbon, dando, hermano, designar, tratarse, honra, 
conyugal, volvera, ensalzaba, ninfa, golpe, albergue, parezca, or- 
questa, servir, ennegrecer, aceder, adlatere, admirar, dogma, himno, 
anhelo, monjita, Archena, rasgo, enfado, inmenso, inquisidor, plazga, 
Jorge, envolver, Elche. 

transcurrir, esclavo, escribir, esdrujulo, explosion, transparen- 
tar, obscuro, exclamar, transformacion, complacer, entrar, pamfleta, 
constructor. 

Diphthongs and triphthongs : retraimiento, baile, reinado, boina, 
caudillo, jaula, reunion, deuda, ciudad, Miura, familia, viaja, bou, 
sociedad, nadie, tierra, prestigio, dio, perpetua, guardarropa, cuando, 
frecuentar, nuevas, agiiero, antiguo, virtuosa, cuota, ruidoso, Luis, 
argiiir, fiais, apreciais, aprecieis, averigiiais, averigiieis, Miau, hay, 
voy, rev, muy, guay, buey, influencia, Biblia, eleccion, monstruo. 

Non-diphthongs : Bilbao, maestro, Joaquin, coexistir, leon, idea, 
creeme, loor, pais, creimos, oido, baul, todavia, varien, continue, 
pua, duo, impios, fluido, huiais. 

Names of letters of the alphabet: a, be, ce, che, de, e, efe, ge, 
hache, i, jota, ka, ele, elle, erne, ene, ene, o, pe, cu, ere, erre, ese, te, 
u, ve, equis, y griega, zeta. 



ESSENTIALS OF GRAMMAR 

LESSON I. 

Remark. All words given in this lesson should be memorized. 

13. Gender of Nouns. Spanish nouns, including the 
names of things, have either masculine or feminine gender. 
Some nouns give us a clue to their gender, in their form, 
or their meaning. 

Note. For the benefit of those who have studied French or L,atin, it 
may be stated that the gender of the Spanish noun is generally that of the 
related French noun, and that of the L/atin noun, except that L,atin neuters 
are masculine in Spanish. 

a. Most nouns that end in o are masculine. Most nouns that 
end in a are feminine. The most important exceptions are mano, 
f., "hand," and dia, m., "day." 

b. The names of male beings are masculine, and the names of 
female beings are feminine. 

c. Names of female beings are often like the corresponding 
names of male beings, except that they end in a. 

hermano, brother hermana, sister 

hi jo, son hija, daughter 

muchacho, boy muchacha, girl 

nino, child (male) nina, child (female) 

senor, gentleman senor a, lady 

maestro, teacher (man) maestro, teacher (woman) 

14. Plural of Nouns. In general, Spanish nouns form 
their plural by adding ^ or es to the singular according to 
the following rules : 

a. Nouns ending in a vowel (or diphthong) add s: 

hijo, hijos; hermana, hermanas. 

b. Nouns ending in a consonant (including y) add es: 

senor, senores. 

c. As z does not regularly stand before e, nouns ending in 
this letter must change z to c before adding es. (See 5.) 

voz, voice; voces, voices. 



IO SPANISH GRAMMAR 

15. Definite Article. The definite article, "the" in Eng- 
lish, has the following forms : 

Masculine. Singular el. Plural los. 
Feminine. Singular la. Plural las. 

a. The definite article always precedes the noun it modifies., 
and regularly agrees with it in number and gender. 

el senor, la maestra, los muchachos, las hijas. 
Note. The noun agua, "water," and all feminine singular nouns 
that begin with stressed a or ha, require the masculine article el 
instead of the feminine la, thus : el agua. This violation of the rules 
of agreement is to avoid the unpleasant prolongation of the a- 
sound. 

b. The preposition de, "of, from," followed by el, contracts 
with it to del. The preposition a, "to, at," followed by £// contracts 
with it to al. 

16. Indefinite Article. The indefinite article, English 
"a, an," like the definite article, precedes its noun and agrees 
with it. It has but two forms : un, masculine singular, and 
una, feminine singular. 

un nino, una nlna. 

a. In English the article (both definite and indefinite), may 
be made to serve two or more nouns. In Spanish, the articles must 
be repeated before each noun : 

El nino y la nina. The boy and girl. 

Una senora y un senor. A lady and gentleman. 

17. Possessive Case. As the Spanish noun has no 
special form for the possessive, it is necessary to employ 
the preposition de to express this relation thus: el som- 
brero de la nina, the child's hat ; las Hores del muchacho, 1lie 
boy's flowers. 

Exercise. 

Give the gender of the following nouns : 
libro, book padre, father 

casa, house mesa, table 

hombre, man dinero, money 

perro, dog presidente, president 



MSSON II II 

Give the plurals of the following nouns, and of those already 
learned, and give the reason for the plural form : 
clase, f., class, recitation comedor, m., dining-room 

sombrero, m., hat rey, m., King 

flor, f., flower lengua, f., language 

despacho, m., sitting-room, office voz, f., voice 

Translate orally into English : i. El comedor del rey. 2. Los 
libros de los maestros. 3. Las voces de las ninas. 4. El padre 
de la muchacha. 5. De la clase a la casa. 6. Del presidente al 
rey. 7. Del despacho a la clase. 8. Las clases del dia. 9. La 
mesa del comedor. 10. Los perros del nifio. 

Translate orally into Spanish: 1. The King's son. 2. From 
the dining-room to the sitting-room, 3. A boy of the class. 4. A 
man's sister. 5. The gentlemen's books. 6. The girl's hands. 
7. The children's father. 8. A president's brother. 9. The lan- 
guage of the gentlemen. 10. The ladies' money. 



LESSON II. 

18. The Verb, Infinitives, the Three Conjugations. 

The Spanish verb has more forms than the English verb. 
The name of the verb, and the form by which it is to be 
found in the vocabularies, is the infinitive. All Spanish in- 
finitives end in -ar, -er, or -ir. 

hablar, to speak; comer, to eat; vivir, to live. 
Verbs are grouped into three conjugations on the basis of the 
three infinitive endings. Verbs of the first conjugation {-ar verbs) 
differ widely in form from verbs of the second {-er verbs) and 
third {-ir verbs) conjugations. Verbs of the second and third con- 
jugations are conjugated alike in all but four forms out of fifty- 
nine. , 

19. Stem and Endings. The stem of a verb may be 
found by cutting off the infinitive ending. 

habl- com- viv- 

To this stem, which we shall call the stem of the infini- 
tive, are added the "endings," which express distinctions of 
person, number, tense, and mode. 



12 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



20. Regular and Irregular Verbs. A regular verb 
is one, all of whose forms may be derived from the infini- 
tive : i. e., all of whose forms may be made by adding ap- 
propriate endings to the stem of the infinitive. An irregular 
verb may have more than one stem, or it may have "irreg- 
ular" endings. 

21. The Present Indicative. The endings for the 
present tense, indicative mode, are : 



SINGULAR 



PERSON 
I. 
2. 

3- 
i. 

2. 

3- 




Applying these endings to stems of regular verbs, we get : 



hablo, I speak como, I eat 

hablas, you speak comes, you eat 

habla, he speaks, she come, he eats, 

speaks eats 

hablamos, we speak comemos, we eat 

habldis, you speak comeis, you eat 

hablan, they speak comen, they eat 



vivo, I live 
vives, you live 
she vive, he lives, 
lives 
vivhnos, we live 
vivis, you live 
viven, they live 



she 



Note. Tt is clear from these models that the endings express the number 
and person of the subject of the verb, and in this respect perform the func- 
tion of the personal pronouns, which are usually omitted. If the subject of a 
verb is a noun, the verb agrees with it in number. 

El discipulo estudia mucho. The pupil studies a great deal. 

Los discipulos estudian mucho. The pupils study a great deal. 



DRILL. 

In similar way form the present indicative of each of the verbs 
given in the vocabulary. Repeat orally. 

Note. In conjugating orally the learner should consider most carefully 
the stress of each verb form. In the present indicative the stress falls on 
the stem in all forms except the first and second persons plural. 

22. Use of the Present Indicative. The forms of the 
present indicative express, not only simple statements in 



LESSON II T3 

present time, but also the emphatic present, expressed in 
English by the auxiliary "dd," "does," and the progressive 
present (Eng., "I am speaking," etc.). 

hablamos, we speak, we are speaking, we do speak. 

23. Non-inflection of Spanish Noun. The Spanish 
noun does not vary in form to express the objective (accus- 
ative) case, the possessive (genitive) case, or the indirect 
objective (dative) case. Its form is the same whether used 
as subject, direct or indirect object of a verb, or object of 
a preposition. (For the possessive see 17.) 

24. Noun as Indirect Object. The noun used as in- 
direct object of a verb, is preceded by the preposition a, 
"to," or para, "for." 

Juan compra el libro para Maria. John buys the book for Mar)'. 
Juan lleva el libro a Maria. John takes the book to Mary. 

Note. These prepositions are never omitted as their equivalents often 
are in English. 

John buys Mary the book. 
John takes Mary the book. 

25. Word-order, a. Affirmative. The normal order 
of the simple affirmative sentence is: subject (if expressed), 
verb, object (if any). 

Maria compra libro s. Mary buys books. 
Compramos un sombrero. We are buying a hat. 

b. Interrogative. An affirmative sentence is made in- 
terrogative by inverting the order of subject and verb. 
j Compra Maria librosf Is Mary buying books? 

If no subject is expressed, the order is the same as in 
the affirmative sentence. Question marks or the inflection 
of the voice show that the sentence is interrogative. 

jCompran un sombrero para Juan? Are they buying a hat for 
John? 



14 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



In an interrogative sentence, if the subject of the verb 
is not a pronoun, the object may come before the subject, 
particularly if it be shorter than the subject. 

jCompra libros el hijo del maestro f Is the teacher's son buy- 
ing books? 

c. Negative. An affirmative or an interrogative sen- 
tence may be made negative by placing the adverb no be- 
fore the verb. 

Maria no compra libros. Mary does not buy books. 

j No compran un sombrero para Juan? Are they not buying a 
hat for John? 

Note. In English, sentences are made interrogative or negative with the 
help of the auxiliary *'do." There is no equivalent for this auxiliary in 
Spanish. In negative sentences, no must be translated "no" or "not," accord- 
ing to the sentence. 

VOCABULARY 



VERBS. 

aprender, to learn. 

bajar, to go down, to come down. 

beber, to drink. 

cantar, to sing. 

comer, to eat. 

comprar, to buy. 

correr, to run. 

entrar en, to go into, to come 

into. 
escribir, to write. 
estudiar, to study. 
fumar, to smoke. 
hablar, to speak, to talk. 
hallar, to find. 
llevar, to carry, to bring. 
tomar, to take. 
trabajar, to work. 
vivir, to live. 

NOUNS. 

discipulo, -a, pupil. 
Juan, John. 



leccion, f., lesson. 
Maria, Mary. 
senor, -a, Sir, Madam. 
tienda, store, shop.* 

ADVERBS. 

aqui, here. 

bien, well. 

demasiado, too, too much. 

mal, badly. 

mncho, much, a great deal. 

no, no, not. 

poco, little. 

si, yes. 

tambien, also. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

con, with. 
en, in, on. 
para, for. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

6, or. 
pero, but. 
y, and. 



•Gender of nouns in vocabularies is not indicated, if regular. (See 13.) 



J.DSSOiX II 15 

EXERCISE II. 

(a). Aprendo bien. <; Aprendes bien? <:No aprendes bien? 
No aprendo bien. «j Canto bien? No cantas mal. iNo canto mal? 
Cantas bien. Juan corre mucho. <; Corre mucho? ^No corre Juan 
mucho? Juan no corre mucho. Maria estudia poco. ^Estudia 
Maria poco? iVivimos aqui? Vivis aqui. <;No escribimos? No 
escribis. Los muchachos trabajan. <: Trabajan los muchachos? Las 
muchachas trabajan tambien. I Trabajan las muchachas tambien? 
^Estudiais 6 trabajais? Estudiamos y trabajamos. 

(b). El maestro vive aqui. El maestro baja al comedor. Come 
y bebe. Fuma pero no fuma demasiado. Entra en el despacho. 
Halla dinero en la mesa. Lleva el dinero a una tienda. Compra 
libros con el dinero. Compra libros para los discipulos. Lleva los 
libros de la tienda a la clase. Los discipulos toman los libros de 
las manos del maestro. Estudian en los libros. Estudian las lec- 
ciones. Aprenden una lengua. Los ninos aprenden bien, pero las 
ninas aprenden mal. Maria habla demasiado y estudia poco : corre 
y canta y escribe en el libro del maestro. 

(c). iVive el maestro aqui? 

Si, senor, el maestro vive aqui. 

iBaja el maestro al despacho? 

No, senor. El maestro baja al comedor. 

iFuma mucho el maestro? 

No, senora : pero come y bebe mucho. 

I Comes mucho? 

<;No fumais demasiado? 

I Halla el maestro dinero en el comedor? 

I Lleva el maestro el dinero a la clase? 

I Compra flores en la tienda? 

iNo compran los discipulos flores para el maestro? 

I Compra el maestro un sombrero con el dinero? 

iEstudiais una lengua? 

^Estudiais en el comedor, 6 en el despacho? 

I Aprendes bien 6 mal? 



i6 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



LESSON III. 



26. Personal Pronouns used as Subject. The per- 
sonal pronouns have different forms, according as they are 
used as subject or object. The forms used as subject follow : 
Person . Form English 



o 

en 


i 
j "intimate" 
( "ordinary" 

3 


yo 

tu 

usted 

el, m., ella, f. 


I 

you 

you 

he, she, (it) 


i 
J "intimate" 
( "ordinary" 

3 


nosotros, m., nosotras, f. we 
vosotros, m., vosotras, f. you 
ustedes you 
ellos, m., ellas, f. they 



27. Use of the Subject Pronouns. 

a. We have nothing in English corresponding to the so-called 
"intimate" forms of the second person singular and plural. They 
correspond more nearly to the German du and ihr, and French tu. 
They are used in addressing near relatives and intimate friends, 
as well as animals and inferiors. Since they might be used but 
rarely by foreigners in Spain, they will occur but rarely in this 
book. Naturally, the student will find them constantly in his read- 
ing. 

b. Usted and ustedes are the pronouns of ordinary address. 
They arc used with the third person singular and plural of the 
verb, respectively. 

Usted habla mncho. You talk a great deal. 
Ustedes comen poco. You eat little. 

Note. The reason for this peculiar usage is that usted is derived from 
two words meaning "your grace." A similar use prevails in English, with 
titles. 

Your grace has ..., Your Majesty is ..., etc. 

r. Usted and ustedes are commonly abbreviated V ., VV., or 
Vd., Vds. 

d. With the exception of usted and ustedes, the subject pro- 
nouns agree with their verb in person and number. 



I^SSON HI 17 

e. Since names of things have grammatical gender in Spanish, 
it is clear that el and ella, when referring to things, are translated 
by English "it" 

DRILL. 

Conjugate orally any verb in Lesson II, placing before each 
form the corresponding subject-pronoun or pronouns. Yo trabajo, 
itc. Conjugate negatively, Yo no trabajo, etc. Conjugate interrog- 
atively, jTrabajo yo? etc., and both negatively and interrogatively, 
\No trabajo yo? etc. 

28. Omission of Subject Pronouns. Since the verb- 
ending makes clear, in most cases, the person and number 
of the subject, the subject pronoun is often omitted. It 
must be expressed, however, when it is not perfectly clear 
what the subject is, and also to bring out emphasis or con- 
trast. Ustcd and ustedes are generally expressed, even 
where there is no ambiguity. If they stand as subject of 
more than one verb, they are commonly expressed but once. 

Apr end o. Estudiamos. Trabajdis y estudidis. 
El cant a pero ella no canta. (Expressed for contrast.) 
Juan y Maria trabajan. El estndia tambien. (Not clear with- 
out pronoun.) 

Usted habla. Usted habla y escribe. 
iHabla y escribe usted? 

29. The irregular verb tetter. Tener, "to have/' ex- 1/ 
presses ownership or temporary possession. It is quite ir- 
regular. 

PRESENT INDICATIVE. 
SINGULAR PLURAI, 

i. tengo, I have 1. tenemos, we have 

2. Uenes, you have 2. tenets, you have 

3. tiene, he has, she has, you 3. ticnen, they have, you have 

have 

30. English "must" and "ought." 

a. Obligation and compulsion are expressed in Spanish 
by some form of tener, followed by que, and an infinitive. 
Tengo que comer ahora. I must eat now. 
j Tiene que estudiarf Does he have to study? 
Tienen que trabajar. They have to work. 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



b. Duty or moral obligation is expressed by the regular 
verb deber, and an infinitive. 

Usted debe aprender una lengua. You ought to learn a lan- 
guage. 

Debemos estudiar la lection. We should study the lesson. 

31. Para with Infinitive. Purpose may be expressed 
by para and the infinitive. 

El nino estudia para aprender. The child studies to (in order 
to) learn. 




32. Interrogative Word-order. If a sentence contains 
an interrogative word, it generally begins the sentence. 
jPor que estudia msted ahora? Why do you study now? 
jDonde vive el muchacho? Where does the boy live? 
jQue compra el maestro? What is the teacher buying? 



VOCABULARY. 



VERBS. 

deber, to owe, "ought." 
desear, to wish, want. 
ensenar, to teach. 
entrar, to go in, come in (in- 
transitive). 
significar, to mean, signify. 
tener, to have. 
tener que, to have to, "must." 
terminar, to finish, end. 

NOUNS. 

ami go, -a, friend. 
carta, letter. 
ejercicio, exercise. 
Espana, Spain. 
espanol, m., Spanish. 
ingles, m., English. 
Jose, Joseph. 
palabra, word. 



pizarron, m., blackboard. 
sustantivo, noun. 
vcrbo, verb. 

ADVERBS. 

all or a, now. 
antes, first. 
d:spucs, afterwards. 
hoy, to-day. 



porque, because (conj.). 

Hola! Hello! (interjection.) 

que? what? (interrogative ad- 
jective or pronoun.) 

por que? why? (interrogative 
adverb.) 

dondc? where? (interrogative 
adverb.) 

quicn? who? whom? (interrog- 
ative pronoun.) 



EXERCISE III. 
(a). iQue tengo? Usted tiene un sombrero. iQue tiene 
usted? Tengo un perro. iQue tiene Maria? Maria tiene la carta. 
I Tenemos amigos ? Ustedes tienen amigos y amigas. i No tienen 



WESSON III 



19 



ustedes hermanos? Tenemos una hermana. <; Tiene el maestro dis- 
cipulos? El maestro tiene discipulos y la maestra tiene discipulas. 
(b). iQue desea usted? Deseo entrar. 1 Por que desea usted 
entrar? Deseo entrar porque deseo hablar con Jose. Jose escribe 
en el despacho. j Hola ! Jose. 1 Escribe usted el ejercicio para el 
maestro? No, senor. Escribo una carta. ,;A quien escribe usted 
la carta? Escribo la carta a un amigo. <;D6nde vive el amigo? 
iVive aqui? Vive en Espafia. «;No tiene usted que estudiar hoy? 
Si; pero antes deseo terminar la carta. Usted debe estudiar ahora 
y terminar la carta despues. 

(c). iQue ensena el maestro? El maestro ensefia una lengua. 
iQue lengua ensena el maestro? El maestro ensena espanol. <;A 
quien ensena espanol el maestro? Ensena espanol a los discipulos. 
iDonde escribe las palabras? Escribe las palabras en el pizarron. 
I Escribe ingles 6 espanol? Escribe espanol. iQue palabras es- 
cribe? Escribe las palabras sustantivo y verbo. iQue significan 
sustantivo y verbo en ingles? Sustantivo significa "noun" y verbo 
significa "verb." 

(d). iQue desea el senor? 

^Donde desea el senor entrar? 

iCon quien desea hablar? 

I A quien escribe Juan? 

iPor que no estudia? 

I Por que no estudia antes ? 

iNo debe trabajar antes? 

I Tiene que trabajar despues? 

iQue aprendemos? 

i'Que lengua aprendemos? 

I Quien ensena espanol? 

iEstudiamos ingles 6 espanol? 

eiQue significa "casa" en ingles? 

iQue significa "blackboard" en espanol? 

iQue lengua habla el maestro? 

iHabla ingles el discipulo? 

I Habla usted espanol ? 



20 SPANISH GRAMMAR 



LESSON IV. 



SYNOPSIS. 

Note. The figures in heavy type refer to the paragraphs of the fore- 
going lessons. 

ARTICLE— (a) indefinite, forms and use, (16) 

(b) definite, forms and use, (15) 
NOUN— (a) gender, (13) 

(b) number, (14) 

(c) case, (17, 23, 24) 
PRONOUN — Personal— (a) subject forms, (26) 

(b) " " use, (27) 

(c) " " omission, (28) 
VERB — regular, (a) infinitives, stem, endings, (18, 19, 20) 

(b) present indicative, forms and use, (21, 22) 
— irregular, (a) tener, present indicative, (29) 
MISCELLANEOUS— Word-order, (25, 32) 

"Must" and "ought," (30) 
Para with infinitive, (31) 

EXERCISE IV. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. The boy learns the lessons. 2. The 
girls go into the store. 3. A girl writes a letter to a friend. 4. A 
pupil writes an exercise. 5. We buy flowers for Mary. 6. The 
children carry the book to the class. 7. The teacher's son finds 
money on the table. 8. He buys a hat with the money. 9. The 
King does not smoke too much. 10. Does John smoke a great 
deal? 11. I am working and you (intimate sing.) are working 
also. 12. Are you studying (ordinary sing.) in order to learn? 
13. Does the lady's friend live here? 14. He speaks English and 
she speaks Spanish. 15. The children ought to come in now. 
16. We (fern.) have a sister and you (intimate phi.) have a broth- 
er. 17. Must I sing for the teacher? 18. Do you wish (ordinary 
phi.) to come in? 19. I have to go down to the sitting-room 
to finish the letter. 20. You should (intimate phi.) write the words 
on the blackboard. 21. What does the word mean? 22. W T hat lan- 
guage do you teach? 23. To whom are you bringing the water? 
24. Why does the dog not come in? 25. The boys and girls are 
studying with the teacher. 26. Where do they (fern.) live? 
27. Are you not running (intimate sing.) too much? 28. Where 
do they (mase.) write the words "noun" and "verb"? 29. Is not 



LESSON V 21 

Joseph now living in Spain? 30. We are coming in because we 
ought to study to-day. 31. You (intimate plu.) sing well, but they 
(fern.) sing badly. 32. I have some books.* S3- John has not 
any classes to-day. 



LESSON V. 

33. Agreement of Adjectives. An adjective varies \^ 
in form for gender and number, and must agree in gender 

and number with the noun it modifies. 

una niha buena, a good girl; nihos buenos, good boys. 

34. Plural of Descriptive Adjectives. Descriptive ad- 
jectives form their plural in the same wav as nouns. (See 

ho 

americano, americanos; ingles, ingleses; fdcil, fdciles. 

35. Gender of Descriptive Adjectives. Most descrip- 
tive adjectives end in o in the masculine singular, and 
change o to a to form the feminine singular. 

bueno, buena; malo, mala. 
Those which do not end in in the masculine, do not change 
to form the feminine, but remain the same. 

un muchacho grande ; una nina grande. 
a. An important exception is that an adjective signifying na- 
tionality, if it ends in a consonant, adds a to the masculine to form 
the feminine. 

espanol, espanola, Spanish. 
f ranees, franc esa, French. 

36. Position of Descriptive Adjectives. Descriptive 
adjectives regularly follow the noun they modify. 

a. Otro, "other," "another," and all adjectives of quantity pre- 
cede their noun. 

otro libro espanol, another Spanish book. 
muchos libros, many books. 

* In 32 and 33 the indefinite "some" and "any" are not to be trans- 
lated, these sentences being equivalent to "I have books," and "John has 
no classes to-day." 



22 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

b. When two adjectives of equal value modify the same noun, 
they follow it, and are connected with each other by the conjunc- 
tion y (e before a word beginning with i or hi). 

un libro grand e y hermoso, a large handsome book. 

c. In case the adjectives are of unequal value, the one which 
comes nearest the noun in English, follows the Spanish noun, and 
the other precedes it. 

el hermoso muchacho francos, the handsome French boy. 

37. Adjectives used as Nouns. Adjectives are often 
used substantively accompanied by the appropriate article, 
the noun modified being implied. 

listed tiene un libro bueno y yo tengo un malo. You have a 
good book and I have a bad one. 

Los aplicados trabajan y los perezosos no trabajan. The indus- 
trious work, and the lazy do not work. 

Los Espanoles v'wen en Espana. The Spanish live in Spain. 

a. Adjectives of nationality used substantively for the name 
of a language, require the masculine definite article. This article 
is generally omitted after the prepositions en or de, and after the 
verbs hablar, aprender, ensenar, estudiar and escribir, unless an 
adverb stands between the verb and the adjective, in which case the 
article is used. 

El ingles es dificil. English is hard. 

El senor habla ingles y espahol. The gentleman speaks Eng- 
lish and Spanish. 

Nosotros aprendemos frances. We are learning French. 

Escribimos el ejercicio en espanol. We are writing the exer- 
cise in Spanish. 

El maestro de espanol tiene mnchos discipulos. The teacher 
of Spanish has many pupils. 

El discip'itlo habla bien el ingles. The pupil speaks English 
well. 

38. The verb ser. The present indicative of the irreg- 
ular verb ser, "to be/' is as follows : 

SINGULAR PLURAL 

i. soy, I am i. somos, we are 

2. eres, you are 2. so is, you are 

3. es, he (she, it) is, you are 3. son, they are, you are 



LESSON V 23 

Note. English "it is," impersonal, is expressed in Spanish by 
es, without a pronoun ; but the Spaniard does not use the imper- 
sonal es in replying to the question jQuien es? "Who is it?" The 
Spanish usage follows : 

It is I Yo soy 1 ( Soy yo 

It is you Usted es * ! or ! Es listed 

It is we Nosotros somos | j Somos nosotros 

It is they, etc. Ellos son J [Son ellos 

Is it you? jEs usted? etc. 

39. Numerals. The cardinal numerals from one to 
ten are: uno (fern, una), dos, tres, cuatro, cinco, seis, 
siete, ocho, nueve, diez. They are uninfected, excepting 
uno, and stand before their noun. 

Note. The masculine uno loses its final when used with a 
noun. 

un libro 

40. Idiomatic. Age. Age is expressed in Spanish by 
the idiomatic use of tener. 

jCudntos anos tiene usted ? How old are you? (Literally, 
How many years have you?) 

Tengo ocho aiios. I am eight years old. (Literally, I have 
eight years.) 

41. Word-order. In an interrogative sentence, a pred- 
icate adjective regularly comes between the verb and the 
subject, if the subject be a noun. 

jEs alemdn el ninof Is the child German? 

jSon aplicados los discipulos? Are the pupils diligent? 

jEs usted ingles f Are you English? 



DRILL. 

Turn into Spanish : A good boy ; a pretty girl ; a diligent 
pupil; difficult lessons; the French teachers; Spanish children; 
German words ; long letters ; the small class ; handsome stores ; a 
large house ; easy languages ; another day ; the other hand ; how 
many books? how much money? many friends. 



24 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



VOCABULARY. 



VERBS. 



llamar, to call, knock. 
tratar, to treat. 



NOUNS. 

aho, year. 
capitulo, chapter. 
clase, f., class, kind. 
grama tica, grammar. 
Luis, Louis. 
pdgina, page. 
regla, rule. 

ADVERBS. 

at contrario, on the contrary. 
alii, there. 
manana, to-morrow. 
muy, very. 

pasado manana, day after to- 
morrow. 
un poquito, a little bit. 

POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 

de quien? of whom, whose? 



ADJECTIVES. 

alemdn, -a, German. 
amcricano, -a, American. 
aplicado, -a, industrious. 
bonito, -a, pretty. 
bueno, -a, good. 
corto-a, short. 
cndnto, -a? how much? 
cndntos, -as? how many? 
dificil, hard, difficult. 
cspanol, -a, Spanish. 
fdcil, easy. 
francos, -a, French. 
grande, big, large. 
hermoso, -a, handsome- 
ingles, -a, English. 
largo, -a, long. 
malo, -a, bad. 
otro, -a, other, another. 
peqneno, -a, little, small. 
perezoso, -a, lazy. 

ADJECTIVE OR PRONOUN. 

mucho, -a, much. 

muchos, -as. many. 

que, which, that, (relative pron.). 



EXERCISE V. 

(a). Los ninos estudian en un libro. Tienen un libro grande 
y hermoso. Es el libro de Luis (or el libro es de Luis). Es un 
libro de gramatica. Los ninos son aplicados. Estudian la leccion 
para maiiana. Estudian el capitulo que trata del sustantivo. El 
capitulo es largo. Tienen que aprender dos paginas de reglas. Las 
reglas no son dificiles. Al contrario son muy faciles. El libro 
trata de gramatica espanola pero las reglas son en ingles. Los ninos 
son ingleses pero estudian espahol. Hablan espafiol un poquito 
pero no muy bien. Uno de los ninos tiene ocho afios y el otro 
tiene diez. Son hermanos. Hoy tienen dos clases y manana tienen 
cuatro. La maestra de los ninos es pequefia pero bonita. Muchos 
de los discipulos de la maestra son buenos, otros son malos y 
perezosos. 

(b). iQue tienen los ninos alii? 
I Tienen un libro pequeno? 
, iDe quien es el libro? 



LESSON VI 



(c). 



Que clase de libro es? 

Son perezosos los nifios? 

Estudian la leccion de hoy? 

Que capitulo estudian ? 

Es largo el capitulo? 

Cuantas paginas de reglas tienen que aprendcr? 

Son faciles las reglas? 

Trata el libro de gramatica francesa u espanola " J 

Cuantas clases tienen los nifios hoy? 

Cuantas tienen manana? 

Cuantos afios tienen los nifios? 

Tienen los ninos hermanos? 

Es grande la maestra de los nifios ? 

Que clase de discipulos tiene la maestra? 

Soy americano 6 espaiiol? 

Es americano el nino? 

Habla ingles 6 espaiiol ? 

Es usted espanol 6 f ranees? 

Que somos nosotros? 

Tiene usted muchos amigos f ranceses ? 

Cuantos amigos f ranceses tiene usted? 

Tienen los discipulos un maestro aleman 6 americano? 

Son americanos 6 alemanes los muchachos? 



LESSON VI. 



42. Past Participle. Regular verbs of the first conju- 
gation form their past participles by adding -ado to the 
stem of the infinitive. Verbs of the second and third con- 
jugations add -ido. 

hablado, spoken; vivido, lived; tenido, had; comldo, eaten; 
sido, been. 

a. The irregular past participle of escribir is escrito. 

43. The auxiliary haber. The irregular verb haber, 
"to have/' is chiefly used as an auxiliary in the formation 
of compound tenses of other verbs. 



26 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

PRESENT INDICATIVE 

1. he, I have, etc. i. hemos, we have, etc. 

2. has 2. habeis 
3- ha. 3. han 

a. There is also a form of the third person, hay, which is 
used impersonally to mean "there is," "there are." 

Hay una mesa en el comedor. There is a table, etc. 
Hay much os discipulos en la clase. There are many, etc. 

44. The Perfect Tense. The perfect tense is a com- 
pound tense formed from the present indicative of haber, 
and the past participle of the verb to be inflected. The use 
of this tense corresponds in the main to that of the English 
present perfect, but it may be used instead of a simple past 
tense. 

" PERFECT INDICATIVE 

Comer 
(I have eaten, I have been eating, I ate.) 

1. . he comido i. hemos comido 

2. has comido 2. habeis ccmido 

3. ha comido 3. han comido 

a. The auxiliary verb must not be separated from its parti- 
ciple. 

j Ha trabajado listed? Have you been working? 

4N0 han estudiado los nihos? Have the children not been 
studying? 

45. The Present Participle. Verbs of the first conju- 
gation regularly form their present participle by adding the 
ending -ando to the stem of the infinitive. Verbs of the 
second and third conjugations add -iendo. The present 
participles never change in form. 

hablando, speaking; comiendo, eating; viviendo, living; siendo, 
being; teniendo, having. 

46. The irregular verb estar. The present indicative 
of the verb estar, "to be" is as follows : 

SINGULAR PLURAL 

1. estoy, I am, etc. 1. estamos, we are, etc. 

2. estds 2. estdis 

3. estd 3. estdn 

The present and past participles of estar are regular. 



LESSON VI 27 

47. Comparison of ser and estar. These verbs, though 
both mean "to be/' are not used interchangeably. 

A. Estar is used : 

a. To express a condition or quality that is temporary or acci- 
dental : 

Bstoy cansado. I am tired. 

El agna estd caliente. The water is warm. 

jComo estd listed? How are you? 

b. To express "place where" or position, whether permanent 
or temporary : 

El hombre estd en Paris. The man is in Paris. 

El cuarto estd en la casa. The room is in the house. 

jDonde estd el maestro? Where is the teacher? 

c. With the present participle to express continued action. 
Estoy comiendo. I am eating. 

Usted estd escribiendo. You are writing. 

B. Ser is used : 

a. To express a condition or quality that is permanent or in- 
herent : 

La maestro es bonita. The teacher is pretty 
jEs fdcil la leccion? Is the lesson easy? 

b. With a predicate noun or pronoun : 

Los senores son amigos. The gentlemen are friends. 
Madrid es una ciudad. Madrid is a city. 
jQuien es usted? Who are you? 

c. To express ownership, material or origin : 
El sombrero es de paja. The hat is of straw. 

El sombrero es de usted. The hat belongs to you. 
La carta es de Espafia. The letter is from Spain. 

d. In impersonal expressions : 

Es tarde? No, es temprano. Is it late? No, it is early. 

Note a. Cases arise in connection with the use of ser and 
estar, where the Spaniard takes a different viewpoint from our 
own: as in the expression, La sefiora es joven, "The lady is young,'" 
where we look upon youth as a temporary quality. Such exceptions 
to the rules given are rare, and will be acquired by practice only. 

Note b. Some adjectives have different meanings according as 
they are used with ser or estar. The commonest are these : 
ser bueno, to be good estar bueno, to be well 

ser malo, to be bad estar malo, to be sick 

ser cansado, to be tiresome estar cansado, to be tired 

ser triste, to be a dull person estar triste, to be sad 



28 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



VOCABULARY. 

Remark. — Words in vocabularies will from now on be arranged 
alphabetically. 

Luisa, Louise. 

madre, mother. 

Madrid, Madrid. 

pajctj straw. 

Paris, Paris. 

pre para r, to prepare. 

qaienes? who? (plur. of quien?) 

repasar, to review, go over. 

subir, to go up, come up. 

tarde, adv., late. 

temprano, adv., early. 

todavia, adv., still, yet. 

tostadas, toast. 

triste, sad. 

ya, adv., already. 



arriba, adv., up-stairs. 
bastante, adv., enough, plenty. 
biblioteca, library, study. 
calient c, warm, hot. 
cansado, -a, tired. 
ciudad, f., city. 
cocina, kitchen. 
comof how? 
cuarto, room. 
chocolate, m., chocolate. 
del todo, adv., at all. 
desayuno, breakfast. 
enfermo, -a, ill, sick. 
frio, -a, cold. 
lis to, -a, ready. 



EXERCISE VI. 

(a). Maria, ^donde esta usted? Estoy en la cocina. iEsta 
usted trabajando? Estoy preparando el chocolate para Juan. <: No 
ha bajado Juan todavia? Si; esta en el despacho (la biblioteca) 
con Luisa. «;Estan repasando la leccion de hoy? Ella esta estudi- 
ando y el esta escribiendo una carta. <;Esta listo el desayuno? El 
chocolate y las tostadas estan en la mesa. 

\b). Es tarde ya y Juan no ha bajado todavia. <;D6nde esta 
madre? Esta arriba. Ha subido al cuarto de Juan. Madre, «Jpor- 
que no baja Juan? No esta bueno del todo. Esta enfermo (or 
esta malo). iHay agua caliente? En la cocina hay bastante. 
(c). iEs temprano ?v 

<;D6nde esta Maria? — 

iQue esta preparando en la cocina?^ 

I Para quien esta preparando el desayuno?, 

,;D6nde esta el cuarto de Juan?^ 

I Quien esta arriba con Juan? 

«; Por que no ha bajado Juan todavia? 

^ Como esta el nifio ? 

<:Es malo el nifio 6 esta enfermo? 

,; Por que ha tenido madre que subir al cuarto de Juan ? 



LESSON VII 



2Q 



('</). ^Donde estamos? 

I Por que estamos aqui? 

iQue estamos estudiando? 

i Cuanto hemos aprendido ? 

;Cuantas muchachas hay en la clase? 

;Quienes son las muchachas? 

I Por que esta usted triste? 

; Ha estado usted en Paris? 

;En que ciudad estamos? 

; Cuantos libros hay en la mesa del maestro ? 

; Como esta usted? 



LESSON VII. 



48. 


Possessive Adjectives. 






PRONOUN POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE. 


ENGLISH 


yo 

tu 

el ) 

ella V 

usted j 

nosotros 

vosotros 

ellos ) 

ellas >• 

ustedes ) 


SINGULAR PLURAL 


my 

your 

his 

her 

your, its 

our 

your 

their 

your 


mi, m. & f. 

tu, m. &/. 

su, m. & f. 

nuestro, m., nuestra, f. 
vuestro, m., vuestra, f. 

su, m. &/. 


mis, m. «& f. 
tus, m. 8cf. 

sus, m. 8cf. 

nuestros, w.,nuestras,/. 
vuestros, w.,vuestras,/. 

sus, m. & f. \ 



49. Use of the Possessive Adjectives. There is a 
possessive adjective to correspond to each personal pro- 
noun. The person and number of the possessor determine 
which, possessive shall be used, and the possessive agrees 
with the noun modified (the thing possessed) in number 
and gender. Its position is before the noun modified. 

Tcngo tu libro. I have your book. 

Hemos estudiado nuestra leccion. We have studied our les- 
son. 

Ellos v sus ami g os. They and their friends. 



30 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



a. If the possessive adjective modifies more than one noun, 
it is expressed before each noun modified. 

mi hermano y mi hermana, my brother and sister. 



50. The possessive adjective sit. The possessive of 
the third person, su, sus, may mean "his," "her," its," 
"your," "their." It should be noted particularly that usted 
and ustedes, which take the verb in the third person, are 
used also with the possessive of the third person. Some- 
times, to avoid doubt as to the exact meaning of su, the 
following substitute possessive construction is used : 



la casa de el 
la casa de ella 
la casa de ellos 
la casa de ellas 
la casa de usted 
la casa de ustedes 



his house 
her house 

!■ their house 
[■ your house 



= su casa 



a. We also find the double possessive construction : 
de el, su casa de ellos, su casa de usted, etc. 



su casa 



51. Possessive Pronouns. 



SINGULAR 

el mio, la mia 
el tuyo la tuya 
el suyo, la suya 

el nuestro, la nuestra 

el vuestro, la vuestra 
el suyo, la suya 



PUJRAI, 

los mios, las mias 
los tuyos, las "tuyas 
los suyos, las suyas 
los nuestros, 

las nuestras 
los vuestros, 

las vuestras 
los suyos, las suyas 



ENGLISH 

mine 

yours 

his, hers, yours, its 

ours 



theirs, yours 



52. Use of the Possessive Pronouns. A possessive 
pronoun is used to take the place of a noun and a possessive 
adjective modifying it. There is a possessive pronoun to 
correspond to each possessive adjective. The possessive 
pronoun agrees in gender and number with the thing pos- 
sessed. 

Mi casa y la tuya, my house and yours. 

Yo ten go un libro y usted tiene dos libros. El mio es gvande, 
pero los suyos son pequenos. I have a book and you have two 
books. Mine is large, but yours are- small. 



LESSON VII 31 

a. When the possessive pronoun is used in the predicate, the 
article is omitted. 

El libro es mio. The book is mine. 

Los perros son de usted. The dogs are yours. 

53. The Possessive Pronoun el snyo. In the third 
person singular and plural of the possessive pronoun we 
find the same possibility of confusion as in the case of the 
third person of the possessive adjective. Possible ambi- 
guity is avoided by the use of the. following constructions. 

el de el, la de el, los de « . 

el, las de el . ms 

el de ella, etc. hers 

el de listed, etc. yours 

el de ellos, etc. \ • 

el de ellas, etc. tlieirS 

el de nstedes, etc. yours 



el suyo, la sitya, h\ 
suyos, las suvas 



54. Special Use of Noun and Pronoun. It is a pe- 
culiarity of Spanish that names of male beings, if used in 
the plural, may be understood to include the corresponding 
female being. This is also true of the plural personal pro- 
nouns. 

mis hermanos = mi hermano y mi hcrmana — my brother and 
sister. 

His tios = in tio y tu tia = your uncle and aunt. 

sits hijos = su hijo y su hija = his son and daughter. 

los esposos = el esposo y la esposa = the husband and wife 

los maestros = el maestro y la maestro = the schoolmaster and 
his wife. 

ellos z= el y ella = they (he and she). 

nuestros padres — mtestro padre y nuestra madre — our parents. 

VOCABULARY. 

dueho, master, owner. plumq, pen. 

Eduardo, Edward. por consigiiiente, conj., conse- 

esposo, -a, husband, w T ife. - queutly. 

Manuela, Emma. primo, -a, cousin. 

mismo, -a, -os, -as, (adjective or sobrino, -a, nephew, niece. 

pronoun), same. tio, -a, uncle, aunt. 
pariente, -ta, relative. 



32 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

EXERCISE VII. 

(a). Mi padre y yo. Tu y tu hi jo. El y su madre. Ella 
y su hermano. Usted y su tio. Nosotros y nuestros amigos. Vos- 
otros y vuestras tias. Ellos y sus libros. El libro y su dueno. 
Ellas y sus sombreros. Ustedes y sus maestros. 

(b). Ella y el y el amigo de ella. Usted y el y el maestro de el. 
Ellos y ellas y los tios de ellos. Ustedes y ellos y los padres de 
ustedes (or sus padres de ustedes). 

(c). Mi madre y tu madre. La mia y la tuya. Mi padre y 
el tuyo. Tu hi jo y el mio. Nuestro padre y el de ella. El amigo 
de ella y el de el. Nuestro libro y el de usted. Nuestros hijos y 
los de ustedes. Los maestros de usted y los nuestros. Las tias de 
ella y las vuestras. Tus primos y mis primos. Los tuyos y lo' 
mios. 

(d). Mi madre es la esposa de mi padre y mi padre es el 
esposo de mi madre. Tu tio es el hermano de tu padre 6 de tu 
madre. El esposo de tu tia es tambien tu tio. Luisa tiene un 
primo. Su primo es el hijo de' sus tios (i. e., de los tios de ella). 
El primo de Luisa tiene un tio. Su tio es el padre de Luisa. El 
libro tiene dos dnefios. Sus duefios son Luisa y su hermana.. Usted 
tiene tres tias : la hermana de su padre, la hermana de su madre, 
y la esposa de su tio de usted. Nuestras primas son las hermanas 
de nuestros primos y las hijas de nuestros tios. Vuestro hermano 
es el hijo de vuestro padre. Luis es el primo de Maria y Maria y 
Eduardo son hermanos. El primo de ella es tambien el primo de 
el. Usted es su hermano de ellos : por consiguiente su primo de 
ellos es tambien su primo de usted. Los hijos y las hijas de nues- 
tros tios son nuestros primos. Mis padres son mi padre y mi 
madre. Mis hermanos son mis hermanos y mis hermanas 6 mi 
hermano y mi hermana. -Usted y Luisa son primos porque el padre 
de ella y el padre de usted son hermanos. Ustedes y las hermanas de 
Luis estudian la misma leccion porque tienen el mismo maestro. 
Su maestro de ustedes y el maestro de ellos son el mismo. 

(*')■ dQuien es mi padre? 

,;Quien es la madre de Eduardo? 
^;Quienes son nuestros padres? 
,;Cuantos primos tenemos? 
;Quien es la tia de Manuela? 



LESSON VIII 

iQuienes son vuestros sobrinos? 

<;De quien es el libro que tengo? 

iDe quienes son los libros que ustedes tienen? 

«;De quien es el libro que Maria tiene? 

iEs mio 6 tuyo el libro que esta en la mesa? 

«;Ha hallado usted mi pluma 6 la tuya? 

;Es el sombrero de ella 6 de Maria? 



LESSON VIII. 



SYNOPSIS. 

ADJECTIVES — (a) descriptive (i) number (34) 

(2) gender (35) 

(3) agreement (33) 
•(4) position (36) _ 

(5) used substantively (37) 

(b) numeral, cardinal, 1-10 (39) 

(c) possessive, (48, 49, 50) 
NOUNS — special use of masculine plural (54) 
PRONOUNS — possessive, (51, 52, 53) 
VERBS — (a) regular (1) present participle (45) 

(2) past participle (42) 

(3) perfect indicative (44) 
(b) irregular (1) ser (38) 

(2) estar (46) 

" compared with ser (47) 

(3) haber (43) 
MISCELLANEOUS— word order (41) 

— idiomatic, age, (40) 

EXERCISE VIII. 

Remark. The "intimate" pronouns of the second person and 
their corresponding possessives are not to be used in this lesson. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. A good girl studies hard (i. e. s a great 
deal) because she wishes to learn. 2. A bad boy does not review 
his lessons. 3. Many lazy children have to learn rules. 4. The 
kitchen is a small room, but the library is large. 5. The teacher 
is very pretty and her cousin is handsome. 6. How many French 
girls are there in his class? 7. Spanish is quite easy, but the les- 
sons of your grammar are too long. 8. Is the grammar John's? 
Whose is it? 9. Louis and Emma are my brother and sister. 
10. Louise is ten years old and Edward is eight. 11. My nephews 
and nieces are my brothers' sons and daughters. 12. We are not 



34 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

at all well. We are very sick. 13. My uncle and aunt are in 
Paris but they have relatives in the city of Madrid. 14. Have 
you not eaten yet? We are already eating. 15. The water is 
cold and the chocolate is hot. 16. I am preparing the break- 
fast for my mother. 17. Being industrious, my cousin is prepar- 
ing the lesson for day after to-morrow. 18. Being sick, she does 
not wish to eat. 19. They have had to go up. They are upstairs 
now. 20. I am the teacher and you are the pupil. 21. You and 
I are American. 22. Did you buy the hat to-day? 23. Having 
no money, they are sad. 24. Have you not been in Paris ? 25. You 
are my sister, consequently my mother and your mother are the 
same. 26. Your (plu.) toast is on the table. Ours is in the kitchen. 
27. Her friend is in the library. 28. Who are your nephews? 
29. The house is mine, ours, yours, his. 30. Whose is the pen 
which I have? 31. We have learned a lesson of tour pages. How 
many are there in yours? 32. How are you (/>/«.)? 



LESSON IX. 

55. Noun of Material, etc. Material is expressed in 
Spanish by the preposition de followed by a noun of mater- 
ial, instead of by a noun used as an adjective of material, 
as in English. 

un sombrero de encaje, a lace hat. 
un traje de seda, a silk dress. 

a. In general, Spanish is opposed to the use of a noun to mod- 
ify another noun directly, like an adjective. The nouns are pre- 
ferably joined by a preposition. 

una tienda de zapatos, a shoe-store. 

un traje de verano, a summer dress. 

la mesa del despacho, the sitting-room table. 

la calle de Sevilla, Seville street. 

56. Noun as "Personal" Object. When a noun used 
as direct object of a verb denotes a person, a living higher 
animal, or a personification, the preposition a is used before 
it. This construction, which may be called the personal ob- 



M 



WESSON IX 



35 



jective or personal accusative, is not easy to remember, 
since we naturally associate a with the indirect object only.* 

El padre llama a su hijo. The father calls his son. 

He comprado al perro. I have bought the dog. 

iBusca usted a Maria? Are you looking for Mary? 

a. The a is omitted when the object is not a definite, determi- 
nate person or animal. 

He comprado un perro. I have bought a dog. 

b. For the sake of clearness, the a is generally omitted before 
the personal objective when there is also an indirect object. 

El nino lleva su hermano a la escuela. The boy takes his 
brother to school. 

c. The a is omitted before the personal object after the verb 
tener. 

Tengo dos hermanos. I have two brothers. 



57. A Possessive Construction. 

lish to say, "at Wanamaker's," etc. 
omitted in English must be supplied. 

d la tienda de Wanamaker. 

a casa de Eduardo. 



It is current in Eng- 
In Spanish the noun 



58. Agreement of Adjectives, a. An adjective that 
modifies two or more nouns of the same gender is put in 
the plural, and takes the gender of the nouns modified. 

un traje y un sombrero hermosos, a handsome suit and hat. 

Maria y Luisa son bonitas. Mary and Louise are pretty. 

b. An adjective that modifies two or more nouns of different 
genders is usually put in the masculine plural. 

mi padre y mi madre son buenos, my father and my mother 
are good. 

59. Demonstrative Adjectives. 



SINGULAR PLURAL 




MAS. 


FEM. 


MAS. 


FEM. 


ENGLISH 


este 

ese 

aquel 


esta 

esa 

aquella 


estos 

esos 

aquellos 


estas 

esas 

aquelias 


this, these 
that, those 
that yonder, those yonder 



*The use of the personal accusative is extended to nouns in the plural, 
but not to nouns preceded by a numeral. 

Busco a mis amigos. 
He comprado dos perros. 



36 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

a. A demonstrative adjective stands before the noun it modi- 
fies and agrees with it in number and gender. 

este libro, aquellos ninos, esa muchacha. 

b. These demonstratives correspond in use to the English de- 
monstrative adjectives, except that a sharp distinction is drawn 
between ese and aquel. Ese is used only to point out what is near 
to, or what has some relation to the person addressed. Aquel is 
used only to point out what is remote from both speaker and the 
person addressed. 

60. Demonstrative Pronouns. 

a. In form, the demonstrative pronouns are distinguished from 
the demonstrative adjectives only in that they bear the written ac- 
cent on the stressed syllable. 

este, estas, aquel, aquella, etc. 

b. The demonstrative pronouns correspond in meaning to the 
demonstrative adjectives, but they are used to take the place of 
a noun, with which they agree in number and gender. 

Yo tengo este libro y tu tienes ese. 
Ese libro es pequeno, aquel es grande. 

61. Prepositional Forms of the Personal Pronouns. 

The forms of the personal pronouns used as object of a 
preposition are the same as the subject forms (see 26), 
with the exception of the first and second persons singular, 
which have the special forms mi and ti, respectively. 

a mi, to me. 

de ti, from you. 

con el, con ella, w T ith him, with her. 

a nosotros, to us. 

de usted, de ustedes, from you. 

de vosotros, from you. 

para ellos, para ellas, for them 

a. "With me" and "with you" (intimate) are expressed by 
the special forms conmigo and coniigo. 

62. The Irregular Verb, ir, "to go." Infinitive ir, 
Present Part., yendo, Past Part., ido. 



ussson ix 37 







PRESENT INDICATIVE. 






SINGULAR 


PEURAI, 




I. 

2. 

3- 


voy, I go, 
vas 

va 


etc. i. vamos, we go, 

2. vais 

3. van 


etc. 



Remark. Note that in this tense the stem is v-. 

a. Ir followed by a with an infinitive means "to be about to," 
"to be going to." This construction also expresses purpose. 

Voy a comprar un sombrero. I am going to buy a hat. 

Deseo ir a comprar un sombrero. I want to go and (to) buy 
a hat. 

63. Spanish use of names of places after a and en does 
not always correspond to the English idiom. Note the fol- 
lowing : 

al despacho, to the office (like English idiom). 
a la escuela, to school. 
en la escuela, at school, in school. 
. en casa, at home, home (place). 
a casa, home (direction). 
a casa de Juan, to John's. 

VOCABULARY. 

alia, adv., there (direction). noche, f., night, evening. 

barato, cheap. par, m., pair. 

buscar, to look for. pasar, to pass, spend. 

calle, f., street. qiicdar, to remain, stay. 

Carmen, Carmen. rato, time (short period of), 

casa, house, home. spell, while. 

cerca, adv., near by. responder, to answer. 

cosa, thing. Rico, a family name. 

dcjar, to leave. seda, silk. 

encaje, m., lace. Seville, Seville. 

escuela, school. si, conj., if. 

esta noche, adv., to-night. simpdtico, likeable, "nice" (used 

guante, m., glove. of persons). 

juntos, -as, together. sin, prep., without. 

lectura, reading. solo, adj., alone. 

lejos, adv., far, a long way off. tarde, f., afternoon. 

Lopez, a family name. traje, m., suit, dress. 

manana, morning. verano, summer. 

mejor, adj., best. zapato, shoe. 

necesitar, to need. 



38 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

EXERCISE IX. 

(a). iDe quien es esta pluma? Esa pluma es mia. <;De quien 
es ese libro de lectura? Este libro de lectura es de usted. ,iDe 
quienes son aquellos sombreros? Aquellos sombreros son de Juan 
y Luis. iEs esta su pluma (la pluma de usted)? Esa no es mia. 
He dejado la mia en casa. iSon estos mis libros? Esos no son 
suyos (de usted). Aquellos son de usted (suyos). 

(b). La escuela de Luisa* no esta cerca. Esta lejos, Esta 
mafiana Luisa no va a quedar en casa. Va a la escuela. Su hermano 
Juan va con ella. Van juntos. Ahora Juan no esta aqui. No 
esta listo todavia. Maria llama a Juan. Juan no responde a 
su hermana. Maria busca a su hermano. Busca tambien sus 
libros. Si Juan no esta listo, Maria tiene que ir sin el. Tiene que 
ir sola. 

(c). iEsta lejos la escuela de Luisa? 

«;D6nde va ella esta mafiana? 

I Por que no va a casa de su amiga ? 

I Quien va con ella a la escuela? 

I A quien llama Maria? 

iPor que no responde el? 

<jD6nde busca Maria a su hermano? 

<;A quien halla ella? 

iDonde ha dejado sus libros? 

I Tiene ella que ir sin su hermano? 
(d). Esta tarde voy a la ciudad a comprar unas cosas que 
necesito mucho. Necesito un sombrero de encaje, un par de guantes 
de seda, zapatos, y seda para un traje de verano. En la tienda de 
Rico hay sedas y encajes hermosos y muy baratos. Mi amiga Car- 
men Lopez va conmigo. Ella es mi mejor amiga. Es una mu- 
chacha muy simpatica. Su padre y su madre son tambien muy sim- 
paticos. Mis padres y yo vamos muchas noches a pasar un rato 
con ellos. Esta noche vamos alia. 

(e). iDonde ha comprado usted estos guantes? 

iQue necesita usted comprar ahora? 

I Quien va con usted? 

I Quien es Carmen Lopez? 

<;En que calle vive Carmen? 

iSon simpaticos sus padres? 

iPasa usted las noches en casa? 

iVa usted a casa ahora? 



LESSON X 



39 



LESSON X. 

64. Object forms of the Personal Pronouns. The 

following scheme gives the object pronouns in such a way 
as to show their relation to the subject and prepositional 
forms. 



Subject Prepositional Direct Object 



Indirect Object 



3- 



yo 

tu 

fel 
j ella 



I 



usted 



3--I 

I 



nosotros 
vosotros 

f ellos 

J ellas 

ustedes 



de mi 
conmigo 
de ti 
contigo 
deel 
de ella 

de usted 

de nosotros 
de vosotros 
de ellos 
de ellas 

de ustedes 



me, me, to me, for me 
te, you, to you, for you 



le, lo, him, it 
la, her it 



le, w,, } 

la, /., f 



le, to him, to it, etc. 
le (la), to her, etc. 

le, m. and/., to you, etc. 



you 

nos, us, to us, etc. 
os, you, to you, etc. 



les, los, them 
las, them 



les, m., I 
las, /., j" 



you 



les, to them, etc. 
les (las), to them, etc. 

les, m. and f. , to you, etc. 



Note. (i). In the first person, and in the second person inti- 
mate, the direct and indirect object forms are the same. (2) In 
the third person singular and plural, masculine, we have the choice 
of two forms for direct object (Sing, le, lo; Plural les, los). Either 
may be used to refer to persons, but le and les are not correctly 
used to refer to things. (3) Usted requires the object pronouns 
of the third person, just as it requires a verb in the third person 
(see 27b), and a possessive of the third person (see 50). (4) In 
the third person feminine, the indirect object forms in parentheses 
(la, las) are rare, being used only to avoid ambiguity. 



65. Position of the Pronoun Object. The pronoun 
used as object precedes the verb of which it is the object, 
unless the verb be a present participle or an infinitive. 

Me llama. He calls me. 

Nos ha hablado. He has spoken to us. 

a. When the pronoun is the object of a present participle or 
an infinitive, it is attached to the verb-form as a suffix.* Since the 



* Positive imperatives also take the pronoun object as a suffix. This point 
will be discussed later in its proper place. 



40 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

verb-form continues to have the stress on the original syllable, a 
written accent is now required on present participles. 

Deseo hablarte. I wish to speak to you. 

llamdndolas, calling them. 

b. In the case of an infinitive or a present participle depend- 
ing upon an auxiliary (desear, tener que, deber, estar, querer, ir a), 
the object pronoun may precede the auxiliary, or be attached to 
the infinitive. 

Le deseo hablar \ T . , 

Desco hablarle \ l wish t0 s P eak to hlm - 

Le estoy hablando \ T , . . . 

~ _ 77,.,, r I am speaking to him. 
Estoy hablando le ) 

66. Double Pronoun Object Construction. It will 
be noted that there is a chance for confusion in the use of 
the object pronouns of the third person. Le hablo might 
mean "I speak to him," "to her," or "to you," according 
to the context. For clearness it is customary to add, after 
the verb, the corresponding prepositional form of the pro- 
noun, depending upon the preposition a. 

Le hablo a listed. I speak to you. 
Lcs hablo a ellas. I speak to them. 
La busco a ella. I am looking for her. 

a. A similar construction is employed in any person, where 
emphasis or contrast is desired. The object pronouns are unable, 
of themselves, to express emphasis. 

Me habla a mi, pero no le habla a usted. He speaks to me, but 
he does not speak to you. 

Nos buscan a nosotros, pero no les buscan a ustedes. They are 
looking for us, but they are not looking for you. 

b. The prepositional form of the pronoun may be placed, for 
greater emphasis, before the regular object form. 

A ti te digo. I tell you. 

c. The double construction le . . . a usted, is considered more 
polite than le alone. It is constantly used when not needed for 
clearness or emphasis. 

Note. The use of a in these constructions with direct object, 
is parallel to the use of d with the personal object. (See 56.) 

67. Some Irregular Verbs. Note that many of the 
forms of these irregular verbs are regular, and that nearly 
all of the endings are so. 



WESSON X 41 

a. poder, "to be able," "can," "may." Pres. Part., 
pudiendo, Past Part., podido. 

PRESENT INDICATIVE 

puedo, I can, etc. podemos, we can, etc. 

puedes podcis 

puede pueden 

b. querer, "to wish," "be willing," "want," "love." 
Pres. Part., queriendo. Past Part., querido. 

PRESENT INDICATIVE 

quiero, I want, etc. queremos, we want, etc. 

quieres, quereis 

quiere quiere p, 

Note 1. Querer expresses the English "will" in the sense of 
willingness, but not in the sense of futurity. 

i Quiere listed ir conmigof Will you go with me? 

Note 2. Querer followed by the personal objective or by -a 
direct object form of the personal pronoun, may mean "to love." 
Yo quiero a la niha. I love the girl. 
La quiero. I love her. 

c. decir, "to tell," "to say." Pres. Part., dieiendo. 
Past Part., dicho. 

PRESENT INDICATIVE 

digo, I say, etc. dccimos, we say, etc. 

dices decis 

dice, dicen 

d. hacer, "to do," "make." Pres. Part., haciendo. 
Past Part., hecho. 

PRESENT INDICATIVE 

• hago, I do, etc. hacemos, we do, etc. 

haces haceis 

hace haceii 

68. Idiomatic. English "to like." To express the 
English "like," used with an object, we must use the Span- 
ish regular verb gustar, "to please," with the indirect ob- 
ject pronoun. The object of the English verb becomes the 
subject of the Spanish sentence. 

Este libro me gusta. I like this bock. (This book pleases me.) 



42 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

No me gustan aquellos sombreros. I don't like those hats. 
(Those hats don't please me.) 

i~Le gusta Maria? Do you like Mary? 

VOCABULARY. 

algunos, -as, some, a few (adj. magnifico, splendid, "fine." 

or pron.). mas, adv., more, most. 

amable, kind, agreeable. modelo, pattern, design, style. 

Barcelona, Barcelona. pan, m., bread. 

castigar, to punish. Pedro, Peter. 

color, m., color. pluma, feather. 

completo, -a, complete. primero, adv., first. 

compra, purchase. que, conj., that. 

cortesmente, politely. que, who (relative). 

dependiente, clerk, employee. que! what! how! (excl.) 

donde, where (relative). recomendar, to recommend. 

ensenar, to show. Sanchez, a family name. 

esperar, to expect, wait for. saludar,* to greet. 

favor, m., favor. surtido, stock, assortment. 

gusto, pleasure. visitar, to visit. 
liabilidad, f., ability, skill. 

j Me hace usted el favor de . . .? Will you please . . . ? 
Es favor que usted me hace. You are very kind to say so. 

EXERCISE X. 

(a). Mi madre me llama. Me ha comprado un sombrero. 
Tu padre te busca. Te habla. Nuestra amiga nos visita. Nos 
escribe una carta. Vuestro maestro os ensena. Os ensefia un libro. 
La madre de Luis le (lo) quiere mucho. Le ha hecho un traje. 
El padre de Luisa le dice que la quiere. Maria va a aprender la 
leccion. Ha quedado en casa para aprenderla. Ahora la esta es- 
tudiando (esta estudiandola). El pan es bueno. Juan desea 
(quiere) comerlo. Lo come. Ninos, su madre (de ustedes) les 
(los) quiere. Les ha comprado muchas cosas. Las ha comprado 
para ustedes. El padre dice a las ninas que las quiere mucho. 
Ninas, el maestro dice que las va a castigar (a ustedes). La madre 
de los nifios los ha dejado en casa del maestro. El padre busca a 
sus hijos, pero no puede hallarlos. 

(b). iHa llamado usted a Juan? 

Le he llamado, pero dice que no puede ir con nosotras. Espera a 
Pedro Sanchez que va a visitarle. Pedro es su mejor amigo, $ 
Juan le quiere mucho. Tambien Pedro le quiere mucho a el. 

I Donde vamos primero esta tarde? 



LESSON x 43 

Quiero hacer algunas compras. iQue tienda me puede usted 
recomendar (puede usted recomendarme) ? 

iQue clase de compras quiere usted hacer? 

I Quiero comprar un sombrero. 

A mi me gusta mucho la tienda de Rico. Los dependientes 
son muy amables, y la casa tiene un surtido muy completo. 

(c). Cuando una sefiora entra en una tienda, el dependiente 
la saluda cortesmente, y le dice: Sefiora, ique desea usted? La 
sefiora le responde : i Me hace usted el favor de ensefiarme algunos 
sombreros ? 

Con mucho gusto. <jNo le gusta a usted este? 

Me gusta mas aquel. Esta pluma es demasiado grande. 

(d). iQue hace usted, Maria? 

Estoy haciendo un traje de verano. 

i Que bonito es ! Y j que habilidad tiene usted para estas cosas ' 

Es favor que usted me hace. (Es usted muy amable.) 

Esta seda es magnifica. <;D6nde la ha comprado usted? 

La he comprado en Barcelona. 

El modelo me gusta mucho, tambien el color. 

(e). iQue quiere Juan? 

iQuien quiere a Juan 

I A quien quiere Juan? 

I A quien llama la sefiora? 
• iQue le dice Juan? 

iQue tienda le gusta mas a usted? 

iQue clase de dependientes tiene esta tienda? 

I Quiere usted hacerme un favor? 

I Quiere usted decirme donde ha comprado esa seda? 

iQue ensefia el dependiente a la sefiora? 

iQue le dice ella? 

<:No puede usted 6 no quiere usted hacer mi traje? 

iComo decimos en espafiol, "you are very kind" 

I Como decimos en espafiol, "will you please show me that book" ? 



44 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



LESSON XL 

69. Indicative Imperfect and Past Definite. There 
are two simple tenses of the indicative that express action 
in past time. These are called the Imperfect and the Past 
Definite (Preterite). Each of these tenses has two sets of 
endings: one for verbs of the first Conjugation (-ar verbs), 
and one for verbs of the second and third conjugations 
-er and -ir verbs). These endings are, in regular verbs, 
added to the stem of the infinitive (19). 



I M PERFECT 




FIRST CONJ. 2D AND 3D CONJ. 


SINGULAR 




i. -aba 


-ia 


2. -abas 


-ias 


3. -aba 


-ia 


PLURAI, 




i. -abamos 


-iamos 


2. -abais 


-iais 


3. -aban 


-ian 


Applying these en 


dings to tl 


IMPERFECT 




haJJaba 


vivia 


hall abas 


vivias 


hallaba 


vivia 


halldbamos 


vivia m os 


hall abais 


viviais 


hallaban 


vivia n 



ENDINGS. 

PAST DEFINITE 
FIRST CONJ. 2D AND 3D CONJ. 

SINGULAR 



-e 


-i 


-aste 


-iste 


-6 


-io 


PLURAL 




-amos 


-imos 


-asteis 


-isteis 


-aron 


-ieron 



PAST DEFINITE 

ensene respondi 

ensefiastc rcspondistc 

enseno respondio 

ensenamos respondimos 

evsenasteis respond isteis 

ensenaron respond eron 



Note a. In the present tense it was found that the stress falls on 
the stem of the verb in four forms only (sing., 1, 2, 3, and plu. 3.). 
In the imperfect and past definite the stress falls in all forms on 
the first syllable of the ending. 

b. Notice that the imperfect 1st and 3d sing, are alike, and 
that in the first and third conjugations the past def. first person 
plu. is like the present indie, first person plu. 



LESSON XI 



45 



70. Use of Imperfect and Past Definite. 

a. The past definite expresses a definite act occurring and 
completed at some point of past time ; an act in past time not con- 
tinuous. It expresses what "took place" at some particular past 
time. 

Juan me hablo ayer. John spoke to me yesterday. 
No cantaron. They did not sing. 

b. The imperfect commonly represents an act as continuing in 
past time, or as habitual in the past. It must sometimes be trans- 
lated by "was" ("were") with the present participle, or by "used to." 

Hscribia una carta. I was writing a letter. 

En Madrid estudidbamos mucho. In Madrid we used to study 
hard. 

c. When two actions occur simultaneously, one interrupting 
the other, the interrupted act is expressed by the imperfect, and 
the interrupting act by the past definite. 

Comia cuando mi padre me llamo. I was eating when my 
father called me. 

d. In descriptive narrative the imperfect is used to describe 
the scenic background and the qualities and conditions of persons 
and things. The past definite tells what occurred. 



Cuando los dos mozos llega- 
ron, encontraron a Rita y Elvira 
en la puerta. Sus mantillas cu- 
brian la parte baja de la car a. 
de manera que no dejaban fuera 
mas que la frente y los ojos. 



When the two young fellows 
arrived, they found Rita and El- 
vira in the doorway. Their 
mantillas covered the lower part 
of their faces so completely that 
their eyes and foreheads alone 
were visible. 



71. Irregular Imperfects. Only three Spanish verbs, 
ser, ir and ver, "to see/' are irregular in the imperfect in- 
dicative, All other imperfects are formed regularly by add- 
ing endings to the stem of the infinitive. The Imperfects 
of ser and ir are given below. 



SINGULAR 


PLURAL 




era, I was, etc. 

eras 

era 


eramos, we were, etc. 

erais 

eran 




SINGULAR 

iba, I w r as going, etc. 
ibas 

iba 


PLURAL 

ibamos, we were going, 

ibais 

iban 


etc. 



46 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

72. Past Progressive Conjugation with estar. Pro- 
gressive action in past time may be expressed not only by 
the simple imperfect (see yob), but also by the imperfect 
of estar used with the present participle. (Compare 47 
A, c.) 

Bstaba trabajando. I was working. 

Estdbamos comiendo. We were eating. 

a. Past customary or habitual action may be expressed by the 
imperfect of the verb acosiaimbrarse a, "to be used/' with an infin- 
itive. 

Acostumbrdbamos d trabajar mucho. We used to work hard. 

73. Orthographically Irregular Verbs. Many Span- 
ish verbs which are conjugated regularly undergo certain 
changes of spelling in order to preserve throughout the con- 
jugation the sound which the final consonant of the stem 
has in the infinitive. Verbs whose infinitive ends in -car 
or -gar, change c and g of the stem to qu and gu respec- 
tively when the ending begins with e. Of the forms already 
learned, only the Past Definite, 1st person sing., is affected 
by this rule. 

(buscar) busquc, I sought; (castigar) castigue, I punished. 

74. The Pluperfect Indicative. This compound tense 

is formed by the imperfect of haber, and the past participle 

of the verb to be conjugated. Its use is similar to that of 

the English pluperfect. 

Habia comido. I had eaten. 

Habiamos estudiado la leccion. We had studied the lesson. 

VOCABULARY. 

acomfianar, to be with, accom- de, prep., about (with hablar, 

pany. etc.) 

agradable, agreea^e. dclante de, prep., in front of, 

algo, pron., sometning. before. 

asiento, seat. encontrar, to meet, come upon. 

cafe, m., coffee, cafe. cntonccs, adv., then. 

cerca de, prep., near. helado, ice, ice-cream. 

cudndof when? inz'icrno, winter. 

cuando, conj., when. it a fiasco, to go to walk. 



LESSON xi 47 

mientras que, conj., while. Puerto, del Sol, a Square in Ma- 

mirar, to look, look at. drid. 

mozo, waiter. sentado, seated. 

no,. . . .nada, not, .... anything. siempre, adv., always. 

ocurrir, to occur, happen. Suarez, a family name. 

para que? why? (for what pur- todas las noches, every night, 

pose?) every evening. 

persona, person. todas las tardes, adv., everv af- 

por, prep., through. ternoon. 

presentar, to introduce. varios, -as, various. 

ventana, window. 

EXERCISE XL 
Give reason for each imperfect and past definite in a and c. 

(a). Cuando (yo) vivia en Madrid, mi amigo Pedro Suarez 
y yo ibamos (acostumbrabamos a ir) todas las tardes a paseo. Des- 
pues entrabamos en uno de los cafes de la Puerta del Sol, donde 
tomabamos algo. En el invierno tomabamos cafe y en el verano 
un helado. Siempre encontrabamos en el cafe a varios amigos, 
sentados a una mesa cerca de una ventana. Bebiamos y hablabamos 
de las cosas que nos habian ocurrido. Alii pasabamos muchos ratos 
agradables. 

(b). Cuando usted vivia. en Espafia, <;que acostumbraba usted 
a hacer todas las tardes? 

iCon quien iba usted a paseo? 

I Donde entraban ustedes despues? 

I Donde tomaban ustedes asientos? 

iQue hacian ustedes en el cafe? 

iQue bebian ustedes en el verano? <;en el invierno? 

iDe que hablaban ustedes? 

I Donde va V. todas las noches? 

(c). Esta mafiana pasaba por la Calle de Sevilla cuando en- 
contre a mi amigo Pedro Suarez. Su hi jo Luis le acompanaba. 
Pedro me saludo y me presento a su hijo. Estabamos cerca del 
Cafe Ingles y entramos juntos. Tomamos asientos cerca de la 
ventana y Suarez llamo un mozo. Yo tome un helado, Suarez tomo 
cafe, y su hijo no deseo tomar nada. Mientras que comiamos y 
bebiamos (estabamos comiendo y bebiendo), hablamos de muchas 
cosas, y miramos por las ventanas a las personas que pasaban de- 
lante del cafe. Saludamos a varios amigos y uno de ellos hablo 
un rato con nosotros. 

\ 



-4-8 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

(d). iCuando paso usted por la Calle de Sevilla? 
I A quien encontro usted cerca del Cafe Ingles? 
^Donde le encontro usted? 
I Quien le acompafiaba? 
iCuando les encontro usted? 
iLe presento Pedro a su hijo? 
iDonde entraron ustedes entonces? 
I Para que entraron ustedes en el cafe? 
^Donde tomaron ustedes asientos? 
I A quien llamo Suarez? 
iTomo usted algo? 
<;No tomo nada el hijo de Suarez? 
I Quien entro mientras que ustedes hablaban? 
Cuando le encontre a usted esta manana <;iba usted a paseo, 
6 iba usted a la escuela? 

I Quien era el hombre con quien usted entro en el cafe? 
I A quien busco usted alii? 



LESSON XII. 

SYNOPSIS. 

ADJECTIVES— (a) descriptive, agreement (58) 

(b) demonstrative (59) 
NOUN— (a) of material (55) 

(b) as personal object (56) 

(c) possessive construction (57) 
PRONOUN — (a) personal (1) prepositional forms (61) 

(2) object forms (64) 

" " position (65) 

" " double construction (66) 

(b) demonstrative (60) 
VERB — (a) regular (1) indicative, imperfect and past definite, forms (69) 

use (70) 

(2) past progressive construction (72) 

(3) indicative pluperfect (74) 
(b) irregular (1) orthographical changes (73) 

(2) irregular imperfects (71) 

(3) ir, piesent indicative, etc. (62) 

(4) poder, auerer, decir, hacer, pres. indicative, etc. (67) 
MISCELLANEOUS— idiomatic, "to like" (68) 

EXERCISE XII. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. I punished my son this afternoon be- 
cause he was bad. 2. She is tired every evening. 3. Carmen's 
husband and father were with her. 4. We stayed in Wanamaker's, 
where we bought two pairs of silk gloves and a lace dress. 5. While 



M 



licsson xiii 49 

we were waiting for our friends, we looked out of the window at 
the people w r ho were passing in front of the cafe. 6. He greeted 
me politely. 7. I was going through Seville St. when I met her. 
8. I am going to tell you (intimate sing.) something. 9. He 
says that he is going to visit you (intimate plu.) to-morrow. 10. It 
is my mother's voice. She is calling me. 11. I can recommend 
you (ordinary sing.) a store where they have very kind clerks and 
a very complete stock. 12. Did they treat you (ordinary plu. fern.) 
well? 13. Why do you go there first? May we not go together 
afterwards? 14. She always wants to talk about the things that 
have happened to her. 15. The girls say that they wish to go to- 
night and that Peter may go with them. 16. These shoes are 
very cheap, and I like them better than those yonder. 17. Do 
you not wish to make a few purchases ? 18. Whom did your uncle 
meet this morning near the Cafe Ingles? 19. Why did you not 
take anything? 20. Did they spend a pleasant evening at Louisa's? 
21. What were they doing at school this morning when the teacher 
came in? 22. When will you go to walk with me? 23. Can you 
not answer him in Spanish? 24. I do not need my reading book; 
consequently I am going to leave it at home. 25. She is a very 
nice girl and ought not to go alone. 26. Will you please show 
me another pattern and another color? 27. What were you saying? 
28. Are you buying them for him or for her? 29. I was looking 
for you (ordinary) and not for him. 30. Had he introduced his 
sister to the president? 31. I love him and he loves me. I love 
you (ordinary fern.). I love you (ordinary fern.). He loves the 
girl. 



LESSON XIII. 

75. Reflexive Verbs. A reflexive verb is one whose 
action is directed back upon the subject of the verb. Any 
transitive verb whose meaning will permit, may be used in 
this way. The object of a reflexive verb may be direct or 
indirect, according to the nature of the verb. This object 
is expressed by a reflexive pronoun of the same number 
and person as the subject. 

I strike myself. 

The boy sees himself in the glass. 

We buy ourselves hats. 



50 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

76. Reflexive Pronouns. In English we have a re- 
flexive pronoun for each person and number (myself, your- 
self, etc.). In Spanish there is but one reflexive, se, which 
serves for third person singular and plural, masculine and 
feminine, direct or indirect object. For the other persons, 
the regular personal object pronouns are used. 

i. me, myself, to myself i. nos, ourselves, to ourselves 

2. te, yourself, to yourself (int.) 2. os, yourselves, to yourselves, 

{int.) 

3. se, himself, herself, itself, 3. se, themselves, yourselves, 

yourself, to yourself, etc. to themselves, to yourselves 

a. When the reflexive pronoun is used as object of a prepo- 
sition, the prepositional form si is used for the third person (sing. 
or phi., m. or f.), excepting after the preposition con, when the 
form consigo is used (parallel to conmigo, contigo). In the first 
and second persons, the regular prepositional forms of the personal 
pronouns are used. (See 61.) 

Compro el sombrero para mi. I buy the hat for myself. 

77. Position of Reflexive Pronoun Object. The po- 
sition of a reflexive pronoun is before or after the verb in 
accordance with the rule stated for object pronouns in 65. 

El muchacho se ensena. The boy teaches himself. 

Me he 'comprado un sombrero. I have bought myself a hat. 

Hacerse un traje. To make oneself a dress. 

Tratdndose bien. Treating himself well. 

78. Kinds of Reflexive Verbs. A reflexive verb may 
be: 

a. A simple transitive verb used reflexively without change of 
meaning. Such are the examples given above in jj. 

b. A transitive or intransitive verb used reflexively with 
change of meaning. 

mar char, to march; marcharse, to go away. 

llamar, to call; llamarse, to be called, be named. 

hallar, to And ; hallarse, to find oneself, to happen to be, to be. 

c. Verbs intrinsically reflexive, i. e., always used reflexively. 
These are rare, and are generally not translated reflexively into 
English. 

atrcverse, to dare; constiparse, to catch cold. 



LESSON XIII 51 

DRILL. 

Conjugate atreverse in the pres. indie., constiparse in the past 
definite, and hallarse in the imperfect indicative. 

79. Reflexives used with Impersonal or Passive 
Force. A very common Spanish construction is the use of 
se with the third person singular or plural of a verb, with 
impersonal force, or as a passive. 

a. If no subject is expressed, the verb is in the third person 
singular. 

Se dice que Juan estd enfermo. They say (it is said) that 
John, etc. 

No se bebe mucho en Espana. They don't drink much in Spain. 

b. If there is an expressed subject, the verb is singular or 
plural according to the number of the subject. 

Muchas lengnas se hablan en Europa. Many languages are 
spoken in Europe. 

El espanol se habla en Espana. Spanish is spoken in Spain. 

80. Interrogatives que and cudl. Que, "what," is a 
sort of general utility interrogative. It is uninfected, and 
may be used as subject or as object, as adjective or pro- 
noun. (See sentences in past lessons.) 

a. Cudl, plu. cudles, is generally used as a pronoun with the 
preposition de, to mean "which." It also expresses "which" or 
"what" before any form of the verb ser. 

4 Cudl de estos hombres es su amigof Which of these men 
is his friend? 

j Cudl es la lengua de los Estados Unidosf What is the lan- 
guage of the United States ? . 

Exception. When a definition is asked for, "what" before ser is ex- 
pressed by que. 

cQue es gramatica? What is grammar? 

81. Impersonal Construction. The third person plu- 
ral of the verb is sometimes used impersonally, as in Eng- 
lish. 

j En Espana hablan espanol ? Do they speak Spanish in Spain? 

" 82. Definite Article with Names of Countries. With 
names of countries the definite article may, or may not be 



52 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

used. Usage varies, but the article is generally omitted if 
the noun is governed by a preposition. 

Espana : la Espana America : la America 

Vivo en Espana. He vlajado por America. 

a. Some geographical names are always accompanied by the 
article, even when governed by a preposition. Among these are : 
El Brasil, el Canada, los Estados Unidos. 

83. The Irregular Verb ver, "to see." Infinitive ver, 
Present Part., viendo, Past Part., visto. 

PRESENT INDICATIVE 

veo, I see, etc. vemos, we see, etc. 

ves veis 

ve ven 

IMPERFECT INDICATIVE 

veiaj I saw, etc. veiamos, we saw, etc. 

veias veiais 

veia veian 

Note. On this imperfect see 71. The past definite is regular, 
built on the stem of the infinitive, v-. 

83 A. Superfluous Pronoun Object. An extension of 
the double pronoun object construction explained in 66 is 
the use of a superfluous pronoun object of the same num- 
ber and gender as an expressed noun object. This is com- 
monly used when a personal object stands first in a sen- 
tence or clause. 

A mi hermana la quiere todo el mundo. Everybody loves my 
sister. 

No me gnsta a mi, pero le gusta a mi padre. I don't like it, 
but my father does like it. 

VOCABULARY. 

alcgrarse, to be glad. causa, cause, reason. 

asi, adv., thus, so, in this way. a causa de, prep., because of. 

bastante, adv., quite, consider- colegio, school, college. 

ably. Chile, Chile. 

el Brasil, Brazil. comof what? 

el Canada, Canada. cudnto ticmpof how long? 

capital, f., capital (city). Cuba, Cuba. 



LESSON XIII 



53 



los (las) demds, the rest, the 

others. 
los Estados Unidos, the United 

States. 
Buropa, Europe. 
llamarse, to be c ailed, to be 

named. 
marcharse, to go away. 
Mejico, Mexico. 
mes, m., month. 
muchisimo , adv., very much. 
mucho tiempo, adv., a long time, 

long. 
mundo, world. 

Norte-America, North America. 
pais, m., country. 
patria, native land. 



perfectamente, adv., perfectly. 

por supuesto, adv., of course. 

portugues, -a, Portuguese. 

principal, adj., principal. 

que, than. 

re public a, republic. 

salud, f., health. 

Santiago, Santiago. 

so lament e, adv., only. 

Sud- America, South America. 

tiempo, time. 

todo, -a, -os, -as, all, whole (adj. 

and pron.) 
todo el mundo, the whole world, 

everybody. 
viajar, to travel. 



EXERCISE XIII. 

(a). Se dice que usted ha viajado mucho. 

He viajado bastante. Por los principales paises de Europa y 
tambien en Sud-America. 

iCual de los paises que ha visto le gusta mas? 

Me gusta mas mi pais (mi patria). A todo el mundo le gusta 
mas su patria. Pero todos debemos viajar si podemos. Asi se 
aprende mucho. 

Por supuesto habla usted varias lenguas. 

Hablo bastante bien el ingles, el espafiol y el frances. No se 
necesita mas lenguas que estas tres para viajar por todo el mundo. 

iQue lenguas se hablan en Sud-America? 

En el Brasil se habla portugues. En los demas paises de Sud- 
America hablan espafiol. 

iSe ensefia ingles en las escuelas de Sud-America? 

En algunas (varias) ciudades hay colegios ingleses. 

iComo se llama la capital de la republica de Chile? 

La capital de Chile se llama Santiago de Chile. Se llama asi 
porque hay otro Santiago en Espana y otro en Cuba. 

I Paso usted mucho tiempo en Santiago ? 

Algunos meses solamente. Me marche a causa de la mala 
salud de mi esposa. 

iEsta buena ahora? 

Perfectamente. 

Me alegro mucho. 



54 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

(b)\ iC6mo.se llama este serior? 

I Por cuales de los paises de Norte-America ha viajado? 

I Se dice que este seiior habla varias lenguas ? 

I Cuales son las principales lenguas de Europa? 

iQue lenguas se necesita para viajar en Sud- America? 

I Para que debemos todos viajar? 

iQue lenguas se hablan en Norte-America? 

iEn cual de los paises de Sud-America se habla portugues? 

«jHay colegios ingleses en Sud-America? <;en el Canada? 

iDonde se ensefia nuestra lengua? 

iCuanto tiempo paso usted en el Brasil? 

iPor que se marcho usted? 

I Como se llama la capital de nuestro pais ? 

iComo se llama usted? 

iComo se halla su esposa? 



LESSON XIV. 

84. Irregular Past Definites. Learn the irregular 
past definites of haber, ser, estar, tener, poder, querer, 

decir, hacer, and ir. (See 531-535, 537, 539, 54^, 543-)* 
The past definites of ser and. ir are alike. The other past 
definites in this group have certain points in common, a. The 
stem of the past definite is in all cases distinct from that of the 
infinitive, b. The stress in the first and third persons singular, is on 
the stem instead of on the ending. 

85. Infinitives with a Preposition. The infinitive 
used after a preposition, may have in Spanish the force of 
the English present participle. 

despues de comer, after eating. 
sin estudiar, without studying. 
antes de levantarse, before getting up. 

a. The infinitive after al, is translated by on with a present 
participle. 

al verla, on seeing her. 

*The student is reminded that the imperfects of these verbs, with the 
exception of ser and ir, are regular. (See 71.) 



LESSON XIV 



55 



b. Either of the above constructions may be. followed by a 
subject, in which case they may be translated by a temporal clause. 
al levantarme yo, when I got up. 
despues de entrar Juan, after John came in. 

86. Idiomatic Use of tener. In English, to express 
physical or mental condition, we use "to be" with an .adjec- 
tive phrase. Condition is often expressed in Spanish by 
tener with a noun. 

Tengo sueno. I am sleepy. (Literally, I have sleep.) 
Tenemos prisa. We are in a hurry. (Literally, We have haste.) 
El nino tierie hambre. The child is hungry. - (Literally, The 
child has hunger.) 

Note. The adverb in the English "I am very sleepy" must be 
expressed in Spanish by an adjective. 

Tengo mucho sueno. (Literally, I have much sleep.) 



87. Cardinal Numerals 1 1 to 39. 



ii. 

12. 
13- 
14. 
15. 
16. 

17. 
18. 
IQ. 
20. 
21. 



once 

doce 

trece 

catorce 

quince 

diez y seis 

diez y siete 

diez y ocho 

diez y nueve 

veinte 

veinte y uno 



22. veinte y dos 

23. veinte y tres 

24. veinte y cuatro 

25. veinte y cinco 

26. veinte y seis 

27. veinte y siete 

28. veinte y ocho 

29. veinte y nueve 

30. treinta ,* 

31. treinta y uno, 

32. treinta y dos, etc. 



a. The numerals from 16 to 19 are also * written dieciseis, 
diecisiete, etc. Those from 21 to 29 are written veintiuno, etc. 
Those from 30 to 39 are written treintaiuno, etc. 



88. Time of Day. 

j Que hora esf What time is it? 

j Que hora era? What time was it? 

iQue hora tiene ustedf What time have you? 

Es la una. Son las tres. It is one o'clock. It is three o'clock. 

Son las cuatro y media. It is half past four. 

Eran las cinco y cuarto or un cuarto. It was quarter past five. 

Son las siete y veinte minutos. It is twenty minutes past seven. 

A las ocho menos diez. At ten minutes to eight. 



50 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Las dies de la manana, de la noche. Ten o'clock in the morn- 
ing (A. M.), in the' evening, at night (P. M.). 

Las cuatro de la tarde. Four o'clock in the afternoon. 

Note the use of the plural verb and article with all hours 
except the first, and use of feminine article to agree with hora 
omitted. Y expresses minutes after the hour and before the half, 
menos expresses minutes after the half and before the next hour. 
Minutos may be expressed or omitted. 

89. Use of Definite Article. In Spanish the definite 
article is used instead of a possessive adjective before names 
of parts of the body or articles of clothing, provided its use 
leaves no doubt as to the possessor. 

El mitchacho abrio los ojos. The boy opened his eyes. 

VOCABULARY. 

abrir, to open. lie gar, to arrive (see 73), 

a fuerza de, prep., by dint of, by. medio, -a, adj., half. 

antes de, prep., before. menos, adv., less. 

Carlos, Charles. minuto, minute. 

cerrado, -a, shut. . ojo, eye. 

cuarto, (noun) quarter. preguntar, to ask (a question). 

desayunarse, to have breakfast. prisa, haste. 

despues de, prep., after. puerta, door. 

hambre, f., hunger. reloj, m., watch, clock (pro- 

hora, hour, time. nounced relo). 

irse, to go away, to go along. sueno, sleep. 

levantarse, to get up. universidad, f., university. 

EXERCISE XIV. 

a. Esta manana, al abrir los ojos, tenia mucho sueno todavia. 
Antes de levantarme mire mi reloj y vi que eran ya las ocho menos 
cuarto. Teniendo que estar en la universidad a las ocho, no tuve 
tiempo de desayunarme, y me fui sin comer. Al pasar delante del 
Cafe Ingles, un amigo me llamo y me pregunto si no queria entrar. 
Le dije (or respondi) que tenia mucha prisa y que no podia. A 
fuerza de correr llegue a la clase a las ocho y cinco y encontre la 
puerta cerrada. 

b. Read the above paragraph aloud, making the subject Carlos, 
and making such other changes as the laws of agreement require. 
Repeat in the same way, making nosotros the subject. 



LESSON xv 57 

c. iDonde estaba Carlos cuando abrio los ojos? 

iQue hora era cuando Carlos se levanto? 

iQue tomo antes de irse a la universidad? 

Si tenia hambre, ipor que no tomo nada? 

I Por que no pudo desayunarse antes de irse? 

I Por que no quiso entrar en el cafe? 

iQue dijo Carlos al amigo que le habia llamado? 

<;Se levanto usted tarde 6 temprano? 

I A que hora se levanto usted esta mafiana? 

«;A que hora le llamo a usted su madre? 

iQue hora es? 

Al llegar Carlos a la clase, ique hora era? 



LESSON XV. 

90. The Future and Conditional Indicative. Each 

of these tenses has but one set of endings to serve for the 
three conjugations. 



JTURE 


CONDITIONAL 


-6 


-ia 


-as 


-ias 


-a 


-ia 


■emos 


-iamos 


-eis 


-iais 


-an 


-ian 



Note. The endings of the conditional of all conjugations are like the 
endings of the imperfect of the second and third conjugations. All futures 
and conditionals receive the stress on the first (or only) syllable of the ending. 

The stem of the future and conditional, in regular verbs, 
is the whole infinitive : i. e., the stem of the infinitive to- 
gether with the infinitive ending. The future and condi- 
tional would be formed then as follows : 

FUTURE CONDITIONAL 

estudiare, I shall study. escribiria, I should write. 

estudiaras, You will study, etc. escribirias, You would write, etc. 

DRILL. 

Conjugate in the future and conditional any familiar regular 
verb, and also ir, ver, ser and estar, which are regular in these 
tenses. 



58 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

91. Use of Future and Conditional. The future tense 
is used in the main, as in English, to express simple futurity. 

Mariana ire a Madrid. To-morrow I shall go to Madrid. 
Los ninos aprenderdn la leccion. The children will learn the 
lesson, 

a. The conditional commonly expresses action that is 
future in reference to some verb in past time. 

he dije que iria a Madrid. I told him that I should go to Mad- 
rid. 

he pregunte si veria a mi hijo. I asked him if he would see 
my son. 

Note. For should meaning ought review 30b. 

92. Irregular Futures and Conditionals. The end- 
ings of all verbs, even the most irregular, are regular in 
these tenses. Verbs having irregularities in the future and 
conditional have irregular stems. 

a. The vowel of the infinitive ending may be dropped, as in 
haber, poder, and querer, whose stems are habr-, podr-, and querr-. 

b. D may be substituted for the vowel of the infinitive end- 
ing, as in tener, whose stem is tendr-. 

c. The infinitive may be shortened by the loss of two letters, 
as in decir and hacer, whose stems are dir- and har-. 

Learn the irregular future and conditional of the verbs 
mentioned in this paragraph. (See 531, 533"534, 538"539> 
5430 

93. Future Perfect and Conditional Perfect. These 
compound tenses, formed respectively from the future and 
conditional of haber and a past participle, offer no especial 
difficulty. They are literal translations of the English. 

Habrdn ido ya. They will have gone already. 

No lo habrian visto. They would not have seen him. 



94. Comparison of Adjectives. 

a. Equality. Comparison of equal degree is expressed by 
tan, "as," before the adjective, and como, "as," after it. 

Juan es tan aplicado como yo. John is as industrious as I. 



wesson xv . 59 

b. Inequality. Comparison of unequal degree is expressed by 
mas, "more," or menos, "less," before the adjective and que, "than," 
after it. 

Juan es mas aplicado que yo. John is more industrious than I. 
Maria es mas bonita que Luisa. Mary is prettier than Louise. 
Esta leccion es menos fdcil que la otra. This lesson is less easy 
than, the other, 

c. Superlative. Superlative degree is expressed by el {la, los, 
las) mas, or el (la, los, las) menos before the adjective. 

los mas cortos, the shortest. 
la menos fdcil, the least easy. 

Note i. If the adjective follows the noun, the article precedes it. 

el medico mas famoso, the most famous doctor. 
Note 2. "In" after a superlative is expressed by de. 

el medico mas famoso de la ciudad, the most famous doctor in the city. 
Note 3. The possessive adjective may take the place of the article, 
mis discipulos mas aplicados, my most industrious pupils. 

95. Use of Definite Article. The definite article must 
accompany titles, except in direct address. 

el sehor Suarez, Mr. Suarez. 

Senor Sudrez, jcomo estd listed? How are you, Mr. Suarez? 

Exception. — Don and Dona are Spanish titles that have no 
English equivalent. They are used before the Christian name only, 
and are never accompanied by the article. Don Carlos, Dona Maria* 

96. Omission of Indefinite Article. The indefinite 
article is not used with a predicate noun denoting class, 
profession, occupation, rank and nationality. 

Mi amigo es americano. My friend is an American. 
Don Carlos es maestro. Charles is a teacher. 
jNo es listed medico? Are you not a doctor? 
a. If the predicate noun is limited by an adjective or other- 
wise, the article must be used. 

El Sr. Lopez es un medico muy famoso. Mr. Lopez is a very 
'famous doctor. 

97. Present Participle Clauses. A clause introduced 
by a present participle may express a condition. 

Teniendo yo diner o } compraria una casa. If I had money, I 
should buy a house. 

Siendo medico, jtrabajaria usted dia y noche? If you were a 
doctor, would you work day and night? 

*Sefior, Sefiora, Don and Dona are abbreviated Sr., Sra., D., Da. 



60 - SPANISH GRAMMAR 

VOCABULARY. 

Alfonso , Alphonso. mujer, woman, wife. 

besar, to kiss. ocupado, -a, busy. 

desde. . .hasta, from. . .to. oficina, office. 

Diego, James. pie, m., foot. 

criado, -a, servant. a pie, on foot. 

ejemplo, instance, example. periodico, newspaper. 

famoso, -a, famous. por, prep., for, in, during. 

Fernandez, a family name. tan, adv., as, so. 

lee he, f., milk. tanto, adv., so much. 

medico, physician. tasa, cup. 

mediodia, m., noon. 

todo el dia, toda la noche, toda la manana, all day, all night, 
all the morning. 

por la manana, in the morning, mornings. 

por la tarde, in the afternoon, afternoons. 

por la noche, at night, in the evening, nights, evenings. 

por el dia, during the day. 

EXERCISE XV. 

a. El Sr. Fernandez se llama D. Diego. Su esposa (mujer) 
se llama Da. Carmen. D. Diego es medico. Es un medico famoso. 
Su hermano D. Alfonso es tambien medico, pero no es tan famoso 
como D. Diego. El Sr. Fernandez es uno de los medicos mas 
famosos del pais. Es el mejor medico de la ciudad. Todo el dia 
D. Diego esta muy ocupado. Por ejemplo: Mariana la criada le 
llamara a las siete menos cuarto. Tomara una taza de cafe con 
leche, y pan 6 tostadas, repasando (mirando) al mismo tiempo el 
periodico de la manana y las cartas que hallara en la mesa del 
comedor. Entonces besara a sus hijos y a su mujer, y se ira a pie 
a su oficina, donde le estaran esperando muchos enfermos. Alii 
estara desde las ocho hasta mediodia. Por la tarde tendra que 
visitar a los enfermos que no han podido ir a verle en la oficina. 

b. iEs maestro el Sr. Fernandez? 
iQue es el Sr. Fernandez? 
,;C6mo se llama? 

iQue hace por la manana? 

<:Es mas famoso que su hermano? 

iCual de los dos es el mas ocupado? 

iComo pasara D. Diego el dia manana? 

iQue hara mientras que esta comiendo? 

^Quien es el mejor medico de la ciudad? 

iComo ira a la oficina? 

<;Le veran sus hijos antes de irse el a la oficina? 



i 



LESSON XVI 6 1 

Para ir a la oficina, <:por que calle tendra que pasar? 

iTendra que estar mucho tiempo alii? 

<jPor que no van todos los enfermos a. verle en la oficina? 

iDonde los visita el? 

Teniendo que trabajar tanto, ^desearia usted ser medico? 

Estando enfermo, <;llamaria usted a D. Diego? 

iSe marcho su amigo de Vd. por la tarde? 

I A que hora come Vd. por la mafiana? 



LESSON XVI. 



SYNOPSIS. 

ARTICLE— (a) definite; use (82, 89, 95) 
(b) indefinite, omission (96) 
ADJECTIVE — (a) descriptive, comparison (94) 

(b) numeral, cardinal 11-39 (87) 

(c) interrogative pronoun-adjectives que and cual (80) 

PRONOUN— Reflexive (a) forms (76) 

(b) position (77) 
VERB — (a) Regular (1). future and conditional (90, 91) 

(2) future and conditional perfect (93) 

(3) reflexive verbs (75, 78, 79) 

(4) impersonal construction (81) 

(5) infinitive after preposition (85) 

(6) present participle clauses (97) 
(b) Irregular (1) irregular past definite (84) 

(2) irregular futures and conditionals (92) 

(3) ver (83) 

(4) tener, idiomatic use (86) 
MISCELLANEOUS— Time of day (88) 

EXERCISE XVI. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. Will you please tell me where there is 
a doctor's office? 2. The doctor will be in his office this afternoon, 
from three to quarter past five. 3. We have been traveling this 
summer with a Portuguese gentleman and his wife. 4. They said 
that they should arrive at nine twenty-eight. 5. By dint of work- 
ing hard {mucho), we shall speak German perfectly. 6. Brazil is 
as large as the United States, and larger than Canada. 7. Santiago 
is the largest city in the Republic of Chile. 8. James's college is 
very far away; consequently, in order to have breakfast before go- 
ing on foot to his class, he has to get up early. 9. We wanted to 
go in, but could not. 10. How long were they in Mexico? They 
were not there long. 11. They say that you do not like South 
America. 12. On the contrary, I like it very much. 13. What is 



02 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

this servant's name? His name is Alphonso. 14. At what time 
did they go away? 15. Mr. Suarez is a very famous man.' He 
teaches in the University of Barcelona. 16. The best country in 
the world is my native land. 17. The children are in a hurry, but 
they have time to kiss their mother. 18. They asked us what 
time it was. 19. Shall we take seats near the door? 20. When 
I saw Charles in his office, he was very busy, so I went away after 
talking a few minutes with him. (^> What shall we be able to 
do then? 22. What kind of man is the President of Cuba? 23. If 
you were sick, what should you do? 24. How long shall we have 
to wait in order to see them? 25. Who made you that suit? 
26. What will mother say? 27. If you were very hungry should 
you take ice-cream? 28. My wife, because of her poor health, 
eats very little in the morning. 29. She takes only a cup of coffee 
with milk. 30. Did you buy the watch for yourself? 31. Are 
you sleepy? Then why are your eyes shut? 32. May I accompany 
you (fern.)? 33. I shall go to-night. 34. Have you not seen the 
magnificent lace at Rico's? 35. My best friend is not a teacher 
He is a doctor. 36. You should study every evening. 



LESSON XVII. 

98. Subjunctive Mode. 

The use of the subjunctive has become very rare in English. 
It will be recognized in the following examples : 

If it be he, let him come in. 

Were I you, I should go to-morrow. 

I desire that he come at once. 

In Spanish, on the other hand, the use of the subjunctive is 
so common that there is a whole range of ideas which cannot be 
expressed without a knowledge of its forms. To express these 
ideas, the subjunctive has a full complement of tenses, both simple 
and compound, one to correspond to each tense of the indicative. 

99. Subjunctive and Indicative. 

A verb in the indicative, in both English and Spanish, makes a 
direct statement, either positive or negative, or asks a direct ques- 
tion. It is used in simple sentences and independent clauses. 

John is sick. 

The wind is blowing, but it is not cold. 

Has John gone, or is he still in his room? 



WESSON XVII 63 

A verb in the subjunctive cannot make a direct statement or 
ask a direct question. It is employed, in general, in dependent 
clauses, whose meaning is intelligible only in connection with the 
idea expressed in the principal clause. In the following examples, 
the verb in the dependent clause would be expressed in Spanish 
by the subjunctive: 

I wish that he would come. 

Do you know a man who can fix bicycles? 

It is too bad that he is so thoughtless. 

They will stay until he comes. 

100. Present Subjunctive. The endings of the pres- 
ent subjunctive are, in regular verbs, added to the stem of 
the infinitive. 

FIRST CONJ. 2ND AND 3D CONJ. 

-e -a 

-es -as 

-e -a 

■emos -amos 

-eis -ais 

-en -an 

Applying these endings to stems of familiar regular verbs, we 
get: 

pre gunt e res pond a 

preguntes respondas 

pregunte . . responda 

pre gunt emos respondamos 

pregunte is responddis 

pre gunt en respondan 

Note. The stress in the present subjunctive is the same as in the pres- 
ent indicative. Note that, contrary to what is true in the indicative, the 
characteristic vowel of the present subjunctive is not that of the infinitive. 

101. Subjunctive in Dependent Object Clauses. The 

subjunctive is regularly used in Spanish in a dependent 
clause which is the object of a verb in the main clause that 
expresses (a) a command, a request, a prohibition or a per- 
mission. 

Le digo a <usted que no entre. I tell you not to go in. 

Mi padre ha prohibido que 1/dya alia. My father has forbidden 
me to go there. 



64 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

(b) A verb that expresses a fear, a desire or other emo- 
tion. 

Espero que se halle buena. I hope that she is well. 
Temo que no estudie bastante. I fear he doesn't study enough. 
Remark. Verbs of this group may be followed by an infinitive 
clause, if both clauses have the same subject: 

Espero hallarla mejor de salud. I hope to find her better. 
Deseo entrar en scguida. I wish to come in at once. 

102. Subjunctive in Dependent Subject Clauses. The 

subjunctive is used in a clause which stands as logical sub- 
ject of an impersonal verb. 

Es probable que la veamos esta tarde. It is probable that we 
shall see her this afternoon. 

Exception. The impersonal verb se dice, and impersonal verbs 
that express certainty, are followed by the indicative. 

Se dice que llegard esta tarde. They say he will arrive this 
afternoon. 

Es cierto que no aprendemos mucho. It is certain that we are 
not learning much. 

Remark. An impersonal verb may be followed by an infinitive 
if the dependent verb has no expressed subject. 

Es preciso ir ahora. It is necessary to go now. 

103. Sequence of Tenses. A verb in the dependent 

clause is in the present subjunctive if the verb in the main 

clause is present, future or perfect indicative. 

he dire que entre. I shall tell her to come in. (See also ex- 
amples above.) 

Note. The time expressed by the present subjunctive is identical with 
that of the verb of the main clause, or subsequent to it. 

104. Irregular Present Subjunctives. The present 
subjunctives of most irregular verbs are irregular. Learn 
those of ir and ver (see 535 and 546). 

105. Dependent Infinitives. Many verbs which ad- 
mit of a dependent infinitive do not require a preposition 
between verb and infinitive. To this class belong querer, 



LESSON XVII 65 

desear, deber and poder. Note the following examples of 
verbs which do require a preposition. * 

Me enseno a hablar bien. He taught me to speak well. 

Aprendemos a escribir. We are learning to write. 

Vamos a comer. We are going to eat. 

Tratar de ser bueno. To try to be good. 

VOCABULARY. 

al fin, adv., finally, at last. mis mo, own. 

a menudo, adv., often, frequently. molestar, to trouble. 

bastante, adv., enough. momenta* moment. 

bueno de salud, in good health. no mas que, only. 

cierto, certain, sure. nota, note, mark (in school). 

dejar, to let, allow. particular, private. 

delgado, thin, slender. permitir, to permit. 

despeinado, dishevelled. posible, possible. 

edad, f., age. preciso, necessary. 

en seguida, adv., at once. probable, probable. 

esperar, to hope, expect. prohibir, to forbid. 

escalera, stairs. pronto, adv., soon. 

fuerte, strong. sala, parlor. 

guisar, to cook. sill a, chair. 

hasta, prep., as far as, up to, sucio, dirty. 

until. t enter, to fear. 

malo de salud, in poor health. tratar de, to try to. 

EXERCISE XVII. 

a. (Dos senoras estan sentadas en la sala de una casa par- 
ticular.) 

Se dice que su hijo Alfonso no esta muy bueno de salud. 

Temo que no se halle tan fuerte como desearia. 

Es cierto que esta mas delgado que algunos nifios de su misma 
edad. 

Es muy probable que estudie demasiado. Le he prohibido que 
trabaje por la noche, pero el desea mucho tener buenas notas, y 
su padre le esta diciendo siempre que trate de ser el mejor de la 
clase. 

iEsta en casa su hija? 

Si, esta; pero esta en la cocina, aprendiendo (or donde esta 
aprendiendo) a guisar, y esta tan sucia y despeinada que no puedo 
permitir que entre aqui. 

iNo me hace Vd. el favor de dejarle que entre no mas que 
por un momento? Deseo tanto verla. 



* Hereafter, verbs that require a preposition before a dependent infini- 
tive, will be indicated in the vocabularies. 



66 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

(La madre permite a la nina que entre, y los tres hablan por 
un rato. Al fin la sefiora se levanta para marcharse, y la madre 
de la nina le dice :) 

<jSe va Vd. tan pronto? 

Si, sefiora. Es preciso que me halle en casa antes de las seis. 

Entonces la acompafiare a Vd. hasta la puerta de la escalera. 

No quiero que Vd. se moleste. 

Espero que Vd. nos visite a menudo. Nuestra casa esta tan 
cerca de la suya. 

b. iQue se dice de Alfonso? 
iQue teme su madre? 

I No es cierto que esta f uerte ? 
iEs posible que trabaje demasiado? 
iQue le ha prohibido su madre? 
iQuien le ha dicho que trate de tener buenas notas? 
<;Que mas le dice su padre? 

I Por que no quiere esta seiiora que su hija entre en la sala? 
I Por que es preciso que la otra seiiora se marche tan temprano ? 
Al acompafiar a la sefiora hasta la puerta, <:que le dice la madre 
de la nina? 

c. iNo quiere Vd. que vea su libro? 
iDesea Vd. que estudiemos juntos? 

iNo me ha dicho Vd. que repase mis lecciones ahora? 

<;No espera Vd. que nuestra madre nos compre algo en esta 
tienda? 

I Quiere Vd. que mi* madre le ensene a guisar? ±k hablar es- 
pafiol? 

I Me permite Vd. que vaya a casa de Luisa ? 

i-Que edad tiene su hijo de Vd. ? 



LESSON XVIII. 

106. Radical-changing Verbs. There is a large group 
of Spanish verbs whose only irregularity consists of the 
systematic substitution, under certain conditions, of another 
vowel, or a diphthong, for the vowel of the stem. 

vestirse, to dress ; me visto, I dress. 
dormir, to sleep ; duerme, he sleeps ; durmieron, they slept. 



LESSON XVIII 67 

These verbs are called radical-changing {i. e., root- 
changing). They are divided into three classes according 
to the character of their vowel changes. In the infinitive 
they are not to be distinguished from verbs that are not rad- 
ical-changing. 

107. First Class. Verbs of this class belong to the 
first or second conjugation, and have stem- vowel e or o. 
They change stem-vowel e to ie, and stem-vowel o to ue, 
in all forms whose stress falls on the stem. The forms al- 
ready learned which have such stress are the present indica- 
tive and subjunctive, all of the singular, and the third per- 
son plural. The verbs given below are representative of 
this class: Forms not given may be assumed to be regular. 

EntendER, to understand. 
PrES. Indic entiendo, entiendes, entiende, entendemos, entendeis, 

entienden. 
PrES. Subj. entienda, enfiendas, entienda, entendamos, entendais, 
entiendan. 

VolvER, to turn.* 
PrES. Indic vnelvo, vuelves, vuelve, volvemos, volveis, vuelven. 
PrES. Subj. vaelva, vuelvas, vuelva, volvamos, volvais, vuelvan. 

108. Second Class. Verbs of this class belong to the 
third conjugation and have stem-vow T el e or o. They change 
these stem-vowels in the same way as do verbs of the first 
class, and in the same places. In addition they change stem- 
vowel e to i, and o to u (1) in the present subjunctive, first 
and second persons plural, and (2) in those forms whose 
ending begins with io or ie. This last change occurs in the 
past definite, third person singular and plural, and in the 
present participle. 

Sentir, to feel, regret, be sorry. 
Present Participle, sintiendo. 

PrES. Indic siento, sientes, siente, sentimos, sentis, sienten. 
PrES. Subj. sienta, sientas, sienta, sintamos, sintdis, sientan. 
Past Def. senti, sentiste, sintio, sentimos, sentisteis, sintieron. 

* Volver has in addition an irregular past participle, vuelto. 



68 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Dormir, to sleep. 

Present Participle, durmiendo. 

PrES. Indic. duermo, duermes, duerme, dormimos, dormis, duermen. 

PrES. Subj. duerma, duennas, duenna, durmamos, durm&is, duer- 

man. 
Past Dee. dormi, dormiste, durmio, dormimos, dormisteis, dur- 

mieron. 

109. Third Class. Verbs of this class belong to the 
third conjugation, and all have the stem- vowel e. This 
stem-vowel is changed to i in all forms whose stress falls 
on the stem (i. e., the present indicative and subjunctive, 
all of the singular, and the third person plural). In addition 
they change e to i (i).in the present subjunctive, first and 
second persons plural, and (2) in those forms whose end- 
ings begin with io or ie. 

Vestir, to dress. 

Present Participle, vistiendo. 

PrES. Indic visto, vistes, viste, yestimos, vestis, visten. 
PrES. Subj. vista, vistas, vista, vistamos, vistdis, vistan. 
Past Def. vesti, vestiste, vistio, vestimos, vestisteis, vistieron. 

DRILL. 

Conjugate the radical-changing verbs in the vocabulary, and 
also recomendar and encontrar, which are radical-changing of the 
first class. 

110. Irregular Present Subjunctives. The present 
subjunctives of querer and poder may be conveniently 
learned at this point, since they are just like the present 
subjunctives of radical-changing verbs of the first class. 
(See 537 and 539O 

111. The adjectives bueno, malo, alguno, •'some," 
ninguno, "no," primero, "first," tercero, "third," and pos- 
trero, "last," may stand before their noun. In this position 
the masculine form loses its final o. 

el primer Jwmbre; ningun teatro ; un buett muchacho; algihi dia. 



LESSON XVIII • 6q 

112. Mismo (-a, -os, -as), "self/' is often used to in- 
tensify a noun or pronoun subject, or a prepositional reflex- 
ive pronoun. 

Mi padre mismo me llamo. My father called me himself. 

Ellas mismas entraron. They themselves came in. 

Bl muchacho se enseno a si mismo. The boy taught himself. 

VOCABULARY. 

acostarse, to lie down, go to bed los dos, las dos, the two, both. 

(R-ch I)* indicar, to indicate, show. 

aguja, needle, hand (of a watch). medianoche, f., midnight. 

anoche, adv., last night. nuevo, new. 

aunque, conj., although. olvidar, to forget. 

comedia, play, comedy. parte, 1, part. 

de prisa, adv., fast, rapidly par completo, adv., completely. 

despacio, adv., slowly. por lo comun, adv., ordinarily. 

despertar, to wake (transitive, raramente, adv., rarely. 

R-ch. I). • representar, to act, play, give, 

despertarse, to awake, wake up. (of shows). 

diveriirse, to enjoy oneself, to sabio, learned. 

have a good time (R-ch. II). teatro, theater. 

hasta, prep., until. vestirse, to dress (intransitive). 

interesante, interesting. volverse, to return, go back 

lo que that which, what, that come back. 

(relative pron.) 

EXERCISE XVIII. 

a. El padre de Carlos es un hombre muy sabio. Hablando 
con el siempre aprendo algo. Aunque no entiendo muy bien el 
espafiol, el habla siempre tan despacio que entiendo perfectamente 
todo lo que dice. (El dice raramente cosas que no puedo entender 
perfectamente.) Los quiero a los dos (a el y a su hijo). Algun 
dia iremos juntos a visitarles. Anoche fui con ellos al teatro, donde 
se represento una comedia nueva. Me diverti muchisimo y no volvi 
a casa hasta medianoche (las doce de la noche). Me acoste en 
seguida. Por lo comun mi padre me despierta cuando el se levanta ; 
pero esta mafiana el mismo durmio hasta las ocho, y al desper- 
tarse, me olvido por completo. Cuando yo me desperte, la primera 
cosa que hice fue mirar mi reloj, y vi que las agujas indicaban las 
nueve menos veinte. Me levante en seguida y me vesti muy de 
prisa. 

b. En la primera parte de esta leccion, ^quien es que habla? 
^De quien esta hablando? 



* In succeeding vocabularies all radical-changing verbs will be noted. 



70 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

iQue clase de persona es el padre de Carlos? 

iEntiende el muchacho lo que dice? 

iNo habla demasiado de prisa? 

iDonde fueron los tres anoche? 

iLes gusto la comedia? 

<;D6nde se represento la comedia? 

<;Se volvieron temprano a casa? 

iQue hicieron entonces? 

c. iMe entiende Vd. cuando hablo de prisa? 

iQuieren Vds. que hable mas despacio? 

Por lo comun, ^a que hora se despierta Vd. por la mafiana? 

iLe despierta a Vd. su madre? 

iQue hace Vd." cuando tiene sueno? 

I Se acuesta Vd. tarde 6 temprano ? 

iA'que hora, por lo comun? 

<;A que hora es preciso que se acuesten los nifios? 

Despues de la clase, <;se vuelven Vds. en seguida* a casa? 

Al levantarse, <;que hace Vd. primero? iy despues? 

iQuiere Vd. que le recomiende un buen maestro de espanol? 

Espero que Vds. se diviertan. 

Espero que Vd. duerma bien. ^ 



LESSON XIX. 

113. Two Pronoun-objects. When a verb has two 
pronoun-objects, one direct and the other indirect, both are 
commonly expressed by the regular forms, whose position 
with regard to the verb is the same as that of a single pro- 
noun-object (see 65).* The indirect object regularly pre- 
cedes the direct, though the reflexive of the third person, se, 
always comes first, whether direct or indirect. 

Mi padre me lo did. My father gave it to me. 

Lo compre para ddrtelo. I bought it to give to you. 

ensendndomela, showing it to me. 

Ella se lo hizo. She made it for herself. 

Juan se me presents. John introduced himself to me. 



* Posterior position of two object-pronouns always makes necessary a 
written accent on the verb-form. 



WESSON XIX 71 

114. Substitute Pronoun se. Two pronoun-objects 
beginning with the letter 1 may not stand side by side ; so 
if both objects are of the third person, for the first (which 
would be the indirect le or les), is substituted a form se. 
This se must not be confused in use with the reflexive se. 

Se lo (not le lo) he dado. I have given it to him (you, her). 
dandoselas, (not les las), giving them to them (to you). 

115. Double Pronoun Object Construction. This 
.construction, which was explained in 66, is used also w T ith 
one of two pronoun-objects, for the sake. of contrast or em- 
phasis. 

Ella me lo ha dado a mi. She has given it to me. 

A mi me lo han ensenado. They have shown it to me. 

a. It is very commonly used to clear up ambiguity caused by 
the use of the substitute pronoun se. 

Se lo he dado a el (d usted 3 a ella). I have given it to him 
(to you, to her). 

Voy a ensendrselo a Vds. (d ellos, a ellas). I am going to 
show it to you (to them). 

116. Prepositional Object Pronoun used alone. The 

prepositional object pronoun (a mi, a listed, etc.) ordinarily 
accompanies a regular object pronoun of the same gender, 
number and person, which it intensifies or explains. In a 
few cases, however, it is used instead of the regular object- 
form. 

a. If the direct object of a verb is first or second person, the 
indirect object assumes the prepositional form. 

Me han recomendado a Vd. They have recommended me to 
you. 

Os presentardn a ella. They will introduce you to her. 

b. It is used when the verb which governs the pronoun, hav- 
ing been previously expressed is not repeated. 

Los he dado a el, pero no a ella. I gave them to him, but not 
to her. 

j A qui en buscaf A Vd. For whom is he looking? For you. 

c. Instead of using the indirect object pronoun to express the 
person for whom something is done, it is current to use para with 
the prepositional form. 

Lo he comprado para Vd. I bought it for you. 

Mi madre lo hizo para mi. Mother made it for me. 



72 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

117. Neuter Gender. Since in Spanish all names of 
beings and things are masculine or feminine, only the names 
of ideas and qualities may be neuter. 

a. The definite article has a neuter form lo, which may be 
used before the masculine singular form of the adjective, to ex- 
press the notion of quality. 

lo bueno, that which is good. 

lo dzul, blue (that which is blue). 

b. Related to the personal pronouns are the neuter subject 
and prepositional form ello, and the neuter object and predicate 
form lo. Both are used to refer to ideas or sentences. 

Se dice que Juan no estd fuerte. <No puedo creerlo. They say 
John is not strong. I can't believe it. 

Ello es que no estd fuerte. The "thing of it" is, he is not 
strong. 

Quiero informarme de ello. I want to find out about it. 

Lo is often used in the second part of a compound sentence to 
avoid repetition of an idea of the first part, and in answers with 
the verb scr, to avoid repetition of part of the question. 

r Juan estd enfermo y su hermana lo estd tambien. John is sick 
and his sister is too. 

Maria es aplicada pero su hermano no lo es. Mary is indus- 
trious but her brother is not. 

jEs usted medico? Lo soy. Are you a doctor? I am. 

c. The neuter demonstrative pronouns esto, eso and aquello, 
are used to point out a sentence or idea. 

Esto es malo. This matter is bad. 
.. Aquello de Juan. That matter concerning John. 
Eso que Vd. me dice. That which you tell me. 

d. The neuter form of the possessive pronoun expresses in 
a general way the idea of possession or property. 

lo mio, that which is mine. 

118. Irregular verb dar, "to give." The Participles, 
Imperfect, Future and Conditional of dar are regular. 
Learn the Present Indicative and Subjunctive, and the Past 
Definite. (See 530.) 

119. Omisson of Definite and Indefinite Articles. 

Both articles are regularly omitted before a noun in appo- 
sition. 

El Sr. Fernandez, medico famoso. Mr. Fernandez, a famous 
doctor. 

Alfonso, Rey de Espaha. Alphonso, the King of Spain. 



LESSON XIX 73 

120. Idiomatic. Acabar. The verb acabar, "to finish/' 
is used idiomatically in the present or imperfect, followed 
by de and an infinitive, to describe an act as just completed 
in the present or in the past. 

Acabo de lie gar. I have just arrived. 

Acababan de comer. They had just eaten. 

VOCABULARY. 

amarillo, yellow. noticia, piece of news. 

atreverse a, to dare to. preferir, to prefer (R-ch. II). 

azul, blue. pues, conj., then, for, well. 

enfermedad, f., illness. querer decir, to mean. 

joven, m., f., young man, young recibir, to receive. 

woman. sitpiicar, to entreat, beg (see 73 

llorar, to cry. and 101a). 

morirse, to die (R-ch. II).* verdadero, true. 

EXERCISE XIX. 

a. iQue quiere decir esto? iPor que esta Vd. llorando? iQue 
tiene Vd. ? {What is the matter with you?) 

Acabo de recibir una noticia muy mala. 

iQue hay? (What is the matter f) 

Ello es que mi tio Juan, hermano de mi madre, esta muy en- 
fermo, y que se teme que se muera. 

I Quien se lo ha dicho ? 

Me lo dijo mi hermano. A el se lo dijo mi tia misma. 

Entonces la noticia debe ser verdadera. 1 Se lo ha dicho Vd. 
a su madre? 

No sefior; no me atrevo a decirselo. 

Pues Vd. debe hacerlo en seguida. Si Vd. no quiere, yo mismo 
lo hare. 

i Me hace Vd. ese favor? 

b. 1 Quien le dio a la nina la noticia de la enfermedad de su 
tio? 

iDe quien tuvo (or recibio) su hermano la noticia? 

; Se la dio la nina a su madre ? 

I Por que? 

I Quien le hizo a la nina el favor de decirselo a su madre? 

c. La nina tiene muchas flores azules y amarillas. Se las dio 
Juan, joven que la quiere mucho. A la nina no le gusta mucho lo 

* Also has irregular past participle muerto. 



74 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

amarillo. Prefiere lo azul ; por consiguiente las flores amarillas 
las va a dar a su hermana. Le he suplicado que me las de a mi, 
pero ella no quiere hacerlo (or no lo quiere). Me dice — Se las 
dare a mi hermana, pero no a Vd. 

d. iQue color le gusta mas a la nina? 
iQue color prefiere la nina? 

iCual es el color de las flores que el joven le ha dado a la 
nina? 

«jSe las quiere dar ella a la joven, amiga de su hermana? 

I A quien se las va a dar ella? 

«j Prefiere Vd. lo azul a lo amarillo? 

I Quiere Vd. que le presente a mi amigo? 

<:Se le presento Juan (a Vd.) ? 

I Quien se le presento (a Vd.) ? 

I Son Vds. discipulos del senor Suarez ? 

iHa recibido V. noticia de ello? 



LESSON XX. 

SYNOPSIS. 

ARTICLE — (a) omission of definite and indefinite (119) 

(b) neuter forms (117a) 
ADJECTIVE— (a) lose final o (m) 

(b) mismo, "self" (112) 
PRONOUN — (a) personal (1) position of two objects (113) 

(2) substitute se (114) 

(3) double object construction (115) 

(4) prepositional form alone used (116) 

(5) neuter ello and lo (117b) 

(b) possessive, neuter forms (ii7d) 

(c) demonstrative, neuter forms (117c) 
VERB — (a) Regular (1) subjunctive mode (98, 99) 

(2) use in subject clauses (102) 

(3) ' use in object clauses (101) 

(4) subjunctive present (100) 

(5) subiunctive sequence of tenses (103) 

(6) infinitive, dependent (105) 

(b) Irregular (1) present subjunctive of ir, ver, poder, querer 
(104, no) 

(2) dar (118) 

(3) radical-changing verbs (106-109) 

, MISCELLANEOUS— Idiomatic, acabar (120) 

EXERCISE XX. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. Yellow is not so pretty as blue. 2. Is 
it hard to get up early in the winter? 3. This young man has a 
great deal of ability. 4. They had just received the news of Juan 
Rico's illness. 5. The child could not speak of it without crying. 



WESSON xxi 75 

6. That is what I mean. 7. Both were dirty and dishevelled. 
8. I have just waked up. 9. The servant says that she is sorry 
she can not let them come in. 10. I want very much to go to the 
theatre and see a play. 11. It is necessary for the children to 
sleep a good deal. 12. There are only three chairs in the parlor. 
13. She herself gave them to me. 14. It is true that I did not 
go back home until noon. 15. I beg you to permit me to come in 
for a moment. 16. That is the most interesting age. 17. This 
is the third month of the year. 18. The children tried not to 
trouble their teacher. 19. Do you dare to return home late? 
20. Of course she is very sick, but they are not afraid that she is 
going to die. 21. It is not probable that I shall go to bed soon. 
22. Are you willing to give them to me? 23. I did not give them 
to him, but to her. 24. For whom did you buy it? For you. 
25. At last I understand you. 26. We often go there in the 
evening. 27. Every one likes to receive a good piece of news. 
28. In this street there is a magnificent private house. I want 
you to see it. 29. In what part of Europe have they been travel- 
ing? 30. They will wait for us an hour and a half. 31. Last 
night they had a good time at Charles's. 32. I shall not forget 
what you told me. 33. Ordinarily I prefer what is new. 34. The 
hands of my watch indicated a quarter before eleven. 35. His 
father tells him to get up and dress himself at once. 36. Is your 
father a teacher of French? He is. 37. You are a good boy. 
38. No man is as learned as he wants to be. 30. She is not in 
good health, and her father has forbidden her to study so much. 
40. Will you please speak more slowly? 



LESSON XXI. 

121. Subjunctive in Main Clauses. The subjunctive 
is often found in a sentence which is apparently an inde- 
pendent clause ; but such sentences may be construed as de- 
pending upon an unexpressed verb of wishing, ordering or 
permitting. 

Que Vd. descanse. May you rest well. 

Que suban. Let them come up. 

Comamos ahora. Let us eat now.* 



* Ir is the only verb which has a special . form (vamos instead of 
vayamos) to use in this sort of subjunctive clause. 



j6 „ SPANISH GRAMMAR 

a. If the subject of such sentence is a noun, it may stand 
after que and before the verb, or que may be omitted and the sub- 
ject follow the verb. 

Que Juan suba en seguida. Let John come up at once. 
Suba Juan en seguida. Let John come up at once. 

b. If the sentence is negative, object pronouns precede the 
verb. Otherwise they are attached to it, and a written accent is 
made necessary. 

Compremoslo. Let us buy it. 

No lo compremos. Let us not buy it. 

Comprelo Juan, Let John buy it. 

Note. A reflexive verb used in this way drops the ^ of the 
first person plural. 

Desaymtamonos. Let us have breakfast. 

122. Present Subjunctive as Imperative. An exten- 
sion of the construction discussed in 121 is the use of the 
third person singular or plural of the present subjunctive 
in commands, with usted (ustedes) expressed or implied, 

In positive commands the object pronouns are joined to 
the verb form, which must be accented ; in negative com- 
mands the object pronouns precede the verb. 

Coma Vd. ahora. Coman Vds. ahora. Eat now. 

Escriba Vd el ejercicio. Write the exercise. 

Vayan Vds. en seguida. Go at once. 

Trate Vd. de ser amable. Try to be amiable. 

No corra Vd, tanto. Don't run so much. 

Bsperenme Vds. Wait for me. 

Compremelo V. madre. Buy it for me, mother. 

123. Irregular Present Subjunctives. Learn the ir- 
regular present subjunctives of ser, estar, tener, hacer, 
decir, haber. (See 53 I "534, 542-543-) 

Note that the present subjunctives of tener, hacer and 
decir are formed on the same stem as the first person pres- 
ent indicative, and that the present subjunctive of estar is 
regular except for the written accent. 

124. Verbs with Inceptive Endings. For these verbs 
see 513, and learn irregularities of conocer. 



WESSON XXI 



77 



VOCABULARY. 



adelante, adv., forward. 

/A dios! Good-bye. How do 
you do? 

amabxlidad , f., amiability, kind- 
ness. 

aprovechar, to be of profit. 

bondad, f., goodness. 

caballero, gentleman, Sir. + 

comprender, to understand. 

conocer, to know (i. e. } to be ac- 
quainted with), to make the 
acquaintance of. 

conocido, acquaintance. 

descansar, to rest. 

despedirse (de), to say good- 
bye (to) (R-ch. III). 

Dios, God. 

emplear, to use, employ. 

encontrarse, to find oneself, to be. 

familia, family. 



frase, f., phrase., sentence. 

gracias, thanks. 

luego, adv., at once, soon, bye 

and bye. 
modo, way, manner. 
novedad, f., novelty, change. 
orden, f., order, command^ 
perdonar, forgive, excuse. 
sentarse, to sit down (R-ch. I). 
senorito, -a, young gentleman, 

lady. 
Senorita, Miss. 
servidor, -a, servant (not used 

literally). 
servir, to serve (R-ch. III). 
servirse, to help oneself. 
siguiente, following. 
jVaya! The idea! (from ir). 
vista, sight, view. 



EXERCISE XXI. 

(A.) Buenos dias, Sr. Suarez. Good morning, Mr. Suarez. 

Buenas tardes, Sra. Rico. Good afternoon, Mrs. Rico. 

Buenas noches, Juan. Good evening, John. 

These are the ordinary salutations. The reply may be in the 
same words, or : — 

Muy buenos los tenga Vd. Good morning to you. 

Muy buenas las tenga Vd. Good afternoon (evening) to you. 

Still more formal replies are : — Servidor de Vd. A la orden 
de Vd. 

Acknowledging a greeting one may say: — Tanto gusto en ver 
a Vd. 

I A dios Carlos! is a very informal greeting to intimate friends. 

A greeting is commonly followed by an inquiry as to the other 
person's health, using one of the following forms : 

jComo estd Vd.f 

jComo se halla Vd.f 

jComo se encuentran Vds.f 

j C onto lo pasa Vd.f (Literally, How are you passing it?) 

More informal are: — jComo le vaf and Hola, jque talf equiv- 
alent to "How goes if? 

Note the replies: — Muy bien, gracias. Bien, gracias jy Vd.f 
Asi asi. Asi pasando. (After a fashion.) Sin novedad. 



j8 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

To inquire about the health of the members of another's fam~ 

fly:- 

j C onto estd su senor padre? 

jComo se halla su senora madref 

jComo se encuentra su senor esposof 

4 Como estdn los de su casaf 

jComo estd la familia? 

A gentleman does not inquire about the health of another 
gentleman's wife or sisters, unless he happens to be an intimate 
friend. He says instead : — 

jY como estdn en casaf 

On taking leave, Buenos dias, Buenas tardes and Buenas noches 
are used. Also, more formally: — 

Vaya Vd. con Dios. (To one leaving.) 

Quede Vd. con Dios. (To one left behind.) 

Vd. lo pase bien. (May it go well with you.) 

Adios is less formal, and less commonly used than, is generally 
supposed. . . 

On leaving anyone at night, we may say: — Que Vd. descanse, 
and to one who is going to the theatre or other place of amuse- 
ment, Que Vd. se divierta. 

Very commonly used among acquaintances are : — 

Hasta manana. Until to-morrow. 

Hasta luego. See you later. (That is, in the course of the 
day.) 

Hasta la vista or Hasta otra vista. (Indefinite.) 

"Please" is expressed by Sirvasc (Sirvanse) t Hdgame Vd. el 
favor de..., Tengan Vds. la bondad de..., Tenga Vd. la amabili- 
dad de... The first is generally used when one wishes to confer 
a favor, the others when one asks a favor. 

Sirvase Vd. sentarse. 

Tenga Vd. la bondad de hablar mas despacio. 

Hdgame Vd. el favor del pan. 

The expression already given in an earlier lesson, jMe hace 
Vd. el favor? is a shade more courteous because of the interroga- 
tive form. 

On entering the dining-room of a boarding-house, or the com- 
partment of a train, it is proper to greet those already seated. On 
leaving the table before the others are through, one says : — Que 
les aproveche a Vds. 

To ask another person to repeat what he has said : — 

j Como? 

j Que ha dicho Vd.? No le comprendo (entiendo) muy bien. 

Perdoneme Vd. No he entendido. 



LESSON xxii 79 

Instead of passing through a door ahead of another, one should 
say: — Pase Vd. Senor (Senora). The same phrase means "come 
in," if used on opening the door to a person who has knocked. 
If one does not go to the door, "come in" is expressed by ;Ade- 
lante ! 

Caballero, Sir, is always more courteous than Senor, in address. 

Note the following: — 

Salude Vd. a su,senora madre. Remember me to your mother. 

Permitame que le presente a mi amigo, el Sr. Fernandez. 

Tanto (or mucho) gusto en conocerle, Senor. 

Sientese Vd. {Tome Vd. asiento.) 

No se mo lest e Vd. 

Muchisimas gracias. No hay de que. (Don't mention it.) 

(B.) iComo se dicen en espafiol las frases siguientes? Good 
morning. Excuse me. Kindly pass the bread, etc. 

iQue frase empleamos para presentar a una persona a otra? 

iComo se responde? 

Al entrar en un comedor donde hay varias personas, <ique se 
hace? 

iQue quiere decir en ingles "hasta luego" ? 

iQue decimos al despedirnos de un amigo que se va? 

<;Que frase empleamos cuando no entendemos bien lo que otra 
persona ha dicho? 

iCuales son los varios modos de saludar a un conocido? 

iComo se pregunta por la salud de una persona? 



LESSON XXII. 

125. Imperfect Subjunctives. There are two simple 
past tenses of the subjunctive, the First and Second Imper- 
fect. Their endings are added to the stem of the infinitive. 
The endings for the second and third conjugations are the 
same. 

FIRST IMPERFECT SUBJ. SECOND IMPERFECT SUB J. 

1ST CON J. 2D AND 3D CON J. 1ST CON J. 2D AND 3D CON J. 



-ase 


-iese 


-ara 


-lera 


-ases 


-ieses 


-aras 


-ieras 


-ase 


-iese 


-ara 


-iera 


-asemos 


-iesemos 


-aramos 


-ieramos 


-aseis 


-ieseis 


-arais 


-ierais 


-asen 


-iesen 


-aran 


-ieran 



Observe the written accent on the first person plural, and note that 
the stress is in all forms on the first syllable of the ending. 



80 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

DRILL. 

Apply these endings to stems of familiar regular verbs, such 
as: — acabar, aprender, perdonar, ocurrir, permitir, responder. 

126. Use of Imperfect Subjunctives. The first and 
second imperfect subjunctives are interchangeable. The 
first is the commoner of the two. The commonest use of 
the imperfect subjunctives is in a dependent clause when 
the verb of the main clause is imperfect, past definite, plu- 
perfect or conditional. 

A r o era posible que fuese (fuera) ayer. It was not possible 
for him to go yesterday. 

Le dije que entrase (entrara) en seguida. I told him to go 
in at once. 

Mi madre me habia mandado que subiese (subiera). My moth- 
er had told me to go up. 

Me gustaria que V. comiese {cornier a) con nosotros. I should 
like to have you eat with us. 

Note. The time expressed by the imperfect subjunctive is identical 
with the time of the verb in the main clause, or subsequent to it. 

127. Irregular Imperfect Subjunctives. The imper- 
fect subjunctive of any irregular verb may be found if we 
know its past definite, by substituting for the final -Iron of 
the third person plural, -se or -ra. This is not a scientific 
but a practical method for deriving these forms. 

sentir; sintieron; sintiera; sintiese. 
dormir; durmieron; durmiese; durmiera. 
ser; fueron; fuese; fuera. 
hacer; hicieron; hiciese; hiciera. 
dar; dieron; diese; diera. 

DRILL. 

Conjugate the imperfect subjunctives of estar, haber, tener, 
querer, ir, poder, decir, ver. 

1 28. Conditions Contrary to Fact. In conditions con- 
trary to fact (/. e. y conditions which state that if a certain 
thing were true, something else would be true also), the 
imperfect subjunctive (either one) is used in the condition 



LESSON XXII SI 

(the "if-clause) and the conditional is used in the con- 
clusion. 

Si fuesemos ricos, comprariamos una casa. If we were rich 
we should buy a house. 

Si mi hermano no estudiara tanto, seria mas amable. If my 
brother did not study so much, he would be more agreeable. 

a. In conditions contrary to fact, the imperfect subjunctive in 
-ra may be substituted for the conditional in the conclusion. 

Si tuviese diner o, iria (fuera) a Madrid. If I had money I 
should go to Madrid. 

b. In a condition contrary to fact, the conclusion or the condi- 
tion may stand first. 

Trabajaria mas, si fuese Vd. I should work harder, if I were 
you. 

Note. In general, aside from conditions contrary to fact, conditional 
sentences offer no difficulty in Spanish. The indicative is generally em- 
ployed in both clauses. 

Si soy rico, es porque he sido aplicado. If I am rich it is because I 
have been industrious. 

129. "I should like ..." This useful expression may 
be expressed by Desearia, by Me gustaria, or by Quisiera. 
Either expression is followed by an infinitive if there is no 
change of subject, or by que and the imperfect subjunctive 
if there is. 

Desearia ir eon Vd. I should like to go with you. 

Me gustaria comer ahora. I should like to eat now. 

Quisiera tener buenas notas. I should like to have good marks. 

Desearia que Vd. volviese en seguida. I should like to have you 
return at once. 

Me gustaria que mi hi jo no fumara tanto. I wish my son would 
not smoke so much. 

No quisiera que Vd. fuese tan perezoso como Juan. I should 
not like to have you be as lazy as John. 

a. The use of these constructions is of course extended to 
other persons than the first. 

A mi padre no le gustaria mucho que mi hermano fuese con 
Vd. My father would not like very much to have my brother go 
with you. 

130. Irregular verbs salir and venir. Learn the con- 
jugation of salir, "to come out/' "go out/' and venir, "to 
come." (See 541 and 547.) 



82 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

131. Days, Months and Seasons. The days of the 
week are: domingo (Sunday), limes, martes, miercoles, 
jueves, viernes, sabado. The months of the year are : 
enero, febrero, marzo, abril, mayo, junio, julio, agosto, 
septiembre,* octubre, noviembre, diciembre. The sea- 
sons are : la primavera, el verano, el otono, el invierno. 

Note. Names of the seasons are generally accompanied by 
the article. 

132. Use of Definite Article. Many expressions of 
time that are used with adverbial force, are accompanied 
by the article, though not in English. 

la semana pasado, last week. la sent an a proximo, next week. 

el ano pasado, last year. el ano proximo, next year. 

los viernes, on Fridays, every el tunes, on Monday. 
Friday. 

VOCABULARY. 

al ano, per year. p>ues, conj., well. 

al mes, per month. semana, week. 

antier, day before yesterday. sentirse bueno, to feel well. 

eontento, satisfied. todos los dias, every day. 

desgraciadainente, adv., unfortu- ultimo, last (the very last). 

nately. verdad, f., truth. 

error, m., error. vez, f., time (one of a number 

parece, it seems. of times). 

pasado, last (in the sense of una vez, once. 

just past). dos veces, twice. 
proximo, next. 

. EXERCISE XXII. 

a. i Por que no salio Vd. con los demas discipulos ? 

Porque el maestro no me permitio que saliese. 

I Que le decia el maestro cuando vine ? 

Me estaba diciendo que trabajase mas. 

Pero Vd. es uno de los mejores discipulos de la clase. 

No soy tan bueno como a Vd. le parece ; pero es cierto que he 
trabajado, y sentiria mucho que el maestro no estuviese eontento 
conmigo. Si no hubiera (hubiese) estudiado, no habria hecho tan 
bien hasta ahora. Desgraciadamente, esta manana, al escribir el 



* Pronounced and sometimes spelled, setiembre. 



WESSON XXIII * 83 

ejercicio en el pizarron, hice muchos errores de gramatica. L,a 
verclad es que toda la semana pasada no me he sentido bueno, y 
antier mi madre me prohibio que estudiase mas por la noche. 
Pues, si yo fuera Vd., se lo diria todo al maestro. 

b. iCuantas horas al dia trabaja Vd. ? 

iCuando se marcha Vd. ? (Answer in as many ways as pos- 
sible.) 

iCuantos dias hay en la semana? ^Cuales son? 

iCuales son los meses del afio? 

iCuantos dias ticne el mes de enero? <;el mes de junio? 

iCuantas semanas en un mes? 

iCual es el primer dia de la semana? <;el tercero? ^ el pos- 
trero? 

<;Cual es el dia que viene despues del lunes? 

i*Que mes viene despues de marzo? 

iCuales son los meses de la primavera? <jdel verano? <;del 
otono? idel invierno? 

iQu'e dia de la semana es hoy? (also iHoy, que es? or iQue dia 
es hoy?) 

H6y es miercoles. 

I A cuantos del mes estamos hoy? (What day of the month 
is it? Use cardinal numerals in replying, to give any date except 
the yrst.") x 

Estamos a veinticuatro. 

<;En que mes estamos ahora? 

Estamos en agosto. 



LESSON XXIII. 

133. Subjunctive in Adverb Clauses. The subjunc- 
tive is used in an adverb clause (i.e., a clause which, like 
an adverb, limits the action of the verb of the main clause) 
which expresses purpose, contingency, uncertainty or action 
in indefinite future time. 

a. Such clauses are generally introduced by a conjunction or 
conjunctive phrase. The commonest of these are: para que, "in 
order that," "so that," aunque, "although," "even if," sin que, "with- 
out," "unless," antes que, "before," luego que, "as soon as," mientras 
que, "while," hasta que, "until," and cuando, "when." 



84 'SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Hablo muy despacio para que Vd. me entienda bien. I speak 
very slowly in order that you may understand me easily. 

Me dijo que iria, ami que su padre no se lo permitiese. He told 
me he should go, even if his father did not permit him to. 

Lo hiso sin que su padre se lo dijese. He did it without his 
father telling him to. 

Repasare el periodico luego que baje al despacho. I shall look 
over the paper as soon as I go down to the sitting room. 

Iremos a visiiarle cuando Vd. qiiiera. We shall go and visit 
him when you wish. 

Qulse lie gar a casa antes que llbvierd. I wanted to get home 
before it rained. 

Remark. Seme of these conjunctions are followed by the indicative 
when the clause they introduce states a fact, or states what took place. 

Nunca estoy amable cuando estoy enfermo. I am never pleasant when 
I am sick. 

Mi padre me castigo luego que entro. My father punished me as soon 
as he came in. 

b. An adverb clause may be introduced by a conjunctive ex- 
pression meaning "however," "whenever," etc. Such are : 

dondequiera que, wherever. cuandoquiera que, whenever. 

comoquiera que, however. quienquiera que, whoever. 

cualquiera cosa que, whatever*. cualquiera (cualesquiera) que, 

por mas* que, however much. whichever. 

Cualquiera cosa que Vd. diga, eso no me paree'e bien What- 
ever you may say, that doesn't seem right to me. 

Dondequiera que vayamos, veremos lo. mismo. Wherever we 
go, we shall see the same thing. 

Por mas que trabaje no puede aprender la leccion. However 
much he may work, he cannot learn the lesson. 

134. Subjunctive in Adjective Clauses. The subjunc- 
tive is used in an adjective clause (i. e., a clause that" is in- 
troduced by a relative and modifies a noun or pronoun of 
the main clause) which qualifies an indefinite expression. 

Busco una casa donde pueda pasar el invierno. I am looking- 
for a house where I can pass the winter. 

Mdndeme Vd. cualquiera libro que no haya Icido. Send me 
any book which I have not read. 

No lea Vd. nhigun libro que no sea bueno. Don't read any 
book that is not gocd. 

A T o conozco a nadie que le enseue a Vd. espahol. I don't know 
anybody who will teach you Spanish. 



* The second part of this expression may be an adverb, an adjective, 
or a noun with its modifier. 

por grande que sea, however big it may be. 

per poco dinero que tenga este hombre, however little money this man 
may have. 



ucsson xxni 85 

135. Indefinite Negative Words. The indefinite neg- 
ative words ninguno, "no," "none," "nobody," "no one/' 
nadie, "nobody,'' "no one," and nada and ninguna cosa, 
"nothing," are found most commonly in connection with a 
negative verb. They are then often translated positively 
"any," "anyone," etc. They are also translated positively 
when they occur in an interrogative sentence which requires 
a negative answer. 

A T o me quiere nadie. Nobody loves me. 

No tengo nada {ninguna cosa) en la mano. I have nothing 
in my hand. 

No iengo ningun libro f ranees. I haven't any French book. 
No digo nada a nadie. I am not saying anything to anybody. 

a. They are translated negatively when they stand first in a 
sentence or clause, and when they stand alone. 

Ninguno de mis amigos es f ranees. No one of my friends is 
French. 

Nadie me quiere. Nobody loves me. 

j Que desea Vd.f Nada. What do you want? Nothing. 

136. Infinitive after Expressions of Quantity. Cer- 
tain expressions of quantity may be followed by que and 
an infinitive. 

nada que comer, nothing to eat. 

algo bueno que decir, something good to say. 

mucho que hacer, much to do. 

poco que comprar, little to buy. 

bastante que escribir, considerable to write. 

137. The Weather. Similar to the use of tener with 
a noun of condition to express physical or mental state 
(see 86), is the use of hacer with a noun to describe the 
weather. 

Race frio. It is cold. Hace calor. It is warm. 

Hacia viento. It was windy. Hace sol. It is sunny. 

j Que tiempo hace? What kind Hace buen tiempo. It is good 

of weather is it? weather. 

Hace un tiempo malo. It is bad Hace mucho* frio. It is very 

weather. cold. 



* Nouns used as above take an adjective modifier, while in the equiva- 
lent English expressions an adverb is used. 



86 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

VOCABULARY. 

absolutamente, adv., absolutely. frio, cold. 

acera, sidewalk. tener frio, to be cold. 

color, m., heat. importante, important. 

tener color, to- be warm. no tor, to notice, note. 

cofdlogo, catalogue. pensar, to think, intend. (R-ch. 

cielo, sky, heaven. I). 

claro, clear, bright, light. pintnra, painting. 

clima, m., climate. Prado, a famous picture-gallery. 

dorse prlsa, to hurry. sierra, saw, mountain-range. 
dentro de, prep., inside of, with- sol, m., sun. 

in, in. al sol, in the sun. 

diferencio, difference. sombra, shadow, shade. 

Estd blen! All right! a la sombra, in the shade. 

extronjero, foreigner (pron. es- iiernpo, weather. 

tranjero). - viento, wind. 

EXERCISE XXIII. 

a. Muchos extranjeros piensan que el clima de Madrid es muy 
malo. En verdad, el clima de Madrid es magnifico. Es cierto que 
en el verano hace mucho calor a mediodia, y que pocas personas- 
se ven en las calles a esta hora ; pero dondequiera que vayamos 
encontraremos lo mismo. Mientras que un cielo tan claro y tan 
azul, no lo vemos en ningun pais. En el invierno hace mucho 
frio a la sombra, pero hace bastante calor al sol. Se nota bien la 
diferencia pasando de una acera a otra. Por la noche hace frio 
a causa de los vientos frios que bajan de la sierra. 

b. <:Tiene Vd. mucho que hacer esta manana? 
Absolutamente nada. Acabo de aprender todas mis lecciones 

para esta tarde, y puedo hacer cualquiera cosa que a Vd. le guste. 

iQuiere Vd. que visitemos al Prado? 

Esta bien. Dentro de algunos minutos estare listo. 

Dese Vd. prisa para que nos volvamos antes que haga demas- 
iado calor. 

I Conoce Vd. alguna tienda donde pueda comprar un catalogo 
de las pinturas del Prado? 

Si ; pero Vd. no necesita ningun catalogo. No hay nadie que 
conozca mejor que yo las pinturas mas importantes, y no hay nada 
que me de tanto gusto como ensenarselas a Vd. 

c. Dos jovenes estaban hablando en el cuarto de uno de ellos. 
Este dijo que acababa de aprender sus lecciones para el dia siguiente, 
y que podia hacer cualquiera cosa que a su amigo le gustara. Se 
dieron prisa para visitar al Prado antes que hiciese demasiado 
calor. El joven dijo que desearia entrar en alguna tienda donde 
pudiese comprar un catalogo. Su amigo le dijo entonces que no 



LESSON XXIV 87 

habia nadie que conociese mejor que el las pinturas del Prado, y 
que por consiguiente no era preciso comprar un catalogo. 

d. ;Cual es el clima de Madrid? 

iQue tiempo hace hoy? 

^Hace frio al sol? m 

I Por que hace frio por la noche en Madrid? 

Por mas que viajemos, ^donde veremos un cielo como este? 

I No conoce Vd. a ningun espanol ? 

<;Tienen algo que hacer los jovenes de esta leccion? 

<;Que piensan hacer? 

iPor que se dan tanta prisa? 

iEn que clase de tienda quiere entrar uno de ellos? 

iEn que clase de tienda queria entrar uno de ellos? 

I Por que no necesita ningun catalogo? 

iNo conoce Vd. ninguna tienda donde pueda comprar un som- 
brero? 

<;Le daria a Vd. mucho gusto ensenarme estas pinturas? 

.jTiene Vd. frio? .iTiene Vd. calor? 



LESSON XXIV. 

SYNOPSIS. 
ARTICLE — (a) in time expressions (132) 

(b) with seasons (131) 
NOUNS — Months, Days and Seasons (131) 
PRONOUNS— Indefinite, negative (135) 
VERB — (a) Regular (1) imperfect subjunctives, forms (125) 

(2) " use (126, 123) 

(3) subjunctive in main clauses (121) 

(4) ' as imperative (122) 

(5) in adverb clauses (133) 

(6) _ in adjective clauses (134) 

(7) infinitive with expressions of quantity (136) 

(b) Irregular (1) present subjunctive of ser, estar, tener, hacer, 
decir, haber (531-534, 542, 543) 

(2) irregular imperfect subjunctives of any verb (127) 

(3) inceptive verbs, conocer (513.) 

(4) salir, venir (541 and 547) 
CONJUNCTIONS— used with subjunctive (133) 
MISCELLANEOUS— Idiomatic, I should like (129) 

weather (137) 

EXERCISE XXIV. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. The Spring months are April, May and 
June. 2. Last year, in the Autumn, I did not feel at all well. 
3. What phrase do we use when we wish to say "good-bye" to a 
friend? 4. How many times have you gone to see the paintings 



88 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

of the Prado? 5. Nothing gives me greater pleasure than to go to 
walk with a friend. 6. The teacher rarely finds mistakes in John's 
exercises. 7. It is always warm at noon in the Puerta del Sol. 
8. Please take a catalogue. 9. Open the windows so that the 
sun may come in. 10. The last time that I went to Spain, I ar- 
rived on the thirteenth of October. 11. The Spaniards always 
sleep with the windows closed, even if it is warm. 12. On arriv- 
ing in Madrid a stranger notices the difference in the climate. 
13. Whatever they may say, it is not true that my son is not 
strong. 14. God be with you. 15. I shall not go to Paris next 
month unless you are willing to go with me. i6 v I should like 
to find some book which would teach me to speak Spanish. 
17. Haven't you anything to do on Thursday? 18. It was fine 
weather last week. 19. If I were in Madrid, I should go to the 
theatre every night. 20. They used to come to my house twice a 
month (per month). 21. The principal theatres of the capital 
are closed. 22. Allow me, Sir, to introduce myself to you. 23. How 
does one greet an acquaintance in the street? 24. If we hurry 
we shall arrive before they open the doors. 25. Is there nobody 
(Isn't there anybody) here who knows you? 26. He said there 
was nobody there who knew him. 27. Excuse me sir. I do not 
understand you very well. Have the kindness to speak more slowly. 
28. However cold it may be in the shade (Por mas calor que haga) 
it is warm in the sun. 29. Day before yesterday was Sunday. 
Consequently, yesterday was Monday, to-day is Tuesday and to- 
morrow will be Wednesday. 30. Come here. I have something 
important to tell you. 31. His mother told him to go out of the 
kitchen and to sit in a chair in the library until she came. 32. We 
regret that you are not satisfied, s^- It seems to me that it is 
very windy. 34. Remember me to John and the rest. 35. Good 
Night ! Come and see me often. 



LESSON XXV. 

138. The simple forms of the regular verb not yet 
learned are the Future Subjunctive and the Imperative. 
These are comparatively little used in ordinary conversation, 
and are included at this point for the sake of completeness, 
and because the student will meet them in his reading. 






139. 





I.KSSOX 


XXV 




iture Subji 


anctive. 




/ 




ENDINGS. 




FIRST CONJ. 




2D 


AND 3D CONJ. 


-are 






-iere 


-ares 






-ieres 


-are 






-iere 


-aremos 






-ieremos 


-areis 






-iereis 


-aren 






-ieren 



so 



Note. The stress is in all forms on the first syllable of the ending. 
Endings are added to the stem of the infinitive. 

140. Use of Future Subjunctive. The future sub- 
junctive is found only in adverb or adjective clauses that 
express future contingency. In its place the present sub- 
junctive is generally used, and the present may be substi- 
tuted for it in all cases except after si, "if." 

Ire manana aunque estuviere (este) enfermo. I shall go to- 
morrow even if I am sick. 

Toma Vd. lo que le dieren (den). Take what they may give 
you. 

Ire si tuviere el dinero. I shall go if I have the money. 

141. Irregular Future Subjunctives. The future 
subjunctive of any irregular verb may be found by substi- 
tuting -re for the final -ron of the past definite, third per- 
son plural. r.. n ,•■ 

1 aijeron, dijere 

sintieron, sintiere 

142. Imperative Mode. The imperative mode has 
but two forms, the second person singular, and the second 
person plural. The endings are added to the stem of the 
infinitive. ENDINGS. 

FIRST CONJ. 2D CONJ. 3D CONJ. 

-a -e -e 

-ad -ed -id 

Adding these endings to stems of regular verbs, we get : 

trabaja responde escribe 

trabajad responded escribid 

Note. The stress is on the stem in the singular, and on the ending 
in the plural. The second plural of the third conjugation is one of the four 
forms in which this conjugation differs in ending from the second conjuga- 
tion. What are the other three? 



90 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

143. Orthographical Changing Verbs. Learn 505- 
508 and 522 b, and apply the principles learned to coger, 
cruzar, dirigir and seguir of this lesson. 

144. Irregular verb saber, "to know." Learn 540. 
Saber means "to know" by mental process, to possess as 
knowledge. It may also mean "to know- about," and with 
a dependent infinitive "to know how." 

Juan no sabe la lection. John does not know the lesson. 

Se que Juan no estudia bast ante. I know that John doesn't 
study enough. 

Mi madre lo supo ayer. Mother learned about it yesterday. 

No se hablar espanol. I don't know how to speak Spanish. 

a. Conocer, contrasted with saber, means "to know" by the 
senses, "to be acquainted with," "to* make the acquaintance of," and 
"to recognise." 

jNo conoce Vd. a Juan Sudres f Don't you know John Suarez? 

Si; le conoci el ano pasado en Paris. Yes, I made his ac- 
quaintance last year in Paris. 

La conocimos en seguida. We recognized her at once. 

i Conoce Vd. este librof Are you familiar with this book? 

145. Cardinal Points. The cardinal points are el 
Norte, "North," el Sur, "South," el Este, "East," el Oeste, 
"West." They must be accompanied by the masculine defi- 
nite article. 

146. Distance. Distance is idiomatically expressed by 

the third person singular of haber, impersonally used.* 

jCudnto hay desde aqui a la escuelaf How far is it from here 
to the school ? 

No hay mucho, or No hay mucha distancia. It is not far. 

147. Cualquiera, plural cualesquiera, "any whatever," 
is both pronoun and adjective. Used as an adjective be- 
fore its noun it may drop the final a. 

Cualquier (a) cafe. Any Cafe. 
Cualesqnicr (a) libros. Any books at all. 
Cualquiera de los libros. Any one of the books. 



* Any third person singular of haber may be used impersonally, but no 
tense except the present has a special impersonal form. 



LESSON XXV 91 

a. It may be used after a singular adjective preceded by the 
indefinite article. 

U11 hombre cualquiera podria hacerlo. Any man might do it. 

b. It is not used in negative sentences. 

No tengo libros, or No tengo ningunos libros. I have no books. 

148. Agradecer, "to thank/' takes as direct object that 
for which thanks are given, and as indirect object the per- 
son to whom thanks are given. Conjugated like conocer 
(see 513). 

he agradezco tnucho su amabilidad. Thank you very much for 
your kindness. 

VOCABULARY. 

coche, m., carriage, cab. isquierdo, left. 

en coche, in a cab. a la tzquierda, on the left, to 

cochero, coachman, cabman. the left. 

coger, to catch. lado, side. 

cruzar, to cross. al otro lado, on the other side. 

derecho, right. lo menos, or a lo menos, adv., 

a la derecha, on the right, to at least, 

the right. llegada, arrival. 

jde que mo do? how? (manner). lie gar a, to get to, reach. 

directo, straight. por aqui, this way (lit. through 

dirigirse a, to address, to go here). 

towards. por donde? what way, how (lit. 

distancia, distance. through where?) 

esquina, corner (of a street). punto, point, place. 

estacion, f., station, season. salida, departure. - 

ferrocarril, m., railroad. sallffXo leave. 

gnia, f., guide. seguir, to follow, continue, go 

gnia de ferrocarriles, railroad on, keep on (R-ch. III). 

guide, time-table. seguro, safe, sure. 

infinito, adv., infinitely, very tranzia, m., street-car. 

much. en tranvia, in a car. 
ir bien para, to be on the right 

road to. 

EXERCISE XXV. 

a. Caballero, <;me haria Vd. el favor de decirme por donde se 
va a la estacion del Este? (or de dirigirme a la estacion?) 

Siento mucho no poder hacerlo. Me parece que esta calle va 
directa a la estacion, pero no estoy seguro. Soy tambien extranjero 
y no conozco muy bien la ciudad. Preguntelo Vd. a aquel cochero. 

Cochero, ^me hace Vd. el favor de indicarme si voy bien para e 
la estacion del Este (or, de decirme donde esta la estacion? or de 
decirme si se va por aqui a la estacion?) 



Q2 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Si seiior. Siga Vd. esta calle hasta la primera calle que la 
cruce, vuelva la esquina a la derecha, y siga hasta la estacion. 

iCuanto hay de aqui? ^Cuanto tiempo necesito (se necesita) 
para ir (llegar) alia? 

Hay bastante distancia. Necesita Vd. media hora lo menos; 
pero si Vd. quiere subir en mi coche, le llevare alia dentro de 
algunos minutos. 

No tengo prisa y prefiero ir a pie. Le agradezco a Vd. infinite) ■ 
su amabilidad. 

No hay de que. 

b. i Sabe Vd. si el tren para Paris sale de v la estacion del 
Norte ? 

No senor. Sale de la estacion del Este, que esta al otro lado 
de la ciudad. 

I Sabe Vd. la hora de la salida del tren de la noche? 

No senor; pero en cualquier (a) cafe se puede ver una Guia de 
Ferrocarriles. En ella hallara Vd. la hora de la salida y de la llegada 
de cualquier (a) tren. 

c. Cuando una persona que no conoce bien la ciudad desea 
llegar a (dirigirse a) un punto cualquiera, <ja quien se dirige? 

No sabiendo por donde ir a cualquier (a) punto, <:a quien se 
dirigiria Vd. ? 

«;De que modo iria Vd. ? ^Tomaria Vd. un coche? 

<jCuantas estaciones hay en esta ciudad? ^Cuales son? 

«:Se puede llegar por esta calle a la estacion? 

<jNo hay tranvia que pase delante de la puerta? 

iCuantas calles cruzamos antes de llegar alia? 

Al llegar a la esquina de la calle de Sevilla <;nos volvemos a 
la derecha? 

I Se puede ir alia a pie, 6 es preciso ir en coche? 

I No hay ningun libro que de la hora de la llegada de los 
trenes que vienen de Paris? 

I Se puede coger el tranvia aqui ?» 

iCuales son las cuatro estaciones del ano? 

<;No hay nadie en esta clase que sepa responder en espafiol? 



tESSON xxvi 93 



LESSON XXVI. 

149. Subjunctive in Object Clauses. The subjunc- 
tive is used in a clause that stands as object of a verb that 
expresses doubt, disbelief or uncertainty, or which ques- 
tions the statement contained in the object clause. 

Dudo que mi padre llcgue esta noche. I doubt whether my 
father will arrive to-night. 

jCree Vd. que este hombre sea tan sabio como se piensaf Do 
you think this man is as learned as is believed? 

No creo que lo sea. I do not think he is. 

a. Verbs that express belief may be followed by the indicative, 
or if the subject is the same for the main and the dependent verb. 
by the infinitive. 

Creo que es muy sabio. I think that he is very learned. 

Cree ser sabio pero no lo es. He thinks he is learned but he is 
not. 

150. Verbs meaning "to ask" and "to buy" take as 
direct object the thing asked or bought, and as indirect ob- 
ject the person of whom the thing is asked or bought. 

jA qui en com pro Vd. la casa? Of whom did you buy the 
house? 

La compre al Sr. Fernandez. I bought it of Mr. Fernandez. 

La nina pidio un favor a su amigo. The girl asked a favor of 
her friend. 

Me pidio un favor. She asked me a favor. 

Le voy a preguntar algo a Juan. I am going to ask John some- 
thing. 

Le suplico que no lo haga. I beg you not to do it. 

151. Uno, -a, -os, -as. Uno may be used as an in-' 
definite pronoun or adjective. In the singular it may be 
used impersonally. The plural may be used, like algunos, 
to mean "some few," while before a numeral it expresses 
an approximate number. 

j No puede uno entrarf May one not come in? 

Ten go unos libros muy inter esantes. I have a few interesting 
books. 

El billete costard unos siete pesetas. The ticket will cost some 
seven pesetas. 



94 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

152. Use of Definite Article. The definite article is 
used before a singular noun used in a general sense to rep- 
resent a class, or before a plural, noun used inclusively for 
the whole class. 

El hombre tiene que morir. Man must die. 
Me gust an las Hores. I like flowers. 

a. Similarly, the article is required before an abstract noun 
used in a general way. 

La vida es corta. Life is short. 

b. Similarly, the masculine definite article is found before an 
infinitive used in a general way as the name of an act, particularly 
when subject or predicate. The infinitive is then equivalent to the 
English verbal noun in -ing. 

El v'wir es barato en Espana. Living is cheap in Spain. 

153. Demonstratives as correlatives. Used as cor- 
relatives, este means "the former, and aquel means "the 
latter." 

Tengo dos libros en espanol; un libro de lectura y un libro de 
gramdtica; este es dificil, pero aquel es fdcil. 

154. Definite Article used for Personal and Demon- 
strative Pronoun. A personal pronoun or a demonstrative 
pronoun is seldom found before de or relative que. In 
their place the definite article is used (el de, la de, los de, 
las de, and el que, la que, los que, las que). When so 
used the article may contract in the regular way with a 
or de. 

La del sombrero azul. She of the blue hat. 

Los de Madrid y los de Paris. Those of Madrid and those of 
Paris. 

El muchacho que estudia y los que no estudian. The boy who 
studies and those who do not study. 

La que estudia mucho aprende mucho. She who studies hard 
learns a great deal. 

Los que Vd. me did ayer. Those you gave me yesterday. 

Mi casa y la de mi amigo. My house and that of my friend. 

Remark. Similar to this use of the article is its substitution for the 
possessive pronoun of the third person (see 53). 
Mi casa y la de el. My house and his. 

155. Adverbs in -mente. The largest class of adverbs 
consists of those ending in -mente. These may be formed 



LKSSOX XXVI 



95 



at will from adjectives, by adding -mente to the feminine 

singular.* 

complete, completamente; complete, completely. 
fuerte, fuertemente; strong, strongly. 
verdadero, v erdader anient e ; true, truly. 

a. If the adjective has a written accent, it must be retained 
in the derived adverb. 

fdcil, fdcilmente ; easy, easily. 



VOCABULARY. 



acerca de, prep., concerning. 

aprovecharse de, to avail oneself 
of. 

billete, m., ticket. 

caro, dear, expensive. 

calcntado, heated. 

coche, car (of a passenger 
train). 

comfortable, comfortable. 

comodidad, {., convenience, com- 
fort. N , 

corresponder, to correspond. 

co star, to cost (R-ch. I). 

creer, to believe, think (see 511). 

dudar, to doubt. 

en cnanto a, prep., as for. 

entre, prep., among, between. 

equipaje, m., baggage. 

hotel, m., hotel. 

igual, equal. 

informe, m., information (gen- 
erally used in plural). 

kilogramo, kilogram. 

EXERCISE XXVI. 

a. El afio que viene (proximo) pienso ir a Espana, y creo que 
Vd. puede darme los informes que necesito acerca de mi viaje. 

Si en algo puedo servirle, seria un verdadero placer para mi el 
hacerlo. 

Es Vd. muy amable y voy a aprovecharme de su amabilidad. 
Primero, quisiera saber si es mas barato el viajar en Espana que 
aqui. 

No creo que (Dudo que) haya mucha diferencia. El ir en 



libre, free. 

male t a, traveling-bag. 

mania de viaje, steamer-rug. 

mayor parte {de) , greater part, 

majority, most (of). 
mediant e, prep., by means of, 

for. 
111020, porter. 
natural, m. or f., native. 
pedir, to request, ask (R-ch. 

in). 

peseta, Spanish monetary unit, 

about 20c. 
peso, weight. 
placer, m., pleasure. 
por, prep., by. 
precio, price. 

scgun, conj., according as. *~""^ 
segundo, second. 
trans por tar, to transport, carry. 
vida, life. 
viaje, m., trip, voyage, journey. 



* Adverbs so formed will not be included from now in the vocabularies. 
The parent adjective, if unfamiliar, will be given instead. 



96 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

coche de tin punto a otro es mas barato, porque mediante una peseta 
y media le llevan a uno a cualquiera parte de la ciudad. El vivir 
(La vida) en los mejores hoteles cuesta igualmente caro, mientras 
que el viajar por tren es mas caro 6 mas barato segun se toma 
(compra) billetes de primera, de segunda 6 de tercera clase. 

iQue diferencia hay (Cual es la diferencia) entre estas tres 
clases de billetes? 

La diferencia del precio corresponde a la diferencia de la como- 
didad de las coches. Los de primera son tan buenos como los de 
cualquier pais, y en ellos viajan muchos extranjeros. En cuanto 
a los de tercera y de segunda, aquellos son bastante malos y estos 
muy comfortables, pero no estan calentados en el invierno. En los 
coches de tercera y en los de segunda viajan la mayor parte de los 
naturales, los extranjeros que viajan con poco dinero, y los que 
desean ver la verdadera vida espahola. 

I Cuanto peso de equipaje se transporta libre? 

Treinta kilogramos solamente. Pero es muy posible, viajando 
solo, pasar tin par de meses en Espafia sin mas equipaje que dos 
maletas y una manta de viaje. Estas cosas las puede uno llevar 
consigo en el coche. 

b. 1 Puede Vd. dirigirme al despacho de billetes? 
Alii esta, al otro lado de la estacion. 

Mozo, lleve Vd. estas cosas al despacho de equipajes. 
Deme Vd. tin billete de tercera clase para Sevilla (or, more 
simply, Sevilla, tercera). 

lA que hora sale el tren? 

c. iDonde piensa ir este caballero el afio que viene? 
I A quien pide los informes que necesita? 

iAcerca de que necesita informes? 

iQue le contesta su amigo cuando le pide informes? 

iQue desea saber primero? 

I Se lo puede decir su amigo? 

iComo es que su amigo sabe tanto acerca de la vida espafiola? 

I Cree Vd. que sea mas barato el vivir en Espafia que aqui ? 

<: Cuanto cuesta el ir en coche de una estacion a otra? 

<jEs cara la vida en los mejores hoteles de Madrid? 

iCuantas clases de coches tienen los trenes espanoles? 

I A que corresponde la diferencia del precio de los billetes? 

<;Son mas comfortables los coches de segunda 6 los de tercera? 

iEn cuales de los coches viajan los naturales? 

r ; Cuanto equipaje se necesita para viajar solo en Espafia? 






lesson xxvn 97 



LESSON XXVII. 

156. Cardinal Numerals. Review 39 and 87. 

cuarenta 40 quinientos, -as 500 

cincuenta 50 seiscientos, -as 600 

sesenta 60 setecientos, -as 700 

setenta 70 ochocientos, -as 800 

ochenta 80 novecientos, -as goo 

noventa 90 m & I J ° 00 

ciento, cien 100 dos mil 2,000 

doscientos, -as 200 cien mil 100,000 

trescientos, -as 300 un millon 1,000,000 

cuatrocientos, -as 400 dos millones 2,000,000 

a. Ciento becomes cien when it stands before a descriptive ad- 
jective, a noun or mil. 

Cien hombres, a. hundred men. 

b. Mil is an adjective and millon is a noun. 

c. Of the hundreds, 500, 700 and 900 are irregularly formed. 

d. The following compound numbers will serve as types. 

ciento (y) nueve 109 cuatrocientos cuarenta y 

ciento (y) veinte 120 siete 447 

ciento veinte y uno 121 mil novecientos (y) nueve 1909 

ciento setenta y cuatro mil, seiscientos noventa y ocho 174,698 

e. The cardinals are o'ften used where the ordinals might be 
used in English, to give the number of a page, volume, century, etc. 
This is also true of days of the month, excepting the first, which 
is el primer 0. 

La leccion quince de la gramdtica. The fifteenth lesson of the 
grammar. 

El dia cinco de marzo. The 5th day of March. 

157. Relative Pronouns. The most commonly used 
of the relatives is que, which is invariable. It relates to 
persons or things, and is subject or object of a verb, and 
when relating to things may be the object. of the preposi- 
tions a, de, en, or con. 

Un libro que me interesa. A book which interests me. 

El hombre que me visit 6. The man who visited me. 

La casa que he comprado. The house which I have bought. 



98 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Las senoras que visile ayer. The ladies whom I visited yes- 
terday. 

La escuela de que le liable. The school about which I spoke 
to you.* 

158. Quien, quienes. The relatives quien, quienes, 
"who," relate to persons only, and are used instead of que 
as follows : 

o. With a to form the objective case. 
. Un hombre a quien conozco. A man whom I know. 

b. In general after monosyllabic prepositions. 

La seiiora con quien estaba hablando. The lady with whom I 
was talking. 

c. To take the place of y and a pronoun, in introducing a 
clause of equal value with the preceding one. 

Hoy encontre a Juan, quien (y el) me dijo que no estd bueno. 
To-day I met John, who (and he) told me he is not well. 

d. In literary texts and proverbs chiefly, to include the ante- 
cedent. 

Quien da luego da dos veces. He who gives promptly, gives 
doubly. 

159. El que (la que, los que, las que) and el cual 
(la cual, los cuales, las cuales). These relatives may refer 
to persons or things, and because of their complete inflec- 
tion are chiefly valuable as substitutes for que and quien 
to avoid possible ambiguity in cases where the relative is 
separated from its antecedent. 

Estudio la gramdtica de Salvd, la cual (la que) es nitty buena. 
I am studying Salva's grammar, which is a very good one. 

a. They are also used for euphony after the longer preposi- 
tions and after a comma. 

El talon mediante el cual (el que) recogi el equipaje. The 
check by means of which I claimed the baggage. 

Me gust a via jar en los trenes americanos, los cuales son muy 
comfortables. I like to travel in the American trains, which are 
very comfortable. 



* Such a sen.tence as "The school I spoke to you about" would be 
impossible in Spanish, because (1) the relative is never omitted, and (2) the 
preposition which governs a relative must precede it. 



wesson xxvn 99 

160. Lo que and lo cual. These are the neuter rela- 
tives, and they relate to a whole clause. 

Maria cstd muy enferma, lo que (lo cual) siento muchisimo. 
Mary is very sick, (a matter) which I am very sorry for. 

161. Causative Construction. The verb hacer is 
used, like the English "to make/' "to have," "to get," with 
causative force. It is followed by the infinitive, or by que 
and a subjunctive object clause. 

Haga Vd. entrar al mno. Make the child come in. 

Juan se hiso llamar a las siete. John had himself called at 
seven. 

Juan hiso que le llamas en a las siete. John had them call him 
at seven. 

Voy a hacer pesar el equipaje. I am going to have the baggage 
weighed. 

Hare que Juan le llame temprano. I shall have John call him 
early. 

a. Mandar, "to order," is similarly used. 
He mandado hacer un traje. I have ordered a suit made. 
He mandado que me hagan un traje. I have ordered them to 
make me a suit. 

162. Object Pronouns used impersonally. The ob- 
ject pronouns le, la, los, las, are often used as indefinite 
pronouns with the meaning of "some/' "any," "one," to 
avoid repetition of the noun. 

j No hay biblioteca en esta casaf Si, la hay. Is there no li- 
brary in this house? Yes there is one. 

Quisiera comprar un haul si Vd. los tiene fuertes. I should 
like to buy a trunk if you have any strong ones. 

163. Idiomatic. Haber. Hay, and the other third 
persons singular of the various tenses of haber may be used 
with que and an infinitive, to express impersonal obliga- 
tion. 

Hay que estar en casa a las dies. It is necessary to be at home 
at ten o'clock. 

Habia que estudiar mucho. One had to study hard. 

a. Haber with de and an infinitive expresses a mild sort of 
obligation or expectation. 



100 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

He de ir con el. I am (expect to) go with him. 

j Que hemos de hacer ahoraf What are we to do now? 

Remark. Contrast with the above the personal expression of obliga- 
tion by tener que. 

Tengo que estar alii temprano. I must be there early. 

164. Is it not? The expressions «iNo es verdad? 
iVerdad? alone, or iNo? alone are used when seeking con- 
firmation of a statement. The English translation depends 
upon the statement. 

Race buen tiempo. gVerdadf It is fine weather, isn't it? 

Usted es espahol, jVerdad? You are a Spaniard, are you not? 

Vd. acaba de llegar, jNof You just came, didn't you? 

VOCABULARY. 

aduana, custom-house. gratia, grace. 

ancho, wide, broad. Inglaterra, England. 

aqui tiene Vd., here is. Italia, Italy. 

ayudar, to help. lialiano, Italian. 

banco, bank. madrileno , of Madrid. 

billete de banco, bank-note. moneda, money, coin. 

baul, m., trunk. paquete, m., package. 

bulto, piece (of baggage, etc.). parar, to stop. 

caja, box. pagar, to pay (see 507). 

cambiar, to change. pesar, to weigh. 

• cambiar de tren, to change registrar, to examined 

cars. sacar, to remove, take out. (See 

compahero, companion. 507.) 

conocimiento, knowledge. sobre, prep., above. 
exceso, excess (pron., esceso). sobre todo, adv., particularly, 

facturar, to check. especially. 

Francia, France. tarjeta, card. 

frontera, frontier. talon, m., check, stub. 

fuera de, prep., aside from, out- vnelia, return, change, 
side of. 

EXERCISE XXVII. 

a. Llame Vd. un mozo que lleve sus cosas al despacho de 
equipajes, mientras que Vd. esta comprando el billete en el despacho 
de billetes. Despues vaya Vd. con el billete para hacer facturar el 
baul. Es posible que tenga Vd. que pagar exceso. Si le hay, pague 
Vd. lo que debe, y le daran a Vd. un talon, mediante el cual (el 
que) puede sacar el equipaje a su llegada a Sevilla. 

b. iMe hace Vd. el favor de facturar este baul y esta caja? 
«;No tiene Vd. mas bultos que estos dos? Esos paquetes, <:quiere 
Vd. que los facture tambien? 



LESSON XXVII IOI 

No; los voy a llevar conmigo en el tren. <;Hay exceso? 

Bastante. Estos dos bultos pesan ciento y seis kilogramos. 

iCuanto hay que pagar? 

Cuarenta y dos pesetas. 

I Puede Vd. cambiarme este billete de banco de cien pesetas ? 

Aqui tiene Vd. la vnelta y el talon. 

Cincuenta y ocho pesetas. Esta bien. 

c. <jHa estado Vd. muchas veces en Espana? 

Esta es la segunda vez ; pero fuera de Espana he viajado mucho 
en Europa, sobre todo en Italia e Inglaterra.* 

<;C6mo es que Vd. habla tan bien el espafiol? 

He tenido muy buenos maestros, y mi conocimiento del italiano, 
el cual hablo perfectamente, me ha ayudado a aprender el espanol. 

<;De que pais es Vd. ? 

Soy Americano del Norte. Y Vd. es espanol, iverdad? 

Espanol y madrileno. Permitame que me presente a Vd. Aqui 
tiene mi tarjeta. Y <;cual es su gracia de Vd. ? {Polite way of 
asking a stranger's name.) 

Me llamo John Brown, para servir a Vd. Siento no tener tar- 
jetas. Tengo mucho gusto en conocerle y en tenerle por compafiero 
de viaje. iSabe Vd. a que hora llegaremos a la frontera, y si hay 
que cambiar de tren? 

Llegaremos a la una, y tenemos que cambiar de tren porque 
los treries espafioles no pueden pasar la frontera, siendo mas anchos 
los ferrocarriles espafioles que los franceses, y tambien es preciso 
que bajemos para que los empleados de la aduana puedan registrar 
el equipaje. 

iCuanto tiempo paramos alii? 

Bastante tiempo para comer y para cambiar nuestra moneda 
espafiola por francesa. 

d. iDonde se facturan los equipajes? 

En los ferrocarriles espafioles, ipor que es preciso muchas veces 
pagar exceso? 

iCon que (Mediante que) sacamos nuestro equipaje al ter- 
minar el viaje? 

Si un billete nos cuesta dieciocho pesetas, «;cual es la vuelta de 
un billete de banco de cincuenta pesetas ? 

iCuales son las lenguas que nos ayudan a aprender el espanol? 

^;C6mo se llaman los naturales de America del Norte? <;de 
Madrid? 

iComo se llaman las personas con quienes (las cuales) via- 
jamos? 



* Y becomes e before a word beginning with i or hi, unless these form 
part of the diphthong ie (hie). 



102 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

iQue frase empleamos para preguntar cortesmente a un hombre 
como se llama? 

I Por que no pueden los trenes franceses pasar la f rontera de 
Espafia? 

I Por que hay que bajar del tren en la f rontera? 

iQue capitulo estudiamos? 

iHay muchachas en la clase? 



LESSON XXVIII. 



SYNOPSIS. 

ARTICLE — definite, (a) used with (i) cardinal points (145) 

(2) nouns used in general sense (152) 

(3) abstract nouns (152 a) 

(4) infinitives used as nouns (152 b) 

(b) used for personal or demonstrative pronouns (164) 

ADJECTIVES— numeral, cardinal (156) 

used for ordinals (156 e) 
PRONOUNS — (a) personal, object forms used impersonally (162) 

(b) demonstratives as correlatives (153) 

(c) relative, que (157), quien (158), el que, el cual (159) 

lo que, lo cual (160) 

(d) indefinite, cualquiera (147), uno (151) 
VERBS — Regular (a) future subjunctive (139) 

(b) imperative mode (142) 
Irregular (a) future subjunctive (141) 

(b) orthographical changing (505-508, 522 b) 

(c) saber (540) 

Use (a) future subjunctive (14c) 

(b) saber and conocer contrasted (144) 

(c) subjunctive with verbs of doubting (149) 

(d) " " " ordering (161) 

(e) idiomatic uses of haber (146, 163) 

(f) verbs of asking, etc. (150) 

(g) agradecer (148) 
ADVERBS in -mente (155) 
MISCELLANEOUS— Cardinal points (145) 

Distance (146) 
Is it not? (164) 

EXERCISE XXVIII. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. What happened in 1492? 2. We travel 
on the railroad by means of a ticket which we buy in the ticket 
office. 3. It is necessary to buy a ticket before having the baggage 
checked, is it not? 4. He did not think that I weighed as much 
as he. 5. Unfortunately, not knowing how to cook, I was not able 
to avail myself of the kitchen. 6. Wherever we may travel, we 



ii 



LESSON XXIX IO3 

shall find pleasant people. 7. The Northern Station is near by. 
8. The idea! I doubt whether (que) it is possible. 9. How far 
is it from here to that mountain-range yonder? The distance is 
not great 10. Are there beautiful views in North America? Yes, 
there are. n. The excess which we pay corresponds to the weight 
of the trunk. 12. In the Bank of Spain there are millions of 
pesetas in bank-notes and in coin. 13. The best hotels of England 
are very comfortable and equal to those of any country in Europe. 
14. My traveling companion and I left New York on Friday, the 
30th day of July, and reached Italy the following Friday. 15. When 
one has absolutely no knowledge of the language of the country 
where one is traveling, it is difficult to ask the natives for infor- 
mation. 16. As for my voyage, and my life after my arrival there, 
they were without novelty. 17. What I don't like is the changing 
cars and the examining of the baggage at the frontier. 18. This 
is the broadest street in the city; consequently it is called Broad 
Street. 19. Not knowing what way to go, I addressed a cabman, 
who told me to keep on through this street as far as Broad Street. 

20. When you get to the corner of State Street, turn to the left. 

21. Let us catch this street-car. 22. In most cafes one may find 
a Railway Guide. 23. The employee of the customs opened the 
box, in which he found what he was looking for. 24. Which 
way? This way. 25. There are two doors, one on the right and 
the other on the left. The former opens into the kitchen, while 
the latter opens into the sitting-room. 26. Fifty trains at least 
leave this station every day. 27. We shall give our traveling-bags 
and packages to the porter, who will take them to the baggage- 
room. 28. Carriages, street-cars and trains serve to (para) carry 
people from one point to another. 29. You should order a new 
suit made at once. 



LESSON XXIX. 

165. Clauses depending on Prepositions. Certain 
words whose meaning, both in English and Spanish, is com- 
pleted by a preposition, may retain this preposition in Span- 
ish even before a clause. Note the following: 

Estoy seguro de ello. I am sure of it. 

Bstoy seguro de que vendrd. I am sure that he will come. 

Me alegro de ello. I am glad of it. 



104 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Me alegro de que su madre este major de salad. I am glad your 
mother is better. 

Insistio en ello. He insisted on it. 

Insistio en que fuesemos. He insisted that we should' go. 

166. Verbs with Subjunctive or Infinitive. Preferir, 

alegrarse de and insistir en, "to insist/' are followed by an 

object clause with verb in the subjunctive if there is a 

change of subject, and by an infinitive if there is no change 

of subject. 

Prefiero ir. I prefer to go. 

Prefiero que Vd. vaya. I prefer that you should go (to have 
you go). 

Insisto en entrar. I insist on coming in. 

Insistire en que entren. I shall insist on their coming in. 

Me alegro de verle. I am glad to see you. 

Me alegre de que estuviesemos alii. I was glad we were there. 

a. Aconsejar, "to advise," is followed by the subjunctive or 
the infinitive. 

Me aconsejo ir (que fuese) temprano. He advised me to go 
early. 

b. Dejar, permitir and prohibir are often found with the in- 
finitive, despite the general statement in 101 a. 

Dejeme Vd. ir. Let me go. 

167. Possessive Adjectives. In addition to the forms 
of the possessive adjectives already given, there is a series 
of longer forms, more rarely used. These long forms are 
merely the possessive pronouns without the article (mio, 
tuyo, suyo, nuestro, vuestro). They always follow their 
noun, and are used : 

a. In direct address : 
Amigo mip. My friend. 

b. When the noun modified is preceded by some indefinite 
word like un cierto, algunos, muchos, etc. This is equivalent to 
saying that they are used where in English we would use the forms 
"of mine," "of his," etc. 

Un amigo nuestro. A friend of ours. 

Muchos conocidos suyos. Many acquaintances of his. 

168. Parecer and hacer falta. Parecer, "to seem," 
and hacer falta, "to make a lack/' are idiomatically trans- 



LESSON XXIX I05 

lated "to think" and "to need.''' When so used they require 
an indirect object. For parecer see 513. 

Me parece que no est a fuerte. I think that he is not strong. 

gNo le parecen hermosas estas pinturasf Don't you think 
these paintings are beautiful? 

I Que le parece I What do you think! 

jQue le hace falta? What do you need? 

Me hace falta diner o. I need money. 

a. Parecer (like creer and pcnsar) may take the subjunctive 
when used interrogatively or negative^. 

the parece que vayamos? Do you think we should go? 
No me parece que sea fuerte. I don't think he is strong. 

169. Possessive Construction with Article and In- 
direct Object. It was stated in 89 that the definite article 
is often substituted for a possessive. In many such cases 
the possessor is expressed as indirect object of the verb. 
This indirect object may be a pronoun, a noun, or a double 
object construction with both noun and pronoun. 

Me puse el sombrero. I put on my hat. 

El em plead me registro el equipaje. The employee examined 
my baggage. 

Puse el sombrero al nino. I put on the child's hat for him. 

El medico le tomo el pulso al maestro. The doctor felt the 
teacher's pulse. 

170. Poner, "to put," "place," "set," "put on." See 

538. 

a. Poner used reflexively may mean "to become," "to get." 
La nina se puso enferma. The child became (got) sick. 

171. Tal, ta les, "su ch," "such a." This adjective-pro- 
noun is never followed by the indefinite article. Preceded 
by the indefinite article it means "a certain." 

Me lo dijo un tal Suarez. A certain Suarez told me so. 
No creo tal cosa. I don't believe any such thing. 

a. Preceded by the definite article tal is equivalent to a de- 
monstrative. 

El tal Fernandez llegard manana. That (mentioned) Fernandez 
will arrive to-morrow. 

b. In questions que tal is equivalent to como. 

jQue tal sigue Vd.f or simply, jQue tal? How are you getting 
along? 



io6 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



171 A. Idiomatic. 

cambiar de traje, to change 

clothes. - 
pensar en, to think about. 
ahora mismo, this very minute. 
de prim era clase, first class. 
/No faltaba mas! The idea! 



a tiempo, on time. 
actualmente, at the present time. 
hoy mismo, this very day. 
tener sed, to be thirsty. 
jHombre! Man alive! 



en este momento, en el momento actual, at the present time. 
Faltan cinco minutos para las siete. It is five minutes to seven. 
con cinco minutos de anticipacion, five minutes early. 
con cinco minutos de retraso, five minutes late. 



VOCABULARY. 



actual, present. 
afortunado, fortunate. 
algo, adv., somewhat. 
Alemania, Germany. 
amo, -a, proprietor. 
calendario, calendar. 
cruz, f., cross. 

I cuanto I How, how much! 
cuanto antes, as soon as possi- 
ble. 
estancia, stay. 
falta, lack, fault. 
faltar, to lack. 
gab an, m., overcoat. 



gasto, expense. 
hacia, prep., towards. 
huesped, -a, host, guest. 

casa de hucspedes, boarding- 
house. 
lavar (se) , to wash. 
n timer o, number. 
omnibus, omnibus.* 
restaurdn, m., restaurant. 
sed, f., thirst. 
tele grama, m., telegram. 
vapor, m., steam, steamer. 

por vapor, by boat. 
vaso, glass. 



EXERCISE XXIX. 

a. Jose acaba de recibir un telegrama de un amigo suyo, un 
tal Sr. Brown que conocio el afio pasado en America. El tal amigo 
ha venido por vapor desde los Estados Unidos, y pasando por 
Alemania y Francia, llegara a Madrid el veintisiete del mes actual, 
a las nueve de la mafiana. Mirando el calendario Jose nota que 
hoy mismo es el dia en que su amigo ha de llegar. Sacando el 
reloj ve que faltan solamente doce minutos para las nueve. Se 
pone el sombrero y el gaban y sale corriendo hacia la estacion. 
Afortunadamente el tren llega con cinco minutos de retraso, y Juan 
llega a tiempo para recibir a su amigo. 

b. \ Cuanto me alegro de verle, D. Eduardo ! Dejeme llevar 
la maleta. iQue tal paso Vd. el viaje? 



' Nouns ending in s in the singular, have the same form for the plural. 



LESSON XXIX IO7 

i/Muy bien, pero me hallo algo cansado. ^Ha tenido Vd. que 
esperar mncho tiempo? 

Acabo de llegar ahora mismo. 1 No tiene Vd. hambre ? 

Si, y sobre todo mucha sed. Vamos a buscar un vaso de agua. 

iNo quiere Vd. comer algo en el restauran de la estacion? 

Prefiero ir (que vayamos) cuanto antes al hotel, porque deseo 
lavarme y cambiarme de traje antes de comer. <;Cual es el mejor 
hotel ? 

Hay tres 6 cuatro igualmente buenos. Se dice que el Hotel 
de Paris es de primera clase, pero yo le aconsejo ir (que vaya) 
a una casa de huespedes. Hay una muy buena en la calle de la 
Cruz, numero veinte. Conozco muy bien al amo, y estoy seguro 
de que le tratara muy bien a Vd. Un primo mio vive en la misma 
casa. 

I Por que me aconseja Vd. ir a una casa de huespedes? 

Porque el gasto no es tan grande como en los hoteles. 

<jTomamos un omnibus? 

Sera mas facil coger (tomar) el tranvia que pasa delante de 
la puerta. Despues de sacar su equipaje iremos juntos a la casa 
de huespedes, y le presentare al amo. Si no fuera que mi madre 
esta enferma en este momento, insistiria en que Vd. pasara en mi 
casa los dias de su estancia en Madrid. 

I Hombre, no faltaba mas! No piense Vd. en tal cosa. En la 
casa de huespedes estare perfectamente. Espero que su sefiora 
madre se ponga buena en seguida, y que tenga pronto el gusto de 
conocerla. 

c. <:De quien ha recibido Jose un telegrama? 

iDonde conocio Juan al tal amigo? 

I Por cuales paises ha pasado el tal Brown antes de venir a 
Espana? 

iComo sabe Jose que su amigo va a llegar hoy mismo? 

iQue se pone antes de salir? 

iLlega a tiempo el tren? 

^De que se alegra tanto D. Jose? 

iQue le pregunta Juan a su amigo? 

<;Que desea sobre todo su amigo? 

iQue desea hacer antes de comer? 

iCual es uno de los mejores hoteles de Madrid? 

iPor que aconseja Jose a su amigo que no vaya a ningun 
hotel ? 

iComo sabe Jose que la casa de huespedes que esta en la calle 
de la Cruz es buena? 

I Por que no insiste Jose en que su amigo pase algunos dias en 
su casa? 



I08 SPANISH GRAMMAR 



LESSON XXX. 

172. Compound Tenses of the Subjunctive. The 

perfect, the two pluperfects and the future perfect of the 
subjunctive, are formed respectively with the help of the 
present, the imperfects and the future of the subjunctive 
of haber. Their use presents no difficulty. They are used 
in dependent clauses to translate the English perfect, plu- 
perfect and future perfect indicative. (See 502.) 

a. The perfect subjunctive follows the same tenses of the 
main clause as the present subjunctive, but it expresses time an- 
terior to that of the verb in the main clause. 

Siento que ella no hay a venido todavia. I am sorry she has 
not come yet. 

b. The pluperfect subjunctives follow the same tenses of the 
main clause as the imperfect subjunctives, but they express time 
anterior to that of the verb of the main clause. 

Senti que no hubiese {hubiera) lie gad 0. I was* sorry she had 
not arrived. 

c. The pluperfect subjunctives are also used in past conditions 
contrary to fact, in those places where the imperfect subjunctives 
would be used in present conditions contrary to fact (see 128). 

Si hubiese tenido diner 0, habria (hubiera) ido a Madrid. If I 
had had money, I should have gone to Madrid. 

d. The future perfect subjunctive may take the place of the 
future subjunctive, from which it does not differ essentially in 
meaning. 

Mi hijo me escribird cuando hubiere llegado {llegare). My 
son will write me when he arrives (shall have arrived). 

173. Comparison of Adverbs. 

a. The comparative of adverbs is formed, like that of adjec- 
tives, with mas or menos. 

mas fdcilmente, more easily; menos fdcilmente, less easily. 

b. The superlative of adverbs does not differ from the com- 
parative in form. 

Los que aprenden mas fdcilmente no son siempre los que apreh- 
den mas. Those who learn the most easily are not always those 
who learn the most. 



UCSSON XXX 109 

174. Superlative without comparison. Superlative 
degree without comparison may be expressed by placing 
before an adjective or adverb an adverb expressing high 
degree. 

Muy fdcil, muy fdcilmente, very easy, very easily. 
sumamente bien, extremely well. 

a. The suffix -isimo applied to adjectives and adverbs ex- 
presses superlative degree, and words in -isimo may take the addi- 
tional adverbial suffix -mente. 

pronto, prontisimo, prontisimamente ; promptly, very promptly, 
most promptly. 

b. A superlative without comparison may be formed by plac- 
ing before an adverb the neuter article lo, and after the adverb 
an expression of possibility. 

lo mejor posible, the best possible, as well as possible. 
lo mas que pude, the most that I could. 

175. Than. After an adjective, adverb or verb, "than'' 
is regularly expressed by que. Note the following excep- 
tions : 

a. In a positive sentence, "than" is expressed by de before 
a numeral, and in a negative sentence, generally by que. 

Tengo mas de dos mil libros. I have more than two thousand 
books. 

La casa no tiene mas que cuatro pisos. The house has only 
four stories. 

b. After a noun and before a clause in which the same noun 
is understood, "than" is expressed by del que (de la que, de los 
que, de las que), the article agreeing with the noun understood. 

La casa tiene mas cuartos de los que Vd. ha visto. The house- 
has more rooms than (the rooms) you have seen. 

c. Before a clause to which the verb of the first part of the 
sentence must be added to complete the sense, and before a clause 
after an adverb, "than" is expressed by de lo que. 

La casa tiene mas cuartos de lo que pensaba. The house has 
more rooms than I thought (it had). 

Es mas de lo que pensaba. It is more than I thought. 

176. Cuyo, -a, -os, -as, "whose." Cuyo is primarily 
an interrogative pronoun, equivalent to de quien but not 
so commonly used. It is more often used after a prepo- 
sition as an adjective. 



no 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



jCuyos (de quien) son estos librosf Whose books are these? 
j En cuyo cuarto pongo el baulf In whose room do I put the 
trunk? 

a. Like other interrogatives, cuyo may be used relatively, in 
which case it does not have the written accent, and is used as an ad- 
jective only. 

La senora en cuya casa vive. The lady in whose house he lives. 

177. Valer, "to be worth." See 545. 



VOCABULARY. 



abajo, adv., below, downstairs. 

abundancia, abundance. 

adelantado, adj., in advance. 

ademds de, prep., in addition to. 

alcoba, bedroom. 

alegre, cheerful, happy. 

alto, high, tall. 

asiinto, affair, business (gener- 
ally used in plu.). 

bajo, low. 

banar (se), to bathe. 

bano, bath. 

cuarto de bano, bathroom. 

comestibles, food, eatables. 

comida, food, meal, board, din- 
ner (at night). 

cubrir (de), to cover (with).* 

dar a, to give on, open on. 

debajo de, prep., under. 

desocupado, unoccupied. 

despensa, pantry. 

edificio, building. 

en medio de, prep., in the middle 
of. 



etcetera, et cetera. 
exterior, outside, outer. 
guar dar, to keep. 
habitacion, {., room, apartment. 
interior, interior, inner. 
leer, to read (see 511). 
^mencionar, to mention. 
natural, adj., natural. 
nombrc, m., name. 
ocupar, to occupy. 
patio, courtyard. 
piso, story, floor. 
portal, m., big outer door. 
portero, -a, janitor. 
pueblo, people, town. 
quedarse con, to take/ 
sotano, cellar. 
subir, to bring up, take up, carry 

up. ; 
superior, superior, upper. 
tejado, roof. 
visita, visit, visitor. 



EXERCISE XXX. 

a. En Madrid no hay corao (los hay) en Nueva York, edificios 
de treinta 6 cuarenta pisos. Los edificios mas altos no tienen mas 
que seis. Los edificios de los pueblos pequenos y las casas particu- 
lars no tienen tantos. Los pisos de una casa se Hainan el piso 
bajo, el primer piso 6 principal, el segundo, el tercero, etcetera. 
En el piso bajo vive el portero con su familia. El portero per- 



* Past participle cubierto. 



LESSON XXX 1 1 1 

mite pasar solamente a las personas que viven en la casa 6 que 
tienen asuntos en ella. En las calles principales de Madrid, la mayor 
parte de las casas tienen tiend&s en el piso bajo, mientras que 
muchas familias viven en los pisos superiores. Las casas de hues- 
pedes ocupan por lo comun el principal y el segundo. Se entra en 
una casa por la puerta grande 6 portal, y se sube a los pisos superi- 
ores y se baja a la calle por la escalera. En la escalera hay puertas 
a la derecha y a la izquierda. Las habitaciones dan a la calle 6 al 
patio que esta en medio de la casa. Estos se Hainan cuartos in- 
teriores y aquellos cuartos exteriores. Naturalmente los cuartos ex- 
teriores son mas claros y mas alegres. 

b. Entre los cuartos de una casa hay (se puede mencionar), 
ademas de aquellos cuyos nombres conocemos ya, las alcobas, la 
despensa y el cuarto de bafio. Debajo de la casa esta el sotano, y 
la casa esta cubierta del tejado. En la sala es donde se reciben 
las visitas. En el comedor se come. Las comidas se preparan en 
la cocina. En la despensa se guardan los comestibles. Leemos y 
escribimos en la biblioteca, y en el cuarto de bafio tomamos los 
bafios (nos bafiamos). 

c. \ Buenas tardes, portera ! i Esta aqui la casa de huespedes 
del Sr. Barrios? 

Si senor. Suba Vd. al piso segundo. 

(El caballero sube y llama a la puerta.) 

<;Esta el amo? (Is the proprietor in?) 

El amo soy yo. <;En que puedo servirle? 

«; Tiene Vd. cuartos desocupados? 

iPara cuantas personas? 

Para mi solo. 

Tengo una habitacion grande con alcoba. 

I Se puede verla? 

Seguramente. Pase Vd. Aqui la tiene Vd. Tiene dos ven- 
tanas que dan a la calle, y entra el sol en abundancia por la 
manana. 

iCuanto pide Vd. por la habitacion con la comida? 

Cincuenta pesetas por semana, adelantadas. 

Es mas de lo que deseaba pagar. 

Tengo otra habitacion interior, mas pequefia que esta, pero muy 
comfortable. 

No me gustan los cuartos que dan al patio. Me quedo con 
este, aunque me parece un poquito caro. Mi baul esta abajo en 
el coche. Haga Vd. que lo suban cuanto antes. 

Esta bien. Juan, suba Vd. al numero ocho el equipaje de este 
caballero. 




SPANISH GRAMMAR 



d. iCuantos pisos tiene el edificio en el que estamos? 
iEn que piso estamos? 
I Por donde subimos a los pisds superiores? 
iComo se llaman los pisos de una casa? 
iQuien vive en el piso bajo de una casa espanola? 
Ademas de la habitation del portero, <;que hay en el piso bajo? 
iComo se llama una puerta que da a la calle? 
iQue dos clases de cuartos tienen las casas espanoles? 
I Donde estan los patios de las casas? 
I Cuales son los cuartos de una casa? 
I Para que sirve la despensa? <;una alcoba? 
I Que se hace en la biblioteca ? 
I Donde se reciben las visitas? 

I Cuanto hay que pagar en Madrid por un buen cuarto con la 
comida? 

I Cuanto hay que pagar aqui ? 

I Cuanto hay que pagar para la comida sola? 

iComo se dice en esparto 1, "Hi take this room?" 

iQuisiera Vd. tener un cuarto mas grande del que tiene ahora? 

iCual es la parte de la casa que esta debajo del piso bajo? 



LESSON XXXI. 

178. Irregular Use of Tenses. 

a. As in English, the present may be used to express future 
time, or to express very vividly a series of acts in past time. 

j Donde pongo el haul? Where shall I put the trunk? 

jSabe Vd. lo que hagof Co jo el sombrero, bajo la escalera, 
corro hacia la estacion, a donde llego medio minuto antes de salir 
el iren. I seized my hat, etc. 

b. The future and future perfect, and the conditional and 
conditional perfect are used to express conjecture. They are then 
equivalent to the present, perfect, imperfect and pluperfect respec- 
tively. 

j Que edad tendrd esta nihof How old do you suppose this 
child is? 

Tendrd unos cinco anos. He is probably about five years old. 

j Por que habrd vendido su casaf I wonder why he has sold 
his house? 

Scrian las nueve cuando me desperte. It was about nine when 
I awoke. 

Habria estudiado toda la noche. He had probably studied all 
night. 



LESSON XXXI 113 

179. The Perfect of the Past Definite. The perfect 
tense formed with the past definite of the auxiliary has not 
been mentioned before because it is so rarely used. It is 
used instead of the pluperfect after conjunctions of time, 
to express what took place immediately before something 
else. 

Cuando Kube lie gad a casa, fui en seguida a mi cuarto. When 
I had got home, I went at once to nry room. 

a. The use of this tense is often avoided by the use of the 
past definite or by a prepositional phrase. 

Cuando llegue a casa, etc. 
A I lie gar a casa, etc. 

b. In this tense the past participle may come before the aux- 
iliary, separated from it by the conjunction que, here meaning 
"when," "as soon as." 

Llegado que hube a casa, etc. When I had got home, etc. 

180. Personal Object. When both subject and object 
are things, the personal a may be placed before the object 
to distinguish it from the subject. 

41 ZZ d rL f n g Zj! ^rnrft \ The ™™ COO!* Allows the Stew. 

hi principle sigue al cociao. \ 

181. Nunca and jamas, "never," "not ever." It was 
found that the double negative is the rule with nada, nadie, 
etc. This is equally true of the adverbs nunca and jamas, 
which are usually found after a negative verb. Thev may, 
however, stand first in a sentence or clause. 

No he estado nunca (jamas) en ) 

Espana. > I have never been in Spain. 

Nunca he estado en Espana. ) 

a. Nunca and jamas are translated positively in questions ex- 
pecting negative answers, and after a comparative. 

jVio Vd. nunca tal cosaf Did you ever see such a thing? 
Ahora mas que nunca. Now more than ever. 

182. Si and no. Si and no are used ellipticaily in the 
second of two contrasted sentences or clauses, to avoid the 
repetition of the verb. 



114 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

En Espana no se come miicho por la manana, pero en Ingla- 
terra si. In Spain they don't eat much in the morning, but in Eng- 
land they do. 

A mi padre le gustan los huevos, pero a mi no. My father likes 
eggs, but I don't. 

iSe levdnfa Vd. tempranof Yo no. Do you get up early? I 
don't. 

a. Used apart with a pronoun, a noun, or another adverb, si 
and no follow. 

Ella no. Not she. Mi padre no. Not my father. Todavia no. 
Not yet. 

b. Certain verbs commonly followed by que require que before 
si and no in answering questions. The verb of the question is un- 
derstood. 

Supongo que si. I suppose so. 

Espero que no. I hope not. 

Die en que si. They say so. 

Respondio que no. He answered that he would not. 

183. Definite Article. The definite article is used in 
Spanish before a noun in apposition with a personal pro- 
noun understood or implied in a verb-form. 

Nosotros los espanoles. We Spaniards. 

Los espanoles teneis . . . You Spaniards have . . . 

184. In address sefior and senora are currently, often 
untranslatably, employed before a title, or the name, of a 
profession. 

Senor Marques. Marquis. 
Sefior Presidente. Mr. President, 

185. Traer, "to bring/' For conjugation see 544. 

186. Idiomatic. 

a la espanola, in the Spanish style. 
a la am eric ana, in the American style. 
a la francesa, in the French style. 

VOCABULARY. 

aceite, m., olive-oil. almuerzo, lunch, noon meal. 

acoslumbrarse a, to get used to. asar, to roast. 

almorzar, to lunch, have lunch asado, roast meat, 

(noon meal) See 519. came, f., meat. 



LESSON XXXI 115 

cocido, boiled dish, stew. national, national. 

cocer, to boil (see 508b, 519). ordinario, ordinary, common. 

, cocina, cooking. par, m., couple. 

\componer {de), to compose parecer a, to look like, resem- 
(of), (see 538). m ble. 

comer, to dine (at night). pimiento, pepper (the fruit). 

consistir en, to consist of. plato, plate, dish. 

Iclarol To be sure! postres, dessert (masc. plu.). 

ensalada, salad. principio, beginning, principal 

frito, fried. course. 

frnta, fruit. sano, healthy, wholesome. 

garbanzos, chick-peas. so pa, soup. 

huevo, egg. suponer, to suppose (see 538). 

importancia, importance. tocino, bacon. 

lista, list; — de' los platos, bill- tomate, m., tomato. 

of-fare. tortilla, omelet, pan-cake. 

mantequilla, butter. verdura, greens. 

EXERCISE XXXI. 

a. iLlamo Vd., D. Eduardo? 

Si, sefior amo. Deseaba saber acerca de las comidas. Supongo 
que en Espana, como en los demas paises, comeran lo menos tres 
veces al dia. Claro ; pero nosotros los Espafioles no comemos tanto 
por la mafiana como Vds. los Ingleses. Ordinariamente (Por lo 
comun) no tomamos mas que chocolate 6 cafe con pan y mante- 
quilla. 

Eso esta bien. No me he acostumbrado nunca a tomar mucho 
por la mafiana, pero si me gusta comer temprano. 

La criada le traera el desayuno a su cuarto a la hora que Vd. 
quiera. 

iCual es la hora del almuerzo? 

Almorzamos a mediodia y comemos a las ocho de la noche. 

«;En que consisten las comidas aqui? 

Al almuerzo se come un par de huevos fritos 6 pasados por 
agua, 6 una tortilla de huevos, y entonces algun plato de carne y 
fruta. Para la comida de la noche hay siempre sopa y el cocido. 
Al cocido sigue el principio, que es carne asada con ensalada, y 
los postres. 

iQue es el cocido? 

El cocido, que se llama tambien olla 6 puchero, es el plato 
nacional de Espana, y esta compuesto de carne cocida 6 tocino, 
con garbanzos y verdura. 

La lista de los platos parece mucho a la de mi pais, y me parece 
que todas las cosas que ha mencionado Vd. son muy sanas. 

Lo son, y le gustara seguramente comer a. la espanola, si le 



Il6 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

gustan los platos preparados con aceite, pimientos y tomate; por- 
que estos tres comestibles tienen mucha importancia en la cocina 
espafiola. 

b. iCon quien estaba hablando el extranjero? 

^Acerca de que deseaba preguntarle? 

^Donde toman los espafioles el desayuno? 

I Quien se lo trae? 

I A que hora almuerzan los espafioles? 

I A que hora almorzamos nosotros los americanos? 

iEn que consiste el desayuno de Vd. ? 

<;En que consiste el desayuno de los espafioles? 

<;Comen mas a mediodia 6 por la noche? 

iComemos nosotros por la noche mas tarde que los espafioles? 

«jEn que consiste la comida de la noche? 

<;De que esta compuesto el cocido? 

iQue es el principio? 

Ademas del de cocido, ique otros nombres tiene el plato nacionaT 
de Espafia? 

En la lista de los platos de los espafioles <;que cosa le gusta 
mas? 

iMe hace Vd. el favor de mencionar algunos comestibles que 
tengan mucha importancia en la cocina espanola? 

iQue significa sano? Responda Vd. en espanol. 

iQue significa un par? 

<jC6mo se llaman las tres comidas? 

I Prefiere Vd. los huevos fritos, 6 las tortillas ? 

<:De que modo prefiere Vd. que se preparen los huevos? 



LESSON XXXII 117 



LESSON XXXII. 



SYNOPSIS. 

ARTICLE — definite, used before nouns in apposition with pronoun (183) 
ADJECTIVE — descriptive, superlative without comparison (174) 

— possessive, long forms (167) 
NOUN — plural of nouns whose singular ends in s (note to vocab. XXIX) 

— personal objective with names of things (180) 
PRONOUN — personal, indirect object to express possession (169) 
— ^interrogative, cuyo (176) 
— relative, cuyo (176) 
— indefinite, tal (171) «*^ 
VERB — perfect of the past definite (179) 

— compound tenses of the subjunctive (172) 

— irregular use of tenses (178) 

— verbs that take subjunctive or infinitive, preferir, alegrarse de, in- 

sistir en, aconsejar, dejar, permitir, prohibir (166) 
— parecer and hacer falta (168) 

— irregular, poner (170, 538), valer (545)> traer (544) 
ADVERBS — comparison (173-174) 

— nunca and jamas (181) 
— si and no (182) 
PREPOSITIONS— used to introduce a clause (165) 

MISCELLANEOUS— Senor in address (184) 
—Than (175) 
— idiomatic (171 a) 

EXERCISE XXXII. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. The Northern Spaniards are not so 
gay as those of the South. 2. Don't forget to (de) bring your 
overcoat and steamer-rug. We shall need them before we get 
back. 3. John was so thirsty that he insisted that the cab should 
stop in order that he might get a glass of water. 4. Do you prefer 
to travel by train or by boat? 5. I should like to take a bath 
before dinner. Is the bath-room on this floor? 6. In their cook- 
ing the Spaniards use a great deal of olive-oil. 7. There are 
three families living on the upper floor of this house. 8. Give 
me a list of things you need. 9. All the rooms of this apartment 
are heated from November to March. 10. The -proprietor of the 
boarding-house is a cousin of ours. n. I am sure that I could 
never get used to eating meat at breakfast like you Americans. 
12. In America there are some extremely high buildings. 13. The, 
apartment consists of a sitting-room and three bed-rooms, two of 
which open on the court. 14. There is no kitchen, but there is a 
restaurant on the ground floor. 15. Do }^ou know that you re- 
semble an aunt of mine? 16. Let us suppose, for instance, that 



Il8 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

you have just received a telegram from Germany. 17. I told him 
not to read at night. 18. Did you wash your hands? 19. The 
mother washed the child's hands. 20. This is the young gentleman 
whose father took lunch with us yesterday. 21. The janitor put 
the boxes in the cellar. 22. I am sure that such a thing never 
happened. 23. As soon as Mary had prepared her lessons for the 
following day, she went to bed. 24. I do not think they have ar- 
rived yet. ^5) There were more eggs than I needed to make the 
omelet. 26. Man ! I tell you the house was worth much more 
than it cost me. 27. It is worth at the present time more than 
20,000 pesetas. 28. They are coming to-morrow if it is' good 
weather. 29. My nephew said that he was glad we had not taken 
the house. 30. How much he thanked me for what I did for him! 
31. I advise you to cross to the other side of 'the station. 32. All 
the inner rooms are unoccupied. S3- It did not seem to me that 
the house was worth what he paid for it. 34. Thanks, I never 
smoke. 35. What you need is an abundance of fruit. 36. We 
occupy three outer rooms on the second floor. $7- My father 
forbade me to bring such a thing into the house. 38. Bring it 
here this very minute. 39. On looking at my watch I saw that 
I should arrive several minutes late. 40. I shall put all the food 
in the pantry. 41. In addition to the soup and the main course, 
there is salad and dessert. 42. The natives like garbanzos but I 
don't. 43. I wonder how many families live in this house? 44. It 
is a business matter of little importance. 



LESSON XXXIII. 

187. Hacer in Time Expressions. Hacer is used im- 
personally with an expression of time as its object, to indi- 
cate the point from which time is reckoned forward. 

' a. Hace, hacia and hard, used with a verb in the past definite 
or pluperfect, express the time that has elapsed, had elapsed, or 
will have elapsed since something took place. 

Llego hace tin ano. He arrived a year ago. 

Habia Uegado hacia tin ano. He had arrived a year before. 

Llego hard un ano. It will be a year since he arrived. 

b. Hace, hacia and hard, used with a verb in the present, im- 
perfect or future, express the time during which something has 
been going on, had been going on or will have been going on. 



LESSON XXXIII 119 

Estudiamos espanol hace un ano. We have been studying 
Spanish for a year. 

Estudidbamos espanol hacia un ano. We had been studying 
Spanish for a year. 

Bstudlaremos espanol hard un ano. We shall have been study- 
ing Spanish a year. 

c. In any of the sentences above, hacer and its object may 
come first, que being used to introduce the following verb. 

Hace un ano que llego. He arrived a year ago. 

Hacia un ano que habia llegado. He had arrived a year before. 

Hace un ano que estudiamos espanol. We have been studying 
Spanish for a year. 

Hacia un ano que estudidbamos espanol. We had been study- 
ing Spanish for a year. 

d. In questions and negative sentences, the order preferred 
is that of c. 

4 Hace mas de un ano que llego? Is it more than a year since 
he came? 

jA T o hace cerca de dos anos que estudiamos espanol? Have we 
not been studying Spanish for nearly two years? 

No hace un ano que llego. It is not a year since he arrived. 

jCudnto tiempo hacia que estdbamos alii? How long had we 
been there? 

e. After time expressions introduced by desde (prep.) and 
dcsde que (conj.), "since," or desde combined with hacer, the use 
of tenses corresponds in the main to rules a and b, though a definite 
act in past time may be expressed by the perfect. 

Desde el ano pasado como muy poco por la manana. Since 
last year I have been eating very little in the morning. 

Desde que estoy aqui no me siento bueno. I have not been 
well since I have been here. 

Desde que vine estoy enfermo. I have been sick ever since I 
came. 

j Desde cudndo estamos aqui? How long have we been here? 

Desde hace tres meses. Since three months ago. 

j Desde entonces ha estado Vd. en Espana? Since then have 
you (ever) been in Spain? 

/. In sentences similar to the foregoing, to express what has 
not taken place or what had not taken place, the perfect or plu- 
perfect is used. 

Hace una semana que no he estudiado. I have not studied for 
a week. 

Hacia una semana que no habia estudiado. I had not studied 
for a week. 

jCudntos dias hace que no ha venido a verme? For how many 
days has he not come to see me? 

Desde el viernes pasado no ha venido. He has not come since 
last Friday. 



120 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

188. Oir, u to hear/' For conjugation see 536. 

a. Oir and ver may take as object the subject of an infinitive, 
which may also take an object. If the subject of the infinitive is 
a noun, it follows the infinitive. 

La vi entrar. I saw r her come in. 

Quisiera ver preparar una comida espahola. I should like to 
see a Spanish meal prepared. 

Anoche oi cantar a Caruso. Last night I heard Caruso sing. 

Voy a ver preparar el cocido a Maria. I am going to see Mary 
prepare the cocido. 

189. Todo, -a, -os, -as, "all," "every/* "whole. " The 
following uses of todo should be noted. 

a. In the singular before a noun, or in the plural with the 
definite article and an expression of time, todo is translated "every.'' 

To do Jiombre debe saberlo. Every man should know it. 
Tod os les meses. Every month. 

b. In the singular with the definite article and an expression 
of time, todo is translated "the whole." 

Todo el dia he trabajado. I have worked the whole (all) day. 

c. The masculine singular is used as a pronoun meaning "ev- 
erything." When the object of a verb, todo so used is accompanied 
by the neuter article lo. 

Todo es hermoso. Everything is beautiful. 

Se lo dije todo. I told him everything. 

Este Jiombre todo lo sabe. This man knows everything. 

190. Impersonal Verbs. An impersonal verb may be 
used with an indirect pronoun object and infinitive, instead 
of a clause. 

No me es posible ir. It is not possible for me to go. 

191. Note how the use of a noun to modify another 
noun is avoided in the following phrases. See 55 a. 

taza para cafe, coffee-cup. cuchiHo de mesa, table-knife. 

cajon del aparador, sideboard cuchara para sopa, soup-spoon, 

drawer. 

VOCABULARY. 

aceiiuna, olive. ausentc, absent. 

agrio, sour. asucar, m., sugar. 

aparador, m., sideboard. bcbida, drink. 

armario, cupboard, bookcase, bistc, m., beefsteak, 

wardrobe, clothespress. boca, mouth. 



LESSON XXXIII 121 

botella, bottle. manera, manner; de — que, so 
cajon, m., drawer. , that (with subjunctive). 

came de cerdo, pork. mantel, m., table-cloth. 

came de vaca, beef. mevcado, market. 

condimento, condiment. mosirar, to show (R-ch. I). 
convidado, invited guest (plu. necesario, necessary. 

company). pataia, potato. 

cordero, lamb. pescado, fish. 

cortar, to cut. pimenton, m., pepper (the 
corredor, m., corridor, hall. spice). 

cuchara, spoon (large). polio, chicken. 

eucharilla, teaspoon. queso, cheese. 

cuchillo, knife. rosbif, m., roast-beef. 
dulce, sweet (plu. sweets, can- sal, L, salt. 

dy). servilleta, napkin. 

ecliar, to pour, throw. te, m., tea. 

estante, m., shelf. tenedor, m., fork. 

instruction, f., instruction. tern era, veal. 

jamon, m., ham. vinagre, m., vinegar. 

limp 10, clean. vino, wine. 
mama, mamma. 

EXERCISE XXXIII. 

a. Hombre, me parece que no llegara nunca la hora de la 
comida. 

iTiene Vd. tanta hambre? J 

Si. En mi pais acostumbramos a comer a las seis y aqui hay 
que esperar hasta las ocho. Ayer, no sabiendo la hora de la comida, 
me volvi a casa a las cinco y media, y cuando al fin me llamaron 
a ccmer, hacia dos horas que estaba esperando. 

b. i Por que no viniste cuando llame ? 
No la oi a Vd. llamar. cJ^c^*-'. 

Me has dicho que quieres aprender a poner la mesa. Pues 
bien, esta roche tenemos convidados y es preciso que nos ayudes 
a mi y a Rosa. Ella estara ocupada todo el dia en la cocina, y 
a mi me es necesario ir al mercado a comprar carne y polios. Lo 
que quiero es que pongas la mesa, lo mejor que puedas. Has visto 
hacerlo varias veces a Rosa, y te enseiiare donde hallaras todo lo 
que necesites. Si deseas instrucciones mientras que este ausente, 
pideselas a Rosa. 

Esta bien mama. Tratare de hacerlo de manera que este con- 
tenta conmigo. 

Primero, hay que llevar todo esto a la cocina. Entonces busca 
un mantel limpio y ocho servilletas en el armario del corredor. Los 
platos y los vasos para vino y las tazas para cafe, hallaras en este 
otro armario. En el cajon del aparador estan los cuchillos, los 
tenedores, las cucharas para sopa y para servir, y las cucharillas. 



I2 2 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

En el estante hay sal, pimenton y vinagre. Me voy ahora, pero 
me volvere luego. 

Al volverse Vd., todo estara listo. 

c. iCuanto tiempo hace que Vd. esta en esta escuela (univer- 
sidad) ? 

AiCuanto tiempo hace que estudiamos espanol en esta clase? 

;Cuantas lenguas ha estudiado Vd. ? ^Cuales son? 

^Desde cuando no ha estudiado Vd. aleman 6 frances?^-?*^ 

; Desde cuando estudiamos espanol ? 

Al entrar en la escuela (universidad) en el mes de septiembre 
(octubre) pasado, <;cuanto tiempo hacia que Vd. no habia estu- 
diado? 

iCuantos minutos hace que entramos en este edificio? 

d. i Con que se corta la carne ? 
<;Con que la llevamos a la boca? 
iPara que sirven las cucharas? 
iQue se necesita para poner la mesa? 
iEn que se sirve la carne? <:el vino? 

iCuales son los comestibles que le parecen a Vd. mas nece- 
sarios para la vida? . . 

,:Que clase de carne le gusta mas a Vd. ? 

<;Que condimentos empleamos todos? 

iQue bebidas se beben en Espafia? ^aqui? 

iDe donde se echa el vino? 

iCual es el condimento mas dulce? <:el mas fuerte? <;el mas 
agrio? «jel mas necesario? 

iComo se dice en espanol: "Please pass the salt"? 



LESSON XXXIV. 

192. Adjectives. Position. An adjective may stand 
before its noun if it names a quality generally associated 
with the noun, as in the case of "white snow," "black ink," 
etc. Emphasis or figurative use may also cause an adjective 
to precede its noun. Some adjectives regularly have one 
meaning when they precede and another when they follow. 

la blanca nieve, white snow; una casa blanca, a white house. 

pobre muchacho, poor boy; un hombre pobre, a poor man (lit- 
erally). 

ciertas cosas, certain things; una cosa cierta, an assured thing. 



LESSON XXXIV 123 

193. Grande and santo. Grande, "big," "grand," 

"great," follows the noun when it means literally large in 
size. Meaning "great," it precedes, and may lose its final 
syllable before a masculine or feminine noun. 

un muchacho grande, a big boy. 

una gran (de) casa, a great (remarkable) house. 

a. Santo, "holy," "blessed," when used before the name of a 
male Saint generally loses its last syllable. 

una santa mujer, a saintly woman. 

San Juan, St. John. 

194. Otro, -a, -os, -as, "other" /'another/' "others.'' 
Otro is both pronoun and adjective. Used as an adjective 
it precedes its noun. The indefinite article may not be used 
with it. Used with a numeral or adverb of quantity it pre- 
cedes. 

otro libro, another book; el otro libro, the other book. 

Trdigame otro. Bring me another. 

Trdigame los otros. Bring me the others. 

Tengo otros muchos, otros dos. I have many others, two others. 

el otro dia, the other day. 

194 A. Cada, "each," "every." Cada is invariable in 
form, and as an adjective precedes its noun. It is often 
associated with a numerical expression. 

cada casa, each house ; cada dos casas, every two houses. 

a. As a pronoun cada is associated with uno or cual. 

Cada una {cual) de las muchachas, each one of the girls. 

Hable con cada cual (uno) de los discipulos. I talked with each 
of the pupils. 

195. Sino, "if not," "but." Sino is used instead of 
pero to introduce a positive statement that is contrasted 
with a preceding negative one. 

No es pobre, sino al contrario es bastante rico. He is not poor, 
but on the contrary he is quite wealthy. 

a. No with sino and a verb may mean "only" or "except." 

No tengo sino dies pesetas. I have but (only) ten pesetas. 

No tengo diner sino dies pesetas que me did mi madre. I 
have no money except ten pesetas which mother gave me. 



124 



SPiVNISH GRAMMAR 



196. Dar is often used in idioms with the meaning 

"to strike." 

Est an dando las dos. It is striking two. 
gHan dado ya las once? Has it struck eleven yet? 
Le di con el paraguas. I struck him with the umbrella. 
No me da la gana. I don't feel like it. (Lit., The notion 
doesn't strike me.) 

197. Aun. The adverb aun is equivalent to todavia, 

meaning '"still" in a positive sentence, and "yet" with a 

negative. When it follows a verb it bears an accent and is 

pronounced as two syllables. As a conjunction it means 

"even." 

Tenemos aim tiempo.H } w , > u t ,- 

Aun tenemos tiempoA < We stl11 have time - 
Aun no ha venido. He has not yet come. 
Llegaremos a tiempo, aun yendo a pie. We shall get there on 
time, even if we go on foot. 



198. Idiomatic. 

d ver, let's see. 

tener ganas, to feel like. 

de buena gana, gladly. 

de mala gana, unwillingly. 

No import a. No matter. 

No me importa. I don't care. 

Lo mismo me da. It's all the 

same to me. 
por esto, on this account. 



por eso, on that account. 
jde que manera? in what way? 
de otra manera, in another way. 
de esta manera, in this way. 
ocho dias, a week. 
quince dias, a fortnight. 
tener puesto, to have on. 
cchar una carta al correo, to 
"mail" a letter. 



VOCABULARY. 



apurarse, to be worried, dis- 
tressed. 
automozil, m., automobile. 
buzon, m., letter-box. 
cama, bed. 

campo, country, field. 
cantidad, f., amount, quantity. 
jcaramba! (exclamation). 
cartero, letter-carrier. 
centimo, ioo = i peseta, 
cerrar, to shut (R-ch. I). 
cortes, polite. 
correo, post-office, mail. 
cuenta, account, bill. 



cuniplcafws, m., birthday. 

empezar (d), to begin, com- 
mence, start (R-ch. I, 507 d), 

Enrique, Henry. 

enviar, to send (see 510). 

estanco, tobacco-store. 

extranjero, foreign. 

felicitar (por), to congratulate 
(on). 

fehz, happy, fortunate. 

gana, inclination. 

importar, to be of importance, 
to matter, to make a differ- 
ence. 



LESSON XXXIV 125 

importe, m., amount (of a bill, pobre, poor. 

etc.). postal, postal. 

invitar (a), to invite (to). querido, dear. 

motivo, motive, cause; con — de, rico, rich. 

concerning, on. sello, stamp. 

nada, adv., (not) at all. sastre, tailor. 

peor, worse, worst. sobre, m., envelope, wrapper. 

EXERCISE XXXIV. 

a. \ Levantese, hombre ! <;Va Vd. a quedar todo el santo dia 
en la cama? 

Dejeme Carlos. Aun es temprano. 

No es temprano sino bastante tarde ; y Vd. sabe bien que Juan 
nos ha invitado a pasar el dia en la casa de campo de su tio, y 
que viene a buscarnos con el automovil. 

Si, ; caramba ! Lo olvidaba por complete Verdaderamente no 
tengo^ganas de ir. Abra la ventana para ver si hace buen tiempo. 

(Carlos abre la ventana y el sol entra en abundancia. Aun 
en el verano muchos espanoles duermen con las ventanas cerradas.) 

El dia es magnifico (Hace un tiempo magnifico), pero si Vd. 
no quiere ir, a mi no me importa. Iremos otro dia. 

Si quiero. Cuando le dije que no, aun tenia suefio. Me visto 
cuanto antes. Digale a Rosa que prepare el agua para mi bano, y 
que traiga el chocolate. <;Han traido el periodico? 

Todavia no; pero aqui tiene Vd. dos cartas y una tarjeta pos- 
tal. El cartero las ha traido ahora mismo. ;De quien viene esta 
carta con el sobre azul y el sello extranjero? 

De mi pobre primo. Esta enfermo desde hace algun tiempo. 
Espero que no se encuentre peor. A ver lo que dice. (Abre la 
carta y la lee). 

Querido Enrique; Voy a empezar mi carta diciendole que cada 
dia me siento mejor ... 

Esta otra carta sera de mi sastre, quien me escribe cada dos 
dias pidiendome el importe de su cuenta. Y no es nada cortes. 

No se apure por eso. Estoy rico en este momento, y le prestare 
de buena gana la cantidad que le hace falta. ^De quien es la tar- 
jeta? 

De mi sobrina Luisa, quien me felicita por (con motivo de) 
mi cumpleanos. 

I Cuando fue su cumpleanos? 

Ayer. 

j Hombre ! no lo sabia. Que Vd. los tenga siempre felices. 

Muchas gracias. Creo tener tiempo para responder a estas 



126 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

cartas antes que llegue Juan. <;Tiene Vd. sellos de correo de quince 
centimos ? 

No tengo ninguno ; sino de cinco centimos. . 

Lo mismo da. Echaremos las cartas al correo al pasar por la 
calle de Carretas. 

b. Despues de escribir una carta ponemos en el sobre un selio 
de quince centimos si deseamos enviarla de algun punto de Espafia 
a cualquier otro punto del pais. Para los paises extranjeros hay 
que poner un sello de veinticinco centimos. Los sellos se compran 
en Espafia en los estancos, 6 como aqui, en la oficina de correos. 
En los estancos hay buzones en donde podemos echar las cartas, 
y de donde las sacan los carteros para llevarlas al correo. 

c. iQuien viene a despertarle a Enrique? 
I Donde van a pasar el dia? 

iQuien viene a buscar a Enrique y a Carlos? 

<;De que manera (modo) van al campo? 

iEn cuya casa de campo van a pasar el dia? 

i Sabe Vd. por que los espanoles duermen con las ventanas 
cerradas? 

Porque temen el viento frio de la noche. 

<:Quien nos trae las cartas? 

<:Que trae ademas de las cartas? 

iCuantas cartas le trajo el cartero a Enrique? 

iDe quienes eran las cartas? 

iQue le pidio el sastre a Enrique? 

<;Le escribe a menudo el sastre? 

iPor que no le ha pagado el joven? 

iQuien le dijo a Enrique que no se apurase con motivo de la 
cuenta ? 

<; Cuanto dinero le presta Carlos a su amigo? 

I Donde podemos comprar los sellos de correo? 

<iDe cuanto es el sello que ponemos en una carta para Espafia? 
ipara cualquier punto de nuestro pais? 

iEn que calle esta la oficina de correos de esta ciudad? ide 
Madrid? 

iQuien hizo el traje que Vd. tiene puesto? 

iCuando es el dia de su cumpleanos de Vd. ? 

I Cuanto pide un buen sastre por un traje? «£por un gaban? 

^De que modo enviamos las cartas de un pueblo a (para) otro? 

,;Cuando empezo Vd. a estudiar espanol? 

iHa dado ya la una? iQue hora dara dentro de pocos minutos? 



LESSON XXXV 127 



LESSON XXXV. 

199. Personal Pronouns. These additional facts about 
personal pronouns are for completeness, rather than for any 
conversational use which the student will be able to make 
of them. 

a. The subject forms nos, "we," and vos, "you," are occa- 
sionally found in modern Spanish. Nos is similar to the English 
editorial "we," and vos is singular, though used always with a verb 
of the second person plural. 

b. In literary texts, contrary to the rules learned, we often 
find an object pronoun attached to a verb which is not an infinitive, 
present participle or positive imperative. This occurs chiefly when 
the verb stands first in the sentence or clause. 

c. An indirect object pronoun which is not necessary for sense 
and which cannot be translated, is often found associated w r ith an- 
other object pronoun. This is technically called the ethical dative 
or dative of interest. It gives to the phrase a special flavor rarely 
appreciated by foreigners.. 

Pongamele el sombrero al nlho. Put on the child's hat for him. 

200. Reflexives used reciprocally. A reflexive verb, 
if its meaning allows, may express in the plural the recipro- 
cal action upon each other of the several individuals repre- 
sented by a plural or compound subject. 

Los dos amigos se felicitan. The two friends congratulate each 
other. 

a. If it is not clear that the action expressed by the reflexive 
is reciprocal, it may be made clear by using after the verb the 
phrase uno a otro, "each other," appropriately inflected. 

Estos muchachos se ayudaban uno a otro. 
Juan y sic hermana se ayudaban uno a otra. 
Todos debemos ayudarnos unos a otros. 

b. The definite article may be used before uno and otro, but 
it is not required. 

Las muchachas se ayudaban las unas a las otras. 



128 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

201. Adverbial Clauses with two Subjunctives. 

There are many alternative clauses expressive of uncertain- 
ty or indefiniteness, which contain two subjunctives. The 
first may generally be explained as a sort of imperative, the 
second as an imperative or an adjective clause. The whole 
alternative expression is an adverb clause modifying the 
verb of the main clause. 

Digan lo que quieran, me ire mafiana. Let them say what they 
will, I shall go to -morrow. 

Llueva 6 no llucva, llegaremos a tiempo. Whether it rain or 
not, we shall arrive on time. 

Dijo que, lloviese 6 no lloviese, llegariamos a tiempo. He said 
that we should arrive on time, whether it rained or not. 

Cueste lo que costare (cueste), lo neeesito y lo comprare. Cost 
what it may, I need it and I shall buy it. 

Sean ricos 6 sean pobres, etc. Be they rich or (be they) poor, 
etc. 

202. Impersonal Verbs. Verbs that describe acts of 
the forces of nature are impersonal and consequently lack- 
ing in most of their forms. They are commonly found only 
in the infinitive, present and past participles, and the third 
person singular of each tense. Among the commonest are : 
Hover, "to rain/' (R-ch. I), nevar, "to snow," (R-ch. I), 
helar, "to freeze," (R-ch. I), relampaguear, "to lighten," 
tronar, "to thunder," (R-ch. I), anochecer, "to become 
night," (see 513), and amanecer, "to dawn," "to become 
morning" (see 513). 

203. Collective Nouns. Collective nouns generally 
take a verb in the singular. 

En el verano, la gente rica va a su casa de campo. In summer 
rich folks go to their country houses. 

204. Indefinite Article omitted in exclamations. In 

exclamations of the type "What a pretty flower !" the article 
is omitted, and tan or mas is inserted before the adjective. 

/Que niha mas bonita! What a pretty child! 

jQue gente tan simpdtica! What charming people! 



LESSON XXXV 



T29 



205. Andar, "to go," "move," "travel." For conjuga- 



tion see 525. 



Andar is used instead of ir when no definite 



object or destination is expressed or implied. 

El tren anda con mucha velocidad. The train travels very fast. 

Los omnibus andan despacio. Omnibuses go slowly. 

Andar a pie. To walk (as opposed to some other means of 
locomotion). 



206. Idiomatic. 

tardar en, to be long, to take 
long. _ 

a principios de julio, at the be- 
ginning of July. 

a mediados de enero, about the 
middle of January. 

a fines de marzo, toward the 
end of March. 



a caballo, on horseback. 

al fresco, in the open air. 

dar nn paseo, to take a walk 

(or a ride). 
dar una vuelta, to take a turn 

(short walk). 



VOCABULARY. 



alguno que otro, some ... or 

other. 
aire, m., air. 
aguaccro, shower. 
drool, m., tree. 
bajo, prep., below. 
banos, bathing resort (plu.). 
bianco, white. 
caballo, horse. 
Castilla, Castile. 
ccro, zero. 
de vez en cnando, from time to 

time. 
diferir, to postpone, defer (R- 

ch. II). 
estio, mid-summer. 
fresco, fresh, cool, fresh air, 
gente, f., people, folks. 
grado, degree, grade. 
hacienda, farm, estate. 
hielo, ice, frost. 
lluvla, rain. 
llnvioso, rainy. 
llenar, to fill. 



mar, m., sea. 

montaha, mountain. 

negro, black, negro. 

nieve, f., snow. 

nube, f., cloud. 

objeto, object. 

paraguas, m., umbrella 

pas ear se, to take a walk (or a 

ride). 
paseo, a walk (or a ride). 
piedra, stone. 
puro, pure. 
raro, rare. 

sin embargo, nevertheless. 
sociedad, f., society. 
sorprender, to surprise. 
tardar, to delay. 
temperatnra, temperature. 
tempeslad, f!, thunder-storm. 
termometro, thermometer. 
tierra, earth, land, country. 
velocidad, f., velocity, speed. 
vcndedor, seller. 



I30 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

EXERCISE XXXV. 

a. : Con cuanta velocidad anda este automovil ! (iQue de 
prisa, etc.) 

iLe gusta? 

Siempre me ha gustado andar de prisa, y me gusta pasearme 
de cualquier modo, pero sobre todo en automovil. <;Cuanto hace 
a la hacienda de su tio ? 

Hace bastante distancia pero no tardaremos en llegar. j Que 
aire mas puro, verdad ? 

Si, y sin embargo en la ciudad se estaran muriendo del calor. 
I Sabe Vd. que me sorprende no ver mas arboles en este campo ? 
• En Castilla no hay mas que tierra y piedras. Arboles no los 
hay sino de vez en cuando, 6 en las montarias altas. 

Mire Vd. aquella nube negra. ± No le parece que vamos a 
tener lluvia? 

Es posible. Las tempestades no son raras a mediados de 
agosto. Espero que no sea mas que un aguacero que pronto pase. 
Pero llueva 6 no, tenemos paraguas, y llegaremos dentro de un 
cuarto de hora a la hacienda. 

b. A todos los espanoles les gusta pasearse por la tarde, sea 
a caballo 6 sea en coche. Los que no pueden andar de otra manera 
andan a pie. El objeto de este paseo es de tomar el sol en el 
invierno y el fresco en el verano, y de saludar a los conocidos. 
Claro es que en el estio difieren el paseo hasta despues del anoche- 
cer. A esta hora las aceras y los cafes se llenan de gente, y los 
vendedores de agua fresca y de bebidas heladas tienen mucho que 
hacer entonces. Las familias que componen la alta sociedad de 
Madrid, las familias ricas, y muchas que no lo son pero que quieren 
parecerlo, salen a principios de junio para su casa de campo 6 
para alguno que otro de los muchos bafios de mar. Se vuelven a 
la ciudad a fines de septiembre 6 cuando no tengan (tuvieren) mas 
dinero. 

c. iDe que modo (manera) prefiere Vd. pasearse? 
iQue nos sorprende en el campo de Castilla? 
iQue hay alii si no hay arboles? 

iDonde se encuentran los arboles pues? 

iEn que meses tenemos tempestades aqui? 

I Tenemos tempestades en el mes de diciembre? ique tenemos 
pues? 

iNieva en abril? <;que hace pues? 

•Ha llovido mucho este afio? <;esta lloviendo ahora? illovera 
hoy? ihabra nieve? ihelo anoche? iesta nevando? 

«;Es caro el hielo este afio? 



LESSON XXXVI 131 

iLe parece que el hielo debe ser barato en Espafia? 

iQue temperatura indica el termometro ? ^cuantos grados bajo 
cero? icuantos grados sobre cero? 

iCual es el color de la nieve? <;del pizarron? ide una nube 
que trae lluvia? 

iAndan despacio los trenes americanos? 

; A donde van a fines de Mayo los madrilefios ricos? 

iAndan mas de prisa los caballos que los automoviles? 

j Agua f resca ! 1 Quien la quiere ? 



LESSON XXXVI. 

SYNOPSIS. 
ARTICLE — indefinite, omitted in certain exclamations (204) 

ADJECTIVE— (a) position (192) 

(b) loss of final syllable of grande and santo (193) 

NOUN — collective, agreement (203) 

PRONOUN — (1) personal (a) subject forms nos and vos (199 a) 

(b) position of object form (199 b) 

(c) ethical dative (199 c) 

(2) indefinite, todo (189), otro (194), cada (194 A) 
VERB — (a) reciprocal use of reflexive (200) 

(b) impersonal, with indirect object (190) 

(c) " descriptive of natural phenomena (202) 

(d) subjunctive in alternative expressions (adverb clauses), (201) 

(e) hacer in time expressions (187) 

(f) andar (205, 525) 

(g) cir (188, 536) 

(h) dar in idioms (196) 
ADVERB— aun (197) 

MISCELLANEOUS— idiomatic (198, 206) 

phrases instead of nouns as modifiers (191) 

EXERCISE XXXVI. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. There are a hundred centimos in a 
peseta; consequently if a bottle of wine costs me a peseta and a 
half, I pay a hundred and fifty centimos for it. 2. Bring me a 
couple of fried eggs and a cup of tea. 3. God helps the rrlan who 
helps himself. 4. On the upper shelf of the book-case in the hall 
there is a reading book. Ask Rosa to bring it to me. 5. I like 
potatoes, whether (be they) fried or boiled. 6. I wish to send 
this postal card to a small town in Castile. How much will 



I32 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

it cost me? 7. This dish is composed of sugar, butter, eggs and 
milk. 8. Last night we dined in the open air. 9. Walk (go) 
somewhat more slowly. 10. Have you never seen the sea? 
11. What surprised me was that there were no automobiles in the 
streets. 12. On every corner one finds a letter-box. 13. Every 
man ought to know how to boil potatoes. 14. It snowed all last 
week. 15. I have not bought anything except the most necessary 
things. 16. St. Joseph and St. John were two very holy men. 
17. Does it matter much to you? 18. Mr. Fernandez is a great 
doctor. 19. It lacks twenty minutes of nine. 20. How much time 
do you intend to spend in the country? 21. They were not long 
in returning. 22. A friend of mine invited me to visit him 
about the end of February. 23. What a pretty foreign stamp. 
24. She asked me to postpone my departure until the middle of 
December. 25. The object of these instructions is to teach you 
to do these things well. 26. In midsummer all the rich people 
leave the city. 27. Look at the sky. What a black cloud ! 28. For- 
tunately all tailors do not send their bills so often. 29. This fish 
is the worst I ever ate. 30. Every time that it thunders it lightens 
too. 31. Do you think it will freeze to-night? 32. I did not 
know whether {si) I was on the right road to the post-office or 
not. 33. Whether it freeze or not, we shall not be cold. 34. Let's 
see that calendar. 35. There is always snow on those mountains 
yonder. 36. Will you be so kind as to mail these packages? 
3'j. I would do it willingly but I have no stamps, and as you know, 
there is no tobacco-store near here where I can buy them. 38. Does 
it make any difference to you whether (que with subjunctive) we 
take a ride or go to walk? 39. Why have you your best hat on? 
40. Bring me another fork. This one is not very clean. 41. The 
guests have been waiting at the outer door for five minutes. Why 
don't you go down and (a with infinitive) open it? 42. May I 
give you another slice of ham? 43. My mother had been absent 
for a fortnight. 44. May all your birthdays be happy ones. 
45. Nevertheless we see each other from time to time. 46. I saw 
him sit down under the tree. 47. The thermometer indicates eight 
degrees of frost. 48. The words pais, campo and tierra resemble 
each other, but they do not mean the same thing. 49. Since we 
have been here it has not rained once. 



LESSON XXXVII 133 



LESSON XXXVII. 

207. Passive Voice. Theoretically there is a complete 
passive conjugation of the verb (see 503), whose forms con- 
sist of the various forms of the auxiliary ser and the past 
participle of the. verb to be conjugated. The past participle 
is inflected like an adjective to agree with the subject in 
gender and number. 

Soy querido. I am loved. 

Hemos sido olvidados. We have been forgotten. 

Las ninas son castigadas. The girls are punished. 

a. After a passive verb, "by" is generally expressed by por, 
but it may be expressed by de if the action described is not physical 
in character. 

Los ninos son castigados por el maestro. The children are 
punished by the teacher. 

Hemos sido olvidados de nuestros amigos. We have been for- 
gotten by our friends. 

208. Passive Absolute Construction. An inflected 
past participle agreeing with a noun or pronoun is often 
found taking the place of a passive verb introduced by a 
temporal or concessive conjunction (after, when, since, etc). 
Such past participle constructions stand first in the sentence. 

Hecho esio. When this had been done. 

Aprendida la leccion. After the lesson had been learned. 

Facturados los baules. As soon as the trunks had been checked. 

209. Estar with the Past Participle. In a construc- 
tion very similar to the passive, estar is used as auxiliary 
instead of ser, with an inflected past participle. This is not 
a true passive, since it expresses, not an act performed, but 
the condition in which something (somebody) is found. 

Esta habitacion estd mal calentada. This room is poorly heated 
(i.e., in a poorly heated condition). 

a. Compare the following true passive. 

La habitacion es calentada por la chimenea. The room is heated by a 
fireplace. (Stress is laid on the act of heating.) 



134 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

210. Reflexive Substitute for the Passive. The true 
passive is really little used except in the past tenses. If 
possible the Spaniard uses instead, an active verb, or a re- 
flexive substitute. The simplest type of this reflexive sub- 
stitute is that already mentioned in 79 b. When that which 
is acted upon is an inanimate object, it becomes the subject 
of the verb, which agrees with it in number. By the use of 
the reflexive object se, the subject is represented as acting 
upon itself. 

El espanol se habla en Espana. Spanish is spoken in Spain. 
Muehas lengaas se hablan en Euro pa. Many languages are 
spoken in Europe. 

a. With this personal reflexive substitute (so-called because 
the reflexive verb has an expressed subject), the agent may be ex- 
pressed as with the true passive. 

El espanol se habla por los espanoles. Spanish is spoken by 
the Spaniards. 

211. Impersonal Reflexive Substitute for the Pas- 
sive. When an animate being is represented as acted upon, 
it is made the indirect object of the reflexive verb, which is 
always singular and impersonal. The indirect object may 
be a noun or a pronoun. With this construction no agent 
may be expressed. 

Se me dice. I am told. (It tells itself to me.) 
No se te cree. You are not believed. 
Se castigo a los ninos. The children were punished. 
Se biisca a Vd. y a su hermano. They are looking for you 
and your brother. 

Remark. _ It is often possible to express an English passive in three 
ways in Spanish. 

Fui tratado muy bien. ) 

Me trataron muy bien. > I was very well treated. 

Se me trtto muy bien. » 

212. Dejar. Already used in the sense of "to leave," 
or "to allow,'' dejar, when followed by de and an infinitive 
may mean "to leave off," or "to fail to." 

No dejar c de seguir sus instrucciones. I shall not fail to fol- 
low your instructions. 

No deje Vd. de estudiar mientras que este ausente. Don't leave 
off studying while I am awav. 



UCSSON XXXVII 135 

213. Synonyms. To remember. Acordarse de and 
recordar both mean "to call to mind," "to recall." Re- 
cordar alone is used with the meaning of "to remind." 
(Both are R-ch. Class I). 

No me acuerdo de la palabra. I don't remember the word. 

Recuerdo que aquel ano fui a Paris. I recall that I went to 
Paiis that year. 

Vd. me recuerda mi pobre marido. You remind me of my poor 
husband. 

Permitame que le rccnerde su deber. Allow me to remind you 
of your duty. 

214. Physical Characteristics. Tener and the defi- 
nite article are often used in Spanish in describing physical 
characteristics or temporary physical condition, where in 
English we use "to be" with an adjective, or "to have" with 
the indefinite article. 

Vd. tiene siempre la boca abierta. Your mouth is always open. 
Tengo la cava encendida. My face is flushed. 
Tiene la mano pequcna. He has a small hand. 

a. If the condition described is not temporary, and the object 
of tener is a plural noun, the definite article may be omitted. 
Carmen tiene ojos negros. Carmen has black eyes. 

215. Idiomatic. 

guardar cama, to stay in bed. pier da Vd. cuidado, don't worry. 

un fuerte constipado, a hard una fuerie tos, a hard cough. 

cold. cosa de cuidado, a thing to wor- 
cosa de peligro, a dangerous ry about. 

matter. tener calentura, to be feverish. 

to mar el pulso, to feel the pulse. me duele la mano, my hand 
tener miedo, to be afraid. hurts. 

tener cuidado, to be careful. estar enfermo del corazon, to 
i Cuidado! Look out! have heart trouble. 

VOCABULARY. 

agudo, sharp, acute. casi, almost. 

apetito, appetite. constipado, a cold. 

botica, drug-store. constiparse, to catch cold 

cabeza, head. consuliar, to consult. 

caldo, broth. corazon, m., heart. 

calentura, fever. cucharadita, teaspoonful. 

capa, cape. cuidado, care, anxiety. 

car a, face. curar, to cure, care for. 



I36 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

doctor, Doctor (a title). mlembro, member, limb. 
doler, to ache, pain, hurt, (R- oido, hearing (the sense). 

ch. I). peligro, danger. 

dolor, ache, pain, grief perder, to lose (R-ch. I). 

durante, prep., during. pulso, pulse. 
enccndido, inflamed, heated, rccado, message. 

flushed. receta, receipt, prescription. 

enicro, entire, whole. rcmedio, remedy. 

estomago, stomach. resfriado, a cold. 

estornudar, to sneeze. resultado, result, outcome. 

cxccsivo, excessive, extreme. salvar, to save. 

horrible, terrible, horrible. sufrir, to suffer, to bear. 

lengua, tongue. telefono, telephone. 

mandar, to send, command. telefonar, to telephone. 

marido, husband. tos, f., cough. 

mledo, fear. toser, to cough. 

EXERCISE XXXVII. 

a. (Da. Manuela es el ama de una casa de huespedes.) 

La he llamado a Vd. Da. Manuela porque me siento muy malo. 
Desearia que se mandase un recado al despacho diciendo que hoy 
no podre ir. Se lo agradecere infinite. 

Se hara en seguida. iQue tiene Vd. ? «:Le duele la cabeza? 

Me duele excesivamente. Ayer sali sin capa, y antes de llegar 
a la oficina empezo a Hover, y creo que me constipe (que he cogido 
un resfriado). Me acoste anoche con dolores en todos los miem- 
bros, y he tosido y estornudado mucho durante la noche. He 
pasado casi toda la noche sin dormir. 

I No quiere que le traiga algo caliente, una taza de te 6 de 
caldo? 

Gracias. No tengo apetito. <;Vive cerca de aqui algun medico? 

Ninguno bueno; pero si Vd. desea consultar un medico, llamare 
por telefeno al nuestro, el Doctor Fernandez, y si estuviere (esta) 
en casa no tardara diez minutos en llegar, pues siempre hace sus 
visitas en automovil. Pero D. Jose, eso que tiene Vd. no es nada. 
Vd. tendra solamente un fuerte constipado. \ Hombre ! j Que bien 
me acuerdo de la ultima enfermedad de mi pobre marido. Aquello 
si fue horrible. Durante un aho entero estuvo enfermo del corazon 
y del estomago. Sufrio agudos dolores. Los mejores medicos de 
la ciudad trataron de salvarle, y se le dio muchos remedios, pero 
todo sin resultado. Se murio el afio pasado. Hacia mucho tiempo 
ya que habia perdido casi por completo el oido. Lo peor es que 
el pobre tenia tanto miedo de morir. 

Pero ique estoy haciendo? Si no dejo de hablar de enferme- 



LESSON XXXVII 137 

dades va Vd. a ponerse peor. Voy corriendo a telefonar al despacho 
y al medico. 

(El medico entra despues de un rato.) 

I Que le pasa, caballero? Dejeme tomarle el pulso. Mues- 
treme Vd. la lengua. Bastante sucia. Vd. tiene la cara encendida. 
A ver lo que indica el termometro. 100 grados. Vd. tiene calen- 
tura, pero no sera cosa de cuidado. Guardando cama, en un par 
de dias se pone bueno. Mande Vd. Sra. ama, preparar esta receta 
en la'botica, y dele al enfermo una cucharadita cada tres horas. 
No debe comer hoy, pero dele agua cuando pida. Vuelvo por la 
tarde para ver como lo esta pasando. Hasta entonces, pues. 

b. 1 Para que ha llamado D. Jose al ama? 

,;Desde cuando se siente malo? 

<;Cual fue la causa del constipado que ha cogido? 

iQue quiere traerle el ama? 

<:D6nde le duele a D. Jose? 

I Como ha pasado la noche ? 

; Por que no quiere tomar nada? 

I Se va Da. Manuela en seguida a telefonar al despacho? ,:que 
hace pues? 

iQue le recuerda la enfermedad de su marido? 

^;De que murio su marido? 

I Cree Vd. que le sea interesante a D. Jose oir hablar de las 
enfermedades del marido de la buena sefiora? 

I Tarda ella mucho en dejar de hablar? ■ 

I Que hace el medico cuando entra ? 

;Cuanto tiempo tendra el enfermo que guardar cama? 

I Cuantos dias tardara en ponerse bueno ? 

;D6nde se preparan las recetas de los medicos? 

I Como se llaman los hombres que curan a los enfermos ? 

i Como se llama la enfermedad de D. Jose? 

; Tiene miedo de morir? 

<:Estara peor manana que hoy? 

; Quiere Vd. que le de algun recado a su amigo cuando le vea? 

r ;Se acuerda Vd. de lo que quiere decir resfriado? 

I No me oye Vd., 6 ha perdido el oido, 6 no me entiende? 



138 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



LESSON XXXVIII. 



VOCABULARY. 



alma, soul. 

anterior, fore, anterior. 
arteria, artery. 
barba, chfn, beard. 
brazo, arm. 

bigote, m., moustache. 
calvo, bald. 
cerebro, brain. 
ciego, blind, blind person. 
cojo, lame, lame person. 
comun, common. 
contener, to contain (see 543). 
crdnec, skull. 
cuello, collar, neck. 
cuerpo, body. 
cutis, m., skin. 
debit, weak. 
dedo, finger. 

dedo anular, ring-finger. 
dedo del corazon, middle finger. 
dedo del pie, toe. 
dedo indice, index finger. 
dedo menique, little finger. 
dedo pulgar, thumb. 
dedo pulgar del pie, big toe. 
diente, m., tooth. 
digerir, to digest (R-ch. II). 
encarnado, red. 

espalda, back (in plu., shoul- 
ders). 
espinazo, spfnal column. 
frente, f., forehead. 
garganta, throat. 
gordo, fat, stout. 
gusto, taste (the sense). 
habla, speech. 

EXERCISE 



higado, liver. 

hueso, bone. 

humano, human. 

inferior, lower, inferior. 

intestinos, intestines. 

labio, lip. 

manco, one-armed. 

medula c spinal, spinal-cord. 

mover (se), to move (R-ch. I). 

mudo, mute, dumb, silent. 

musculo, muscle. 

nariz, f., nose. 

olfato, smell (sense of). 

oreja, ear. 

organo, organ. 

palma, palm. 

pecho, breast, chest. 

pelo, hair. 

pierna, leg. 

planta, plant, sole. 

posterior, hinder, rear, back. 

pulmones, lungs. 

puno, fist, hand-writing. 

respiracion, f., breathing. 

respirar, to breathe. 

sangre, f., blood. 

sentido, sense. 

sordo, deaf, dull. 

tacto, feeling (sense of). 

tronco, trunk (of body or tree). 

tuerto, one-eyed. 

uso, use. 

vena, vein. 

vientre, belly, stomach. 

vital, vital. 

XXXVIII. 



r ;En que consiste la mayor parte del cuerpo humano? 
iComo se llaman las partes principales del cuerpo? 
,;Cuantos brazos tenemos? 



This lesson may be omitted if desired. 



LESSON XXXVIII 139 

iComo se llaman los miembros con que andamos? 

iCuales son los organos vitales principales? 

iComo se llama la parte exterior del cuerpo? <;la mano 
cerrada? <:la parte interior de la mano? <;la parte inferior del 
pie? ila parte que esta entre el tronco y la cabeza? ila parte que 
contiene la medula espinal? «jla parte que contiene el cerebro? 
i la parte superior de la cara? <;la parte inferior de la cara? <;la 
parte anterior del tronco? <;la parte posterior del tronco? <:la 
parte anterior y superior del tronco? 

t Cual es el nombre del pelo que cubre la cabeza ? 1 que cubre 
la barba? ;que cubre el labio superior? 

<:De que esta cubierta la cabeza? 

i Como llamamos al hombre que ha perdido el uso de los ojos, 
6 que no ha visto nunca? ,jal hombre que no tiene sino un.ojo? 
,;al que tiene solamente un brazo? <jal que no oye bien? ^al que 
no anda bien? <;al que no tiene el uso de la lengua? 

iQue es un cojo? iun mudo? i'un sordo? «;un manco? £un 
tuerto? iun ciego? 

i Como se puede conocer al hombre fuerte? 

I Para que sirven los pulmones? ^los labios y la lengua? ;los 
miisculos ? 

iPor donde corre la sangre? 

I Cual es el color de la sangre ? 

^Cuales son los cinco sentidos? 

iTenemos todos sentido comun? 

^Cuales son los organos de la vista? <:del oido? <idel tacto? 

<;Cual es el organo de la habla (palabra) ? idel gusto? ;del 
olf ato ? 

iCon cual de los organos digerimos lo que comemos ° 

I Para que sirve el cerebro ? 

; Donde estan las partes vitales? 

iDe donde viene la voz? 

; Me hace Vd. el favor de mencionar los nombres de los cinco 
dedos ? 

I Como se llaman los huesos de la boca ? 

<rEs gordo y fuerte 6 debil y delgado su hermano de Vd. ? 

,;C6mo se llama esto? 

Y el alma, ± donde esta? 



i-1 SPANISH GRAMMAR 



LESSON XXXIX. 



216. Omission of Indefinite Article. The indefinite 
article is more definite in meaning than the English indefi- 
nite article. It is consequently omitted in many expressions 
of a general nature, where in English the article would be 
used. The student should note such omissions, as it is im- 
possible to make a rule which will cover all cases. 

tener barb a, to have a beard. hacerse medico, to become a 

iener novio, to have a beau. doctor. 

estudiar para abogado, to study buscar casa, to look for a house. 

for a lawyer. to mar casa, to take a house. 
estar de visita, to be on a visit. 

217. Verbs in -uir. For the conjugation of concluir 
and other verbs in -uir, see 523. 

218. Concluir, "to conclude,'' is a synonym of acabar 
and terminar, in so far as it means "to end/' "'finish,'' "ter- 
minate/' It also means "to decide," although "to decide to," 
is decidir a. Used in the past reflexively, concluir has the 
passive meanings "to be all gone," "to be all over," "to 
have come to an end." 

iHa concluido Vd.f Are you through? 

He concluido que no debemos hacerlo. I have concluded that 
we should not do it. 

Se ha concluido el pan. The bread is all gone. 

219. Mayor and menor are the irregular comparatives 
of grande and pequeno, and equivalent to mas grande and 
mas pequeno. When applied to persons they mean "older" 
and "younger." 

Juan es mayor que Maria. John is older than Mary. 
Maria es menor que Juan. Mary is younger than John. 

a. The superlatives of mayor and menor are el mayor and 
el menor. 



]y£,ssox xxxix 



141 



Juan es el menor de mis hijos. John is the youngest of my 
children. 

Juan es el mayor de los dos. John is the elder of the two. 



220. Synonyms. Joven, "young," and viejo, "old/' 

are generally applied to what is really young or old, without 
the idea of comparison. Antiguo means "old" in the sense 
of "former," "of long standing," or "antique." 

Un h ombre joven; a young man. 

Un libro viejo; an old book. 

Un antiguo companero mio ; an old chum of mine. 



221. The . . .the. These correlatives, used before 
comparatives, are expressed by cuanto (-a, -os, -as) . . . 
tanto (-a, -os, -as). 

Cuantos mas iibros ten go, tantos mas deseo. The more books 
I have, the more I want. 

Cuanto mas gam, tanto menos gasta. The more he earns the 
less he spends. 

VOCABULARY. 



abogado, lawyer. 

aficionado (a), fond (of), en- 
thusiastic (about). 

Alejandro, Alexander. 

A n ion io, Anthony. 

Ana, Anna. 

anteojos, (plu.) eyeglasses. 

arruinar, to ruin, spoil. 

calce tines, hose. 

casar, to marry (transitive). 

casarse {con), to marry. 

catedrdtko, professor. 

ciencia, science. 

contestar (d), to answer. 

conque, and so. 

Cordoba, Cordova, a city in 
southern Spain. 

cuanto (relative), how much, 
as much as, all that. 

cur a, m., parish priest. 

chico, -a, small (person), boy, 
girl. 

dcdicarse (a), to devote oneself 
(to). 

dcntista, m., dentist. 



en Un, in short. 

cquivocarsc, to be mistaken (sec 

5°7)\ 

/En mi vidal Never in my life! 

escoger, to pick, choose (sec 

508). 

especial, especial. 
e studio s study. 
figurarse, to imagine. 
/Figurese Vd.l Just imagine. 
fuera de, except, excepting. 
ganar, to gain, win, earn. 
Granada, a city in southern 

Spain. 
Jiacerse, to become (/. e., to 

make of oneself). 
idioma, m.. language. 
Id pic, m., pencil. 
listo, bright, smart, clever (when 

used with ser). 
matemdtica, mathematics. 
niedicina, medicine. 
mesa de escribir, writing table. 

desk. 
nacer, to be born (see 513,548). 



142 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

novio, beau, fiance, bridegroom. soltero, -a, unmarried person. 

novia, sweetheart, fiancee, bride. tinta, ink. 

obedecer (d), to obey (see 513). tintcro, inkstand. 

ocuparse {en), to busy oneself. /Vaya si lo es! I should say 

papel, m., paper. he is ! 

papel secante, blotting-paper. viiido, -a, widower, widow. 

profesion, f., profession. vice versa, vice versa. 

regreso, return. ;Ya lo creo! I should say so. 

si, why. 

EXERCISE XXXIX. 

a. iMe permite Vd. Da. Manuela sentarme a su mesa de es- 
cribir? Quiero contestar (responder) a las muchas cartas que he 
recibido durante mi enfermedad, y se ha concluido la tinta de mi 
tintero. 

Sientese Vd., D. Jose. En la mesa encontrara Vd. plumas, 
lapiz, papel secante, en fin cuanto le haga falta. Mientras que Vd. 
esta escribiendo, voy a ocuparme en hacer calcetines para el chico. 

I Para Antonio ? \ Que chico mas listo ! 

i Vaya si lo es ! En mi yida he visto otro tan aficionado a los 
estudios. No quiere hacer mas que leer y estudiar. \ Figurese Vd. ! 
Ya he tenido que comprarle unos anteojos. Si se esta arruinando 
la vista con tanto estudiar. Cuanto mas le digo que no estudie por 
la noche, tanto menos me obedece. Es que ha escogido la profesion 
de su padre, el que durante muchos afios fue catedratico en la 
Universidad. 

iEntre sus estudios hay algunas a que se dedica especialmente? 

Entre todos prefiere la matematica y las ciencias naturales. 
Todos le gustan fuera de la gramatica y el estudio de las lenguas 
(los idiomas). He notado que los de mis hijos que han podido 
aprender facilmente la matematica, no han tenido cabeza para los 
idiomas, y vice versa. 

iConque Vd. tiene otros hijos? 

i Ya lo creo! Tres, nada menos. Dos mujeres y un hombre. 
Antonio es el menor. Nacio el 8 de octubre del 1883. Estamos en 
septiembre del 99, de manera que el mes que viene tendra quince 
afios. No, me he equivocado. Tendra 16 anos. Ana mi hija mayor 
tiene 20 afios mas que Antonio. Hace muchos alios que esta casada 
con un abogado, y vive en Cordoba. Alejandro, casado tambien, 
y viudo desde hace dos afios, despues de empezar a estudiar la 
medicina, concluyo que ya habia demasiados medicos malos, y se 
fue a los Estados Unidos y se hizo dentista, y muy bueno. Desde 
su regreso a Espafia, esta ganando mucho dinero. Sin embargo 
siento que no haya querido estudiar para cura, pero asi son los 
chicos de hoy. 



LESSON XL 143 



lY la otra hija? 



Rosa, menor que Ana y mayor que Alejandro, es soltera, pero 
tiene novio, y creo que se casara el ano proximo. Esta ahora en 
Granada, de visita en casa de una tia, hermana mia. 

b. i Como es que D. Jose tiene que escribir en el despacho del 
ama? 

iQue se necesita para escribir una carta? 

<;En que se ocupa Da. Manuela? 

<;De que manera le molesta a D. Jose mientras que esta tra- 
tando de escribir unas cartas? 

iEs facil figurarse un chico tan aplicado como el hijo menor 
de Da. Manuela? 

Cuando uno tiene la vista arruinada, ique hay que poner para 
ver mas claro? 

iQue profesion ha escogido Vd. ? <;la de maestro? 

iComo se llaman los maestros que ensefian en las universidades? 

I Se ha dedicado Vd. especialmehte al estudio de los idiomas ? 
■2, que se dedica, pues? 

;Cuantos hijos tiene Da. Manuela? icomo se llaman? 

I Que es un soltero ? iun viudo ? 1 un novio ? 

,;Tiene Vd. hermanos menores? «;son hombres 6 mujeres? 

iEstudia Vd. para abogado? ipara medico? 

^ Como se llama el mayor de sus hermanas ? 

I Cuanto ganan los dentistas por hora ? 

; Cual es la diferencia entre casar, y cosarse con? 



LESSON XL. 

Remark. Lesson XXXVIII is not included in this review. Review 
lessons XXXVII and XXXIX. 

Turn into Spanish. 1. Do you think I am afraid? 2. My 
elder brother does not like his profession. 3. There is no grief 
equal to that of a mother. 4. Do you know a good receipt for 
making bread? 5. I gave him the message by telephone. 6. She 
married a man seven years younger than she. 7. I should like to 
have a beard. 8. We do not know what his motive is (subj.). 
9. Excepting an uncle of mine, I don't know anybody who has 
been in Paris. 10. The farm having been sold, we had to come 
to the city. 11. The great day is over. 12. The less I have to 
study, the better I like it. 13. I was not consulted concerning the 
price of the lands. 14. It is natural that you should sneeze a good 



144 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

deal. 15. Do you remember the number of the house? 16. Please 
don't begin to cry. 17. He said that I reminded him so much of 
his poor wife. You know he has been a widower for several years. 
18. Dr. Suarez ordered the sick child to be given a tablespoonful 
of water every five minutes. 19. I shall have to punish you, al- 
though it hurts me more than it does you. 20. I was born (past 
definite) on the first day of January, 42 years ago. 21. Who was 
caring for him when he died? 22. He died of hunger, I have 
been told. 23. He would have consulted a doctor if he had known 
some good one. 24. How did Anna catch cold, do you suppose? 
25. T,et us make an end. 26. He w r as ruined by the lawyers. 
27. The napkins are completely ruined. 28. Is there any danger? 

29. During our stay in Cordova, we ate beefsteak only once. 

30. They w r ere married by a priest. 31. What a horrible sight ! 
32. He is not permitted to devote himself to his studies. 2>2>- I 
hope you have not made a mistake. 34. So then, he has a sweet- 
heart, has he? 35. Don't fail to telephone to the drug store for 
(por) the stamps. 36. How (cudiito) my foot hurts! You imag- 
ine it. 27- When I have my glasses on, do I not look like some 
professor? 38. I can't imagine such a thing. 39. All good boys 
and girls (chicos) obey their parents. 40. His eyes are shut, but 
his mouth is open. 41. I told him I would lend him as much as 
he needed. 



LESSON XLI. 

222. Use of Imperative Mode. Review 142. The 
imperative is -used to express intimate positive commands 
only. Intimate negative commands are expressed by the 
second persons singular and plural of the present subjunc- 
tive. 

habla, Jiablad, speak; no Jiables, no Jiableis, don't speak. 

responde, responded, answer; no respondas, no responddis, don't 
answer. 

escribe, escribid, w T rite; no escvibas, no escribdis, don't write. 

a. In positive commands the object pronouns are attached 
to the verb. This necessitates in certain cases a written accent. 

hablame, compramclo, habladle, coniprddmelo. 

b. Tn negative commands the object pronouns come before 
the verb. 

No me Jiables. Don't speak to me. 
Xo se lo digdis. Don't tell him so. 



LESSON XU 145 

c. Before the reflexive object os, the imperative plural drops 
its final d. 

ocapaos, busy yourselves. 

223. Irregular Imperatives. Most irregular verbs are 
regular in the imperative plural, and many are irregular in 
the singular. Study the imperatives in 515, 521, 523, 525, 
538-547- 

224. Prometer, "to promise," may be followed by the 
infinitive or the indicative. It takes the indirect object of 
the person, and the direct object of the thing promised. 

Pro met c m c que me compraras algo. Promise me that you will 
buy me something. 

Me prometio que volveria temprano. He promised me he would 

return soon. 

Te prometo volver temprano. ) T n n • ^ T .„ , 

rr 1 . 7 ,\ r I promise you 1 w T ill return soon. 

le prometo que solvere temprano. ) v J 

225. Volver followed by a and an infinitive means "to 

(whatever the infinitive expresses) again." 

No volvere a hacerlo. I shall not do it again. 
No he vuelto a verle. I have not seen him again. 

226. Jugar, "to play/' is always followed by a before 

the name of a game. See 516. 

Los ninos estdn jugando a la pelota. The children are playing 
ball. 

226 A. For caer, "to fall/' and reir, "to laugh/' see 
522 a, and 528. 

VOCABULARY. 

acd, adv., here (used, like alia contar, to count, tell, relate (R- 

with verb of motion). ch. I). 

amar, to love. desobedecer, to disobey (see 
/Ay! Oh! Ouch! Alas! 513). 

besOy kiss. detrds de, prep., behind. 

burlarse de, to make fun of. ensuciar, to dirty, make dirty. 

caerse, to fall down. esconder (se), to hide. 

eamisa, shirt. Federieo, Frederick. 

easOy case, affair, circumstance. feo, homely, ugly, wicked. 



I46 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

hacer caso a, to pay attention to. ;Por Dios! exclamation. 

limpiar, to clean. quitar, to remove, take off. 

mentir, to lie (R-ch. II). reuse (de), to laugh (at). 

m'entira, lie, lying. romper, to break, tear (see 549). 

pantalon, m., trousers, breeches. saltacamero, leap-frog (literal- 

pecado, sin. ly, leap-sheep). 

pegar, to strike, hit, stick (see toro, bull (in plural, "biill-fight- 

507 b). ing"). 

pelota, ball. vergiienza, shame. 

perdon, m., pardon. tener vergiienza, to be 

pillo, young scamp, rowdy. ashamed. 

EXERCISE XLL 

a. Hija, ipor que lloras? Cuentalo todo a tu madre. 
Federico me pego y me llamo fea. 

No llores. No le hagas caso a tu hermano. No eres fea. Fe- 
derico, no te escondas detras de la puerta. Te estoy viendo. No 
te rias. 1 Te estas burlando de tu madre ? Ven aca, mal muchacho. 
I No tienes vergiienza? <;No sabes que los nirios debeis amaros? 
Pero, ; que s.ucio estas ! Y £ por que te has quitado los zapatos ? 
iComo te has roto el pantalon y ensuciado la camisa limpia? 

No se. 

Federico, dime la verdad. No mientas. Sabes que la mentira 
es un pecado muy feo. ^No has estado jugando a la pelota 6 a los 
toros con los pillos de la calle? 

Estabamos jugando a saltacarnero, cuando me cai, y se me ha 
roto el pantalon. 

Te he prohibido jugar en la calle, y tendre que castigarte. 

i Ay, mama, por Dios ! No me castigue Vd. Le prometo que 
no volvere a desobedecerla. 

Pues por esta vez te perdono. Ahora vete a tu cuarto a lim- 
piarte bien ; pero antes debes pedir perdon a tu hermana y darle 
un beso. 

b. 1 Por que esta la nifia llorando ? 
I A quien lo cuenta todo? 

iLes duele mas a las nifias que se las pegue, 6 que se las llame 



feas 



Que le dice su madre a la nifia? 

Donde trata Federico de esconderse? 

Que hace detras de la puerta? 

Tiene mucha vergiienza? 

Le dice la verdad a su madre? ique hace pues? 

En que estado se encuentra? 

Donde estaba jugando cuando se le rompio el pantalon: 



I^SSON XUI 14/ 

<;A que estaba jugando? 
<;No ha visto Vd. nunca jugar a los toros? 
iQue es mentir? 

iQue le promete Federico a su madre? 
<;Por que se lo promete? 

<;A donde le manda su madre? ipara que? 
iQue pide a su hermana antes? 
<:Que le da ella? 

I A que juegan los nifios espafioles? 

iCual es el dia en que no se puede comer carne sin pecado? 
^Hacen caso los nifios a las ordenes de sus padres? 
I Por que se ha quitado Federico los zapatos ? 
iQue hay que pegar en el sobre de una carta antes de echarla 
al correo? 



LESSON XLII. 

227. Spanish Money, The unit is the peseta, divided 
into 100 centimos. Five pesetas make a duro or peso. 
The copper coins (monedas de cobre) are the piece of 5 
centimos (perra chica) and the 10 centimo piece (perra 
grande). Silver coins (monedas de plata) are the peseta, 
dos pesetas and duro. Bank notes are of 25, 50, 100, 500 
and 1000 pesetas. Exchange is cambio, loose change 
suelto, and change for a coin or bill, la vuelta or las vuel- 
tas. In Mexico and Spanish America generally, the unit is 
the centavo (=one cent). In Spain the real (=2$ cen- 
timos) is often used in reckoning price, but there is no 
coin to correspond to it. 

228. Idiomatic. Price. 

Bstas navanjas se venden a peseta la docena. These oranges 
are sold at a peseta a dozen. 

jCudnto vale estof Dos reales la libra. What is this worth? 
Two reals a pound. 

/Cudnto pide Vd. por estof Duro la vara. What do you ask 
for this? A dollar a yard. 

Uvas de a real la libra. Grapes at a real a pound. 



I48 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

229. Suffix -ero. The suffix -ero, applied to nouns, 
forms derivatives indicating the person in charge of, the 
dealer in, or manufacturer of. 

puerta, porter ; coche, cocker ; libro, librero (bookseller) ; 
zapato, za pat ero (cobbler or shoe-dealer) ; reloj, relojero (watch- 
maker) ; cuchillo, cuchillero (cutler) ; especia (spice) ; especiero 
(grocer) ; vaca, vaquero (cow-boy). 

230. Suffix -eria. The suffix eria indicates generally 
a place where something is manufactured or sold, or a trade 
or business. 

Ubreria, book-store; zapateria, shoe-store; reloj eria, watchmak- 
er's; cuchilleria, cutlery store; especieria, grocery. 

231. Diminutive Suffixes. These are very commonly 
applied to nouns and adjectives, and even to adverbs. The 
commonest are -ito, -illo, -uelo (-ita, -ilia, -uela). 

Hbrito. little book ; chiquillo, little child ; mozuelo, young chap ; 
prontito, quite promptly. 

232. Either ... or, in a positive sentence is 6 . . . 
6. In a negative sentence, ni . . . ni, which also ex- 
presses neither . . . nor. Ni further expresses and not. 
Tampoco means neither or not either. It is generally 
found after a negative, but it may come first in the sen- 
tence. It is used instead of no in replying negatively to the 
second of tw r o questions. 

Vendrd 6 esta noche, 6 manana temprano. He will come either 
to-night or to-morrow earl)'. 

No hemos tornado ni chocolate ni tc. We have not taken either 
chocolate or tea. (We have taken neither chocolate nor tea.) 

No ten go diner o, ni espero tenerlo. I have no money, nor do 
I hope to (and I do not hope to) have any. 

Yo no qniero ir tampoco. I don't want to go either. 

j No tiene Vd. diner of Ni yo tampoco. Haven't you any mon- 
ey? Nor have I either. 

jQuiere Vd. pan? No. jTostadasf Tampoco. 

a. O, "or," becomes u before a word beginning with o or ho. 
mujeres u h ombres, women or men. 

233. For traducir, "to translate," and other verbs in 
-ucir see 529. 



LESSON XIJJ. 



149 



VOCABULARY. 



bacalao, codfish. 

bazar, m., bazaar, department 

store. 
camiceria, meat-market. 
carnicero, butcher. 
cerdo, pig, hog. 
correr, to be current. 
crndo, unripe, raw, crude. 
docena, dozen. 
especie, f., species, kind. 
fino, fine, delicate, excellent. 
fresa, strawberry. 
frijoles, beans (Mexico). 
genera, genus, gender, kind. 
generos, dry-goods. 
granada, pomegranate. 
harina, flour. 
judias, beans (Spain). 
kilo, kilogramo. 



libra, pound. 
limon, m., lemon. 
lomo, loin. 

maduro, ripe, mature. 
manzana, apple. 
melocoton, m., peach. 
melon, m., musk-melon. 
naranja, orange. 
pescaderia, fish-market, 
pescadero, fisherman, fish-deal- 
er. 
podrido, rotten. 
selecto, choice, select. 
tendero, store-keeper. 
trncha, trout. 
uva, grape. 
vender, to sell. 
z-erde, green, unripe. 



EXERCISE XLII. 

a. Vamos primero al mercado. Despues iremos al bazar y a 
las tiendas de generos . . . 

Hoy necesito una cantidad de cosas. Primero, frijoles (judias) 
de los mejores. 

Los tengo muy finos. 

Haga el favor de mostrarlos. Verdad que son finos. ,;A 
cuanto se venden? 

A peseta el kilo. (A dos reales la libra). 

No los tiene Vd mas baratos? 

Si, pero no son tan selectos. 

Bueno. Mandeme a casa cinco kilos. iQue clase de frutas 
tiene Vd.? 

Tenemos naranjas, manzanas, melocotones, limones, uvas, gra- 
nadas, y melones. 

Muchos de estos melocotones estan verdes, otros estan podridos. 

Escoja Vd. los mejores. 

Me quedo con estos seis. Tambien media docena de limones 
y un melon. 

iNo necesita Vd. naranjas ni uvas? 

Hoy no. 

I Granadas ? 

Tampoco . . . 

Ahora a la carniceria, donde comprare un lomo de cerdo para 
asar, y entonces a la especieria a comprar harina, y bacalao. 



150 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

b. ,;D6nde compramos el pescado? ,;la carne? ^los zapatos? 
I un reloj ? 1 un cuchillp ? 1 los libros ? 

iComo llamamos al hombre que vende libros? <;que vende 
cuchillos? ique guarda vacas y toros? ique hace reloj es? <jque 
tiene una tienda de zapatos? ique vende carne? ique tiene una 
tienda cualquiera? 

iQue significa la palabra especieria? ipescaderia? «; bazar? 

«jQue palabra significa demasiado maduro? <;no bastante ma 
duro? 

Deme Vd. los nombres de algunos pescados muy comunes. De 
algunas frutas. 

iComo se llaman en Mejico las judias? 

iQue compramos en una libreria? <ien el mercado? 

iCuales son las monedas de cobic que corren en Espafia? ;las 
de plata? 

iCuanto vale una peseta en moneda americana? 

iCuantos reales en una peseta? <;en un peso? 

iCuantos centavos en un peso? 

iCual es el peso de este lomo? (^Cuanto pesa este lomo?) 

I Tiene Vd. suelto? 

iQue frutas tenemos en esta estacion? 



LESSON XLIII 151 



LESSON XLIII. 

234. Ir, caer and sentar are all used with the indirect 
object of the person, to mean "to be becoming/' "to look 
well on/' 

Este sombrero no le cae a Vd. This hat is not becoming to you. 
j Me va este color? Does this color become me? . 
El traje no le sentaba del to do. The dress didn't look at all 
well on her. 

235. Dimensions. There are three ways of giving di- 
mension. In two of them tener is used with a noun of di- 
mension. In the third, an adjective of dimension is sub- 
stituted for the noun. 

Laventana tiene una anchura de cuatro pies. ^ rp U • , . <• 
La ventana tiene cuatro pies de anchura. y l h { e wm ?° w 1S tour 

Laventana tiene cuatro pies de ancho. J wl e ' 

a. In asking the dimension of an object, ser is used with the 
noun or adjective of dimension. 

iCual es la longitud de la casa? . Row . g the houge? 

jCual es el largo de la casa? f - 

b. Note the following: 

Una ventana de cuatro pies de anchura ") 

{ancho). }A window four feet wide. 

Una ventana ancha de cuatro pies. J 

235 A. Prepositions. The correct use of the proposi- 
tions is one of the most puzzling things in Spanish. This 
is particularly true of the prepositions that are used to com- 
plete the meaning of certain verbs, nouns and adjqctivgs. 
Since it is impossible to acquire a knowledge of th4Sfffrse 
excepting by practice and observation, the student is urged 
to note in his reading any new phrases into which preposi- 
tions enter. 



152 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



VOCABULARY. 



abanico, fan. 
algodon, m., cotton. 
alhaja, jewel, thing of value. 
altiira, height. 
anchura, width. 
asegurar, assure. 
collar, m., necklace. 
divino, divine, lovely. 
escaparate, m., show-window. 
espesura, thickness. 
estilarse, to be in style. 
gastar, to spend, waste, wear. 
gris, gray. 
grueso, big, thick. 
kilo, thread, yarn, linen. 
lana, wool. 

legitimo, genuine, lawful, legiti- 
mate. 
lienzo, linen cloth. 
longitud, f., length. 
manga, sleeve. 
metro, metre. 
muestra, sample. 



m, even. 

pano, cloth (woolen). 

paniielo, handkerchief. 

perla, pearl. 

profitndidad, f., depth. 

pnlgada, inch. 

rcbajar, to diminish, come down. 

regatear, to bargain, haggle. 

ropa, clothes (collective). 

ropa blanca, linen (clothes). 

ropa de cama, bed clothes. 

ropa interior, underclothes 

ropa sucia, soiled clothes 

sdbana, sheet. 

tcjido, anything woven, dress 

goods. 
tejido de algodon, cotton goods. 
tela, cloth, stuff. 
ioalla, towel. 
valer mas, to be better. 
vara, yard. 
vcstido, dress, costume (—traie). 



EXERCISE XLIII. 

a. ,; Tiene Vd. una seda gris igual a la muestra? 

Si sefiora. Aqui tiene una seda muy fuerte y muy bonita a 
duro la vara. 

Es mucho. 

Le aseguro a Vd. que no podra encontrar mas barato en todo 
Madrid un genero como este. 

Me gusta el color, y creo que me sentara muy bien, pero no me 
es posible gastar tanto por un vestido. Tampoco me gusta rega- 
tear. Conque ies el ultimo precio? 

Lo siento muchisimo, pero no puedo rebajar ni un centimo. 
Este genero nos cuesta a nosotros, cuatro pesetas y media la vara. 

I Cuanto vale esta seda negra ? 

Esta la puedo poner un poco mas barato. Cuatro pesetas. 

Deme Vd. diez y seis varas. Espere Vd. un momento. ,;Cual 
es la anchura (el ancho) ? 

Tiene veinte y seis pulgadas. 

Entonces valdra mas cortar diez y ocho varas. Este aiio hacen 
muy anchas las mangas. (Se estilan las mangas anchas.) 



LESSON XUH 153 

I Necesita Vd. algo en panos de lana 6 lienzos ? Tenemos tarn- 
bien algunos algodones muy hermosos y de ultima novedad. 

Deseo unos pafiuelos de hilo para sefiora y unas sabanas. Casi 
las olvidaba. . . . 

Mire Vd., Luisa. j Que alhajas mas bonitas en este escaparate ! 

No le parece que me sentiria divdnamente aquel collar de perlas? 

' Esta es una de las tiendas mas famosas de Madrid. Venden 

todas clases de objetos de oro y plata, encajes lejitimos y abanicos 

espanoles. 

b. ^Que busca esta sefiora? 

;Que color de seda desea? 

; Por que no va a comprar la seda que el dependiente le muestra 
primero? 

«;Que significa regatear? 

,;Por que no le es posible al dependiente rabajar el precio del 
genero ? 

;Cuanto hay que pagar por una buena seda negra? 
• ; Cuantas varas de pano se necesita para hacer un vestido ? 

;Este ano se estilan sombreros grandes 6 pequefios? 

,;De que se hacen los vestidos de caballero? 

En vestidos de caballero, ique colores se estilan siempre? 

;De que se hacen los mejores pafiuelos? 

iDt que se hace la ropa interior? ^las sabanas? 

; Cuantas pulgadas hay en un pie? <;en una vara? 

Cuando deseamos comprar hilo del color de u-nST-seda que 
tenemos en casa, ique hacemos? 

;Esta subiendo 6 bajando el precio del lienzo? 

i Como se llama aquella parte del vestido que cubre el brazo? 

,;Que se necesita para hacer la cama? 

I dial es la altura del edificio en que estamos ? 



154 SPANISH GRAMMAR 



LESSON XLIV. 

236. The Ordinal Numerals. The ordinals are given 
up to 20 only, as they are so rarely used above that point. 
They agree with the noun in gender and number. 

primer 1st. undecimo . . . . 1 ith. 

segundo 2d. duodecimo 12th. 

tercero 3d. decimo tercio ; . . T3th. 

cuarto 4th. decimo cuarto 14th. 

quinto 5th. decimo quinto 15th. 

sexto or sesto 6th. decimo sexto 16th. 

septimo or setimo 7th. decimo septimo 17th. 

octavo 8th. decimo octavo 18th. 

noveno or nono 9th. decimo nono 19th. 

decimo 10th. vigesimo 20th. 

a. In giving a numeral after a title, the ordinals are used up 
to decimo. After that the cardinals. The definite article is omitted. 
Felipe segundo (II), Philip the Second. 
Alfonso trece (XIII), Alphonso the Thirteenth. 

237. Noun. A noun that expresses what is possessed 

singly by each one of a group of similar individuals, is 

placed in the singular, though the plural would be used in 

English. 

Los ninos con car a alegre. The children with happy faces (one 
each). 

238. Definite Article used. The definite article is 
used before names of countries and persons that are modi- 
fied by an adjective. 

La Lspana moderna. Modern Spain. 

El caritativo Sr. Sanchez. Charitable Mr. Sanchez. 

239. Suffixes indicating Nationality. The common- 
est of these is -ano. Others are -eno, -ino, and es. As in 
English, the proper suffix to use in a given case is. to be 
learned by observation. Note the following: 

sevillano, granadino, madrileno , cordobes, peruano, chileno, me- 
ccano, argentino, panameno, cubano, puertoriqueno, filipino. 

240. Caber, "to be contained." See 527. 



LESSON XUV 



155 



VOCABULARY. 



aldea, village. 

aldeano, villager, peasant 

amor, f., love. 

cajita, dim. of caja. 

catedral, f ., cathedral. 

centro, center. 

cerilla, wax match. 

construir, to build, construct 

(See 523). 
corte, f., court, capital. . 
chaqueta, coat, jacket. 
da tar, to date. 
establecer, to found, establish 

(See 513). 
estrecho, narrow, tight. 
Felipe, Philip. 
fin, m., end. 
fosforo, match. 
grito, cry, shout. 
habitant e, inhabitant. 
iglesia, church. 

a la iglesia, to church. 

en la iglesia, at (in) church. 



Isidro, Isidore. 

juguete, m., toy, plaything. 

ladrillo, brick. 

limosna, alms. 

lugar, m., place, town. 

madera, wood. 

mendigo, beggar. 

mcderno, modern. 

museo, museum. 

nombrar, to name. 

palacio, palace. 

plaza, square. 

publico, public. 

real, royal. 

reina, Queen. 

ruido, noise. 

siglo, age, century. 

terciopelo, velvet, plush. 

torero, bull-fighter. 

vecino, neighboring, neighbor. 

vestido de, dressed in, wearing 



EXERCISE XLIV. 



a. Madrid, capital de Espana, es una ciudad moderna de unos 
quinientos mil habitantes (almas). Su importancia data del siglo 
dieciseis (XVI) cuando el rey Felipe II establecio alii su corte. 

La corte tiene muchos hermosos edificios publicos y casas par- 
ticulares, muchas plazas, y muchos teatros e iglesias, pero no tiene 
catedral. La mayor parte de los edificios estan construidos de piedra 
6 de ladrillo. Entre los edificios publicos se puede nombrar la Bibli- 
oteca Nacional, el Banco de Espana, el Museo de Pinturas, llamado 
tambien el museo del Prado, la Iglesia de San Isidro en la calle 
de Toledo, y el magnifico Palacio Real, que no tiene igual en 
toda Europa. 

El verdadero centro de la vida madrilefia es la plaza llamada 
la Puerta del Sol. Todo empieza, y todo tiene su fin alii. En la 
Puerta del Sol se encuentra siempre gente y ruido, a la una de la 
manana como al mediodia. Alii se oyen los gritos de los vende- 
dores de periodicos, de juguetes y de cajitas de cerillas y fosforos. 
Alii se puede ver aldeanos de los lugares vecinos, con la manta de 
lana y el ancho sombrero de terciopelo, y toreros vestidos de pan- 



156 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

talon estrecho y chaqueta corta. Alii los mendigos piden a los cari- 
tativos una limosna "por el amor de Dios." 

b. ,;Cual rey de Espana establecio su corte en Madrid? 

<;En que siglo occurio esto? 

<;En que siglo estamos ahora? 

iCuantos habitantes tiene Madrid? ^Nueva York? ,;esta ciu- 
dad? i el lugar en que Vd. nacio? 

iQue le hace falta a Madrid? 

<:De que se construyen las casas? 

Nombreme Vd. algunos edificios publicos de Madrid. 

,:D6nde se guardan ahora los libros del rey Felipe II? 

«;Cuando se fue Vd. a la iglesia? 

I Quien es el rey actual de Espana ? 

iCon quien se caso? 

,:D6nde se pueden ver las pinturas de Velazquez? 

iQue plaza esta en el centro de Madrid? 

iQue se ve en la Puerta del Sol? ique se oye alii? 

«;De que se visten los toreros? 

iQue se compra para los ninos? 

I Sabe Vd. como se contesta a un mendigo que nos pide una 
limosna? Se lo dire a Vd. Si no deseamos darle nada, 6 si no 
tenemos nada que darle, le decimos "Vaya Vd. con Dios, hermano." 
Si le damos algo, nos da las gracias en estas palabras, "Dios se lo 
pagara." 

I Se alegra Vd. de que hayamos llegado al fin de este libro? 



THE VERB 

500. The purpose of the following sections is to group 
together for reference the facts about the forms of the 
Spanish verbs, both regular and irregular. For the regular 
verb it is necessary merely to repeat that all endings, with 
the exception of those of the future and conditional, are 
added to the stem of the infinitive (found by cutting off 
the final -ar, -er, or -ir of the infinitive), while the future 
and conditional endings are added to the whole infinitive. 

501. Endings of the Three Conjugations. 



CONJUGATION 


INFINITIVE 


PRES. PARTICIPLE 


PAST PARTICIPLE 




I 


-ar 




-ando 




-ado 




II 
III 


-er 
-ir 


\ 


-iendo 




-ido 




INDICATIVE 




SUBJUNCTIVE 


I 


II 




III 


I 


II 


III 




PRESENT 






PRESENT 


O 


-o 




o 


-e 




-a 


•as 




-es 




-es 




-as 


-a 




-e 




-e 




-a 


amos 


-emos 




imos 


-emos 




-amos 


-ais 


-eis 




is 


-eis 




-ais 


an 




-en 




-en 




-an 




IMPERFECT 






FIRST 


IMPERFECT 


aba 




-ia 




-ase 




-iese 


abas 




-ias 




-ases 




-ieses 


■aba 




-ia 




-ase 




-iese 


-abamos 


-iamos 




-asemos 




-iesemos 


-abais 




-iais 




-aseis 




-ieseis 


-aban 




-ian 




-asen 




-iesen 




PAST 


DEFINITE 




SECOND 


IMPERFECT 


-e 




-i 




-ara 




-iera 


-aste 




-iste 




aras 




-ieras 


-6 




-io 




-ara 




-iera 


■amos 




-imos 




-aramos 




-ieramos 


asteis 




-isteis 




-arais 




-ierais 


aron 




-ieron 




-aran 




-ieran 



i58 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



II 

FUTURE 

-e 



-emos 

-eis 

-an 



CONDITIONAL 



-la 

-ias 

-ia 

-iamos 

-iais 

-ian 



III 



II 



III 



FUTURE 



■are 


-lere 


-ares 


-ieres 


are 


-iere 


aremos 


-ieremos 


■areis 


-iereis 


■aren 


-ieren 


IMPERATIVE 



-ad 



-ed 



-id 



502. Compound Tenses. By way of illustrating the 
formation of compound tenses and forms, the following 
examples will suffice, though only the first person of each 
tense is given. The past participle of the verb to be conju- 
gated is unchanged in form. 

Perfect Infinitive, haber comido, to have eaten. 

Present Perfect Participle, habiendo comido, having eaten. 

indicative. 

Present Perfect, he comido, I have eaten. 
Pluperfect, habia comido, I had eaten. 
Past Definite Perfect, hube comido, I had eaten. 
Future Perfect, habre comido, I shall have eaten. 
Conditional Perfect, habria comido, I should have eaten. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Present Perfect, haya comido. 
First Pluperfect, hubiese comido. 
Second Pluperfect, hubiera comido. 
Future Perfect, hubiere comido. 



503. Passive Voice. In connection with what is stated 
in 207, the following forms of the passive of amar, "to 
love/' will suffice to show how the passive conjugation is 



the: verb • 159 

made up of the forms of the auxiliary ser, followed by the 
past participle of the verb to be conjugated. 

Infinitive, ser amado, -a, -os, -as, to be loved. 
PrES. Part, siendo amado, -a, -os, -as, being loved. 
Pres. Indic. soy amado, -a, I am loved. 

eres amado, -a, you are loved. 

es amado, -a, he, she, it, is loved, you are loved. 

somas amado s, -as, we are loved. 

eres amados, -as, you are loved. 

son amados, -as, they, you, are loved. 
Perfect Indic. he sido amado, -a, I have been loved. 

he mo s sido amados, -as, we have been loved, etc. 

504. Progressive Conjugation. The progressive con- 
jugation made up of the forms of estar and the present 
participle (uninflected) of the verb to be conjugated, and 
mentioned in 47 c and 72, is theoretically complete. Xot 
infrequently ir, "to go," and venir, "to come," are used in 
similar way with the present participle. 

estar cmos esperando, we shall be waiting. 
fuimos andando, we went along. 

505. Orthographically Irregular Verbs. Review the 
general statement in 73. It is to be noted that these verbs 
are irregular to the eye, but not to the ear. There are, 
however, many irregular verbs that are incidentally ortho- 
graphical-changing. They will be treated in the proper 

4-)lace, and their peculiarities of spelling noted. 

506. The orthographically irregular verbs treated in 
507 and 508 all have stems ending in one of the consonant 
sounds discussed in the table in 5, which should be con- 
sulted in this connection. 

507. First Conjugation. 

(a) Verbs whose infinitive ends in -car change c to qu 



vv 



here the ending begins with e. * 



l6o SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Sacar, to take out. 
Past Def., ist Sing., saque. 
PrKS. Subj., saque, saques, saque, saquemos, saqueis, saquen. 

(b) Verbs in -gar insert u between the g and e in those 
forms where the ending begins with e. 

PagaRj to pay. 
Past Def., ist Sing., paguc 
PrES. Subj., pague, pagues, etc. 

(c) Verbs in -guar place a diaeresis over the u before 
endings that begin with e. There are few of these verbs. 

AvERiGUAR, to verify. 

Past Def., ist Sing., averigue 
PrES. Subj., averigue, avcrigues, etc. 

(d) Verbs in -zar change z to c before those endings 
which begin with e. 

Cruzar, to cross. 

Past Def., ist Sing., cruce 
PrES. Subj., cruce, cruccs, etc. 

508. Second and Third Conjugations. 

(a) Verbs in -cer and -cir preceded by a consonant 
change c to z when the ending begins with a or o. 

Vencer, to conquer. 
PrES. Indic, ist Sing., venzo 
PrES. Subj., vensa, venzas, venza, venzamos, venzdis, venzan. 

(b) Verbs in -cer and -cir preceded by a vowel are 
truly irregular, and discussed apart in 513. There is a large 
class of them. 

(c) Verbs in -ger and -gir change g to j before a or o 
of the ending. 

Coger., to catch. 

PrES. Indic, ist Sing., cojo 
PrES. Subj., coja, etc. 



the verb 161 

(d) Verbs in -quir change qu to c before a or o of 

the ending. 

Delinquir, to be delinquent. 

Pres. Indic, ist Sing., dclinco 
PrES. Subj., dclinca, etc. 

(e) Verbs in -guir drop u of gu before a or o of the 

ending. 

Distinguir, to distinguish. 

Pres. Indic, ist Sing., distingo 
Pres. Subj., disiinga, etc. 

509. Verbs whose stem ends in 11 or fi, drop the i of 
the diphthong, in all forms whose ending begins with ie 
or io. This loss does not affect the pronunciation of the 
word, because of the i sound in 11 and fi. 

Buueir, to boil. 
Pres. Part., bullendo 

Past Def., 3d Sing., build 3D Ptu., bulleron 

Imp. Subj., ist Form, bullese, etc. 
Imp. Subj., 2d Form, bullera, etc. 
Fut. Subj., butter e, etc. 

TAnER, to ring.' 

Pres. Part., tanendo. Other changes in same places as bullir. 

510. Certain verbs ending in -iar and -uar, require an 
accent on the i or the u in the present indicative and sub- 
junctive, all of the singular and the third person plural, 
and in the imperative singular. This is not strictly an 
orthographical change, since it affects the sound of the 
word. There -is no rule by which the student nfa^ deter- 
mine what verbs are treated in this way. Of the verbs in- 
cluded in this book, enviar makes these changes and limpiar 
and ensuciar do not. 

Enviar, to send. 
Pres. Indic, envio, envias, envia, enviamos, enviais, envian 
Pres. Subj., envie, envies, envie, enviemos, envieis, envien 
Imperative Sing., envia 



1 62 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Continuar, to continue. • 

PrES. Indic, continuo, contimias, continua, continuamos, continuais, 

continuan. 

PrES. Subj., continue, continues, continue, continuemos, continueis, 
continuen 

Imperative Sing., continua 

511. Since unaccented i may not stand between two 
vowels, those verbs of the second and third conjugations 
whose stems end in a vowel, are written with y instead of 
i as the first vowel of the endings which begin with ie or 
io. The forms affected are the present participle, the past 
definite, third singular and plural, the imperfect subjunc- 
tives and the future subjunctive. 

CrEer, to believe. 
PrES. Part., creyendo 
Past Def., creyo creyeron 

Imp. Subj., creyese, etc., creyera, etc. 

Fut. Subj., creyere, etc. 

512. Irregular Verbs. In general it may be said that 
an irregular verb is one which does not preserve the same 
stem throughout, or which does not have the regular end- 
ings. Many irregular verbs are irregular in both stem and 
endings, and all the irregularity is apparent to both eye and 
ear. Many irregular verbs have orthographical irregulari- 
ties as well. Fortunately the greater number of irregular 
verbs may be included in five great groups, whose members 
have their peculiarities in common. The rest must be 
learned singly, since all attempts to simplify their acquisi- 
tion by a system of principal parts have proved unsatisfac- 
tory. Review the statements made in 127 and 141, as to 
the formation of irregular imperfect and future subjunctives. 

513. Verbs with Inceptive Endings. This is the sec- 
ond largest class of irregular verbs, containing as it does 
over 200. It consists of verbs whose infinitives end in -cer 
and -cir preceded by a vowel. In these verbs a z is inserted 



THE VERB 163 

before c in the present indicative and subjunctive, in all 
forms whose ending begins with o or a ; that is, in the first 
person of the present indicative, and all six forms of the 
present subjunctive. AH other forms are regular. 

Conocer, to know. 
PrES. Indic, conozco 

Pres. Subj., conozca, conozcas, conozca, conozcamos, conozcdis, 
conozcan 

514. Radical-changing Verbs. Review 106. In rad- 
ical-changing verbs, changes are possible in the following 
groups of forms only. 

(a) The forms which receive the stress on the stem 
vowel; i.e., the present indicative and subjunctive, all of 
the singular and the third person plural, and the singular 
of the imperative. 

(b) The present subjunctive, first and second persons 
plural. 

(c) The forms whose endings begin with ie or io; i. e. y 
the present participle, the past definite, the third persons 
singular and plural, the whole of the two imperfect sub- 
junctives, and the future subjunctive. 

515. First Class. The largest class of irregular verbs, 
containing over 300. Verbs of this class belong to the first 
or second conjugation, have stem vowel e or o, and change 
e to ie and o to ue in those forms whose stress falls on the 
stem. See 107. 

Pensar, to think. 
Pres. Indic, pienso, piensas, piensa, pensamos, pensais, piensan 
Pres. Subj., piense, piense s, piense, pensemos, penseis, piensen 
Imperative Sing., piensa 

Contar, to tell, relate. 
Pres. Indic, cuento, cuentas, cuenta, contamos, contais, cuentan 
Pres. Subj., cuent e, cuentes, cnente, contemos, conteis, cuenten .. 
Imperative Sing., cuenta 



164 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

516. Jugar, "to play/' changes u to ue wherever the 
stem has the stress. It is also orthographically irregular, 
like pagar (see 507 b). 

PrEs. Indic, juego, juegas, juega, jugamos, jugais, juegan 
PrHS. Subj., juegue, juegues, juegue, juguemos, jugueis, jueguen 
Past Def., ist Sing., juguc 
Imperative Sing., juega 

517. Errar, "to err," and oler, "to smell/' are radical- 
changing verbs of the first class, but since no word may 
begin with ie or ue, errar writes its radical-changing forms 
with ye and oler writes its radical-changing forms with 
hue. As these spellings do not affect the sound, they are 
true orthographical changes. 

Errar. 
PrEs. Ind., yerro, yerras, yerra, erramos, errais, yerran 
PrEs. Subj., verve, yerres, ycrre, erremos, erreis, yerren 
Imperative Sing., yerra 

Oler. 

PrEs. Ind., huelo, hueles, huele, olemos, oleis, huelen 
Pres. vSubj., huela-, huelas, huela, olamos, olais, huelan 
Imperative Sing., huele 

518. Volver, "to turn," has, in addition to the vowel 
changes of a radical-changing verb of the first class, an ir- 
regular past participle, vuelto. Other verbs in -olver have 
past participles in -uelto. 

519. Many radical-changing verbs are orthographical- 
changing as well. These change according to the principles 
set forth in 507-509. Such a verb is 

Almorzar, "to eat lunch." 
PrEs. Indic, almuerzo, etc. 
PrES. Subj., almuerce, almuerce s, almuerce, almorcemos, almorceis, 

almuercen 
Past Dee., ist Sing., almorce 
Imperative Sing., almuerza 



TH£ V3RB 165 

CocER, u to boil," "bake." 

This verb is not inceptive (see 513), but radical and ortho- 
graphical changing. . 

520. Second Class. Verbs of this class belong to the 
third conjugation and have stem- vowel e or o. They change 
stem-vowel e to. ie and o to ue where the stress falls on the 
stem, and e to i and o to u (1) in the present subjunctive, 
first and second persons plural, and (2) in those forms 
whose ending begins with ie or io (see 514 c). For model 
verbs see sentir and dormir, in 108. 

a. Morir. "to die," of this class, has the irregular past partici- 
ple muertp. 

521. Third Class. Verbs of this class all belong to 
the third conjugation, and all have stem-vowel e. They 
change e to i in those forms whose accent falls on the 
stem. They also change e to i (1) in the present subjunc- 
tive, first and second persons plural, and (2) in those forms 
whose endings begin with ie or io. For the model verb 
vestir, "to dress/' see* 109. 

a. Brguir, "to erect," which belongs to this class, may have 
ye instead of i in any of the forms which have the stress on the 
stem-vowel. It is also orthographical-changing, dropping its 11 be- 
fore o or a of the ending. 

PrES. I n Die, irg 0, irgnes, irgue, erguimos, erguis, irguen 

or 
yergo, yergues, yergue, erguimos, erguis, yerguen 

522. Several of the verbs of this class have ortho- 
graphical changes. 

a. Reir, "to laugh," has a number of peculiarities. A written 
accent is required on all forms stressed on the stem vowel, and 
the i of all endings beginning with ie or io, disappears. Note also 
accents on present indicative, first plural, and in the imperative 
plural. 

PrES- Part., riendo Past Part., reido 
PrES. Ind., Ho, ries, He, reimos, reis, Hen. 
Pres. Sub jr., Ha, Has, Ha, riamos, rials, Han 



l66 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Past Def., 3d Sing., rid 3d Puj., Heron 

Impere. Subj., etc., Hese x Hera, Here 
Imperative Sing., He Puj., reid 

b. Other verbs in this class have the changes already dis- 
cussed in 507-509. Such a verb is 

Seguir, "to follow." 
PrES. Indic, sigo 
PrES. Subj., siga, sigas, siga, sigamos, sigais, sigan 

523. -Uir verbs. This class includes verbs in -giiir, 
but not those in -guir and -quir. These verbs add y to the 
stem (1) in all forms which have the accent on the stem, 
and (2) in the present subjunctive, first and second persons 
plural. 

In addition, the i of all endings beginning with ie or io 
becomes y. (See similar change in verbs like creer, in 

511.) 

Huir, "to flee." 

PrES. Part., huyendo. 

PrES. Indic, huyo, huyes, huye, huimos, huis, huyen 
Pres. Subj., huya, huyas, huya, huyamos, huydis, huyan 
Past Def., 3d Sing., huyo 30 Plu., huyeron 

ImperE. Subj., etc., huyese, huyera, huyere 
Imperatives, huye, huid 

a. Verbs in-guir lose the diaeresis before y. Thus, argiiir, "to 
argue," arguyo, arguyes, etc. 

524. Unclassabie Irregular Verbs. The verbs that 
follow in alphabetical order, do not lend themselves to any 
classification that is easier to learn than the verbs them- 
selves. Forms omitted may be assumed to be regular, with 
the exception of the imperfect and future subjunctives, and 
the future and conditional indicative. The imperfect and 
future subjunctives are to be derived from the third person 
plural of the past definite, as explained in 127 and 141. The 
conditional has the same stem as the future, and the end- 
ings of the future and conditional are always regular. 



THE VERB 167 

525. Andar, andando, andado. To walk. 

Past Definite, anduve, anduviste, anduvo, anduvimos, anduvisteis, 
anduvieron 

526. Asir, asiendo, asido. To grasp. 

PrEs. Indic, asgo, ases, ase, asimos, asis, asen 

Pres. Subj., asga, asgas, asga, asgamos, asgdis, asgan 

527. Caber, cabiendo, cabido. To be contained in. 

PrES. Indic, qitepo, cabes, cabe, cabemos, cabeis, caben 

PrES. Subj., que pa, quepas, quepa, quepamos, que pais, que pan 

Past Dee., cupe, cupiste, cupo, cupimos, cupisteis, cupieron 

Future Indic, cabre 

528. Caer, cayendo, caido. To fall. 

PrES. Indic, caigo, caes, cae, caemos, caeis, caen 

PrES. Subj., caiga, caigas, caiga, caigamos, caigdis, caigan 

Past Dee., cai, caiste, cay 6, cairn os, caisteis, cayeron 

529. -ducir, -duciendo, -ducido. There are a number 
of compound verbs that end in -ducir, among them traducir, 
"to translate/' 

PrES. Indic, traduzco, traduces, etc. 

Pres. Subj., traduzca, traduzcas, tradusca, traduzcamos, traduzcdis, 

traduzcan 
Past Dee., traduje, tradujiste, tradujo, tradujimos, tradujisteis, 

tradujeron 

530. Dar, dando, dado. To give. 

Pres. Indic, doy, das, da, damos, dais, dan 
PrES. Subj., de, des, de, demos, deis, den 
Past Dee., di, diste, did, dimos, disteis, dieron 

531. Decir, diciendo, dicho. To say, tell. 

Pres. Indic, digo, dices, dice, decimos, decis, die en 
PrES. Subj., diga, digas, diga, digamos, digdis, digan 



1 68 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

Past Dee., dije, dijiste, dijo, dijimos, dijisteis, dijeron 
Future Indic, dire 
Imperatives, di, decid 

a. Of the compounds of decir, bendecir, "to bless," and mat- 
decir, "to curse," are Tegular in the future and conditional. 

532. Estar, estando, estado. To be. 

Pres. Indic, estoy, estds, estd, estamos, estais, cstdn 
Pres. Subj., este, estcs, este, estemos, esteis, 'est en 
Past Dee., estuve, estuviste, estuvo, estuvimos, estuvisteis, estuvi- 
eron. 

533. Haber, habiendo, habido. To have. 

Pres. Indic, he, has, ha, hemos, habeis, han 

PrEs. Subj.., hay a, hay as, hay a, hayamos, haydis, hay an 

Past Dee., hube, hubiste, hubo, hubimos, hubisteis, hubieron 

Future Indic, habre 

Imperatives, he, habed 

a. Used impersonally, haber has the special form hay for the 
present indicative, third person singular. 

534. Hacer, haciendo, hecho. To make, do. 

Pres. Indic, hago, haces, hace, hacemos, haceis, hacen 
Pres. Subj., haga, hagas, haga, hagamos, hagdis, liagan 
Past Dee., hice, hiciste, hizo, hicimos, hicisteis, hicierbn 
Future Ind., hare 
Imperatives, has, haced 

a. There are a number of words ending in -facer, that are com- 
pounds of hacer, and conjugated like it. Satisfacer has also the 
imperative form satisface. 

535. Ir, yendo, ido. To go. 

Pres. Indic, voy, vas, va, vamos, van, van 

Pres. Subj., vaya, vayas, vaya, vayamos, vay&is, vayan 

Imperf. Ind., iba, ibas, iba, ibamos, ibais, iban 



THE VERB 169 

Past Def., fui, fuiste, fne, fuimos, fuisteis, fueron 
Imperatives, ve, id, and, for the first person plural, vamos. 

536. Oir, oyendo, oido. To hear. 

PrES. Indic, oigo, oyes, oye, oimos, ois, oyen 
PrES. Subj., diga, oigas, oiga, oigamos, oigdis, oigan 
Past Def., qi, oiste, oyo, oimos, oisteis, oyer on 
Imperatives, oye, oid 

537. Poder, pudiendo, podido. To be able. 

Pres. Ind., puedo, puedes, puede, podemos, podeis, pueden 
PrES. Subj., pueda, puedas, pueda, podamos, podais, puedan 
Past Dee., pude, pudiste, pudo, pudimos, pidisteis, pudieron 
Future Ind., podre 
Imperative's, lacking. 

538. Poner, poniendo, puesto. To put. 

Pres. Indic, pongo, pones, pone, ponemos, poneis, ponen 
Pres. Subj., ponga, pongas, ponga, pongamos, pongdis, pongan 
Past Def., puse, pusiste, puso, pusimos, pusisteis, pusieron 
Future Ind., pondre 
Imperatives, pon, poned 

539. Querer, queriendo, querido. To wish. 

Pres. Indic, quiero, quieres, quiere, queremos, quereis, quieren 
PrES. Subj., quiera, quieras, quiera, queramos, querais, quieran 
Past Def., quise, quisiste, quiso, quisimos, quisisteis, qiiisieron 
Future Ind., qaevre 
Imperatives, quiere, quered 

540. Saber, sabiendo, sabido. To know. 

Pres. Indic, si, sabes, sabe, sabemos, sabeis, saben 
Pres. Subj., sepa, sepas, sepa, sepamos, sepdis, sepan 
Past Def., supe, supiste, supo } supimos, supisteis, supieron 
Future Ind., sabre ■ 



I70 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

541. Salir, saliendo, salido. To go out. 

PrES. Indic., salgo, sales, sale, salimos, salis, salen 
Pres. Subj., saiga, saigas, saiga, salgamos, salgdis, salgan 
Future Ind., saldre 
I imperatives, sal, salid 

542. Ser, siendo, sido. To be. 

Pres. Indic., soy, eres, es, somos, sois, son 
PrES. Subj., sea, seas, sea, seamos, seals, sean 
ImpEre. Ind., era, eras, era, eramos, erais, eran 
Past Dee., fui, fuiste, fue, fuimos, fuisteis, fueron 
Imperatives, se, sed 

543. Tener, teniendo, tenido. To have. 

Pres. Ind., tengo, tienes, tiene, tenemos, teneis, tienen 
Pres. Subj., tenga, ten gas, tenga, tengamos, tengdis, tengan 
Past Dee., Hive, tuviste, tuvo, tuvimos, tuvisteis, tuvieron 
Future Ind., tendre 
Imperatives, ten, tened 

544. Traer, trayendo, traido. To bring. 

Pres. Ind., traigo, traes, trae, traemos, traeis, traen 

Pres. Subj., traiga, traigas, traiga, traigamos, traigdis, traigan 

Past Dee., traje, trajiste, trajo, trajimos, trajisteis, trajeron 

545. Valer, valiendo, valido. To be worth. 

Pres. Indic, valgo, vales, vale, valemos, valeis, valen 
Pres. Subj., valga, valgas, valga, valganios, valgdis, valgan 
Future Ind., valdre 
Imperatives, vol or vale, valed 

546. Ver, viendo, visto. To see. 

Pres. Indic., veo, ves, ve, vemos, veis, ven 
Pres. Subj., vea, veas, vea, veamos, vedis, vean 
Imperf. Ind., veia, veias, veia, veiamos, veiais, veian 
Past Dee., vi, viste, vio, vimos, visteis, vieron 
Imperatives, ve, ved 



THE VERB 171 

547. Venir, viniendo, venido. To come. 

PrES. Indic, vengo, vienes, v'xene, venimos, venis, viencn 
PrES. Subj., venga, vengas, venga, vengamos, vengais, vengan 
Past Dee., vine, viniste, vino, vinimos, vinisteis, vinieron 
Future Ind., vend re 
Imperatives, ven, venid 

548. Defective Verbs. A number of verbs are lack- 
ing in some of their forms, and still others currently use 
only a few of the forms which they possess. To this latter 
class belong the impersonal verbs that describe the phenom- 
ena of nature. Such are, nevar, "to snow," Hover, "to 
rain," etc. 

Nacer, "to be born," cannot, from its nature, be used 
conveniently in the first person present indicative, or in the 
singular imperative. 

Roer, "to gnaw," in the present indicative and subjunc- 
tive may have as stem before a strong vowel in the ending, 
ro-, roig-, or roy. It is not used often, however, in these 
forms. The past participle, roido is common. 

Aplacer, "to please/' atarler, "to appertain," and con- 
cernir. "to concern," are found in the third person. 

Yacer, "to lie," is used mostly in the third person, 
though rare outside of epitaphs. In the present indicative 
and subjunctive, it may have as stem, before a strong 
vowel in the ending, yazc-, yazg-, or yag. The other forms 
are regular. 

Soler, "to be wont," is used in the present indicative and 
imperfect only. In the present indicative it changes stem 
vowel o to ue where stressed. 

Placer, "to please," is seldom used in any but the third 
person singular. Note: past definite, plugo or placio; 
present subjunctive, plega, plegue, and plazca; imperfect 
subjunctives and future subjunctive, pluguiese, and placiese, 



172 SPANISH GRAMMAR 

pluguiera and placiera, pluguiere and placiere. The other 
forms are regular. 

549. Irregular Past Participles. The four following 
verbs are irregular only in the past participle. 

ahrir, "to open," past participle abierto. 
cubrir, "to cover/' past participle cubierto. 
escribir, "to write," past participle escrito. 
imprimir, "to print," past participle impreso. 

a. The following have two past participles. 
oprimir, "to oppress," past participles oprimido and pre so, 
siiprimir, "to suppress," past participles suprimido and supreso. 
prender, "to arrest," past participles prendido and preso. 
romper, "to break," past participles rompido and roio. 

550. List of Irregular Verbs. This list, while not 
complete, will be found to contain all verbs that the student 
is likely to encounter in his reading. Verbs in -uir are not 

• included, excepting those in -guir and -quir, nor are incep- 
tive verbs included. For -uir verbs see 523, and for incep- 
tive verbs, 513. Numbers refer to the paragraph in the 
verb section where the verb, or one like it, is conjugated. 

abrir, 549. amolar, 515. 

absolver, 518. andar, 525. 

abstenerse, 543. antedecir, 531. 

abstraer, 544. anteponer, 538. 

acertar, 515. antever, 546. 

acordar, 515. apacentar, 515. 

acostar, 515. aplacer, 548. 

acrecentar, 515. apostar, 515. 

adestrar, 515. apretar, 515. 

adherir, 520. aprobar, 515. 

adormir, 520. arrendar, 515. 

adquirir, 515. arrepentirse, 520. 

aducir, 529. ascender, 515. 

advertir, 520. asentar, 515. 

alentar, 515. asentir, 520. 

almorzar, 519. asir, 526. 

alongar, 519. asoldar, 515. 

amoblar, 515. asonar. 515. 



THE VERB 



173 



atender, 515. 
atenerse, 543. 
atentar, 515. 
aterrar, 515. 
atestar, 515. 
atraer, 544. 
atravesar, 515. 
atronar, 515. 
avenir, 547. 
aventar, 515. 
avergonzar, 519. 

bendecir, 531. 
brunir, 509. 
bullir, 509. 

caber, 527. 
caer, 528. 
calentary 515. 
cegar, 519. 
cefiir, 522 b. 
cerner, 515. 
cerrar, 515. 
cimentar, 515. 
cocer, 519. 
colai% 515. 
colegir, 522 b. 
colgar, 519. 
comenzar, 519. 
competir, 521. 
complacer, 548. 
c.omponer, 538. 
comprobar, 515. 
concebir, 521. 
concernir, 515. 
concertar, 515. 
concordar, 515. 
condescender, 515. 
condolerse, 515. 
conducir, 529. 
conferir, 520. 
confesar, 515. 
conmover, 515. 
conseguir, 522 b. 
consentir, 520. 
consolar, 515. 
consonar, 515. 
contar, 515. 
contender, 515. 
contener, 543. 



contorcerse, 519. 
contradecir, 531. 
contraer, 544. 
contrahacer, 534. 
contraponer, 538. 
contravenir, 547. 
controvertir, 520. 
convenir, 547. 
convertir, 520. 
corregir, 522 b. 
corroer, 548. 
costar, 515. 
creer, 511. 
« cubrir, 549. 

dar, 530. 
decaer, 528. 
decir, 531. 
deducir, 529. 
defender, 515. 
deferir, 520. 
degollar, 519. 
demoler, 515. 
demostrar, 515. 
denegar, 519. 
denostar, 515. 
deponer, 538. 
derretir, 521. 
derrocar, 519. 
desalentar, 515. 
desandar, 525. 
desapretar, 515. 
desaprobar, 515. 
desasir, 526. 
desavenir, 547. 
descender, 515. 
descenir, 522 b. 
descolgar, 519. 
descollar, 515. 
descomponer, 538. 
desconcertar, 515. 
descontar, 515. 
desconvenir, 547. 
descubrir, 549. 
desdecir, 531. 
desempedrar, 515. 
desenterrar, 515. 
desenvolver, 518. 
deservir, 521. 
desgobernar, 515. 



174 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



deshacer, 534. 
deshelar, 515. 
desleir, 522 a. 
desmedirse, 521. 
desmentir, 520. 
desoir, 536. 
desolar, 515. 
despedir, 521. 
despertar, 515. 
desplacer, 548. 
desplegar, 519. 
despoblar, 515. 
desterrar, 515. 
detener, 543. 
detraer, 544. 
devolver, 518. 
diferir, 520. 
digerir, 520. 
discernir, 515. 
disconvenir, 547. 
discordar, 515. 
disentir, 520. 
disolver, 518. 
disonar, 515. 
displacer, 548. 
ciisponer, 538. 
distender, 515. 
distraer, 544. 
divertir, 520. 
doler, 515. 
dormir, 520. 

elegir, 522 b. 
embestir, 521. 
empezar, 519. 
encender, 515. 
encerrar, 515. 
encomendar, 515. 
encontrar, 515. 
engreir, 521. 
engrosar, 515. 
enmendar, 515. 
entender, 515. 
enterrar, 515. 
entreoir, 536. 
entreponer, 538. 
entretener, 543. 
entrever, 546. 
envolver, 518. 
equivaler, 245. 



erguir, 521 a. 
errar, 517. 
escarmentar, 515. 
escribir, 549. 
esforzar, 519. 
estar, 532. 
expedir, 521. 
exponer, 538. 
extender, 515. 
extraer, 544. 

forzar, 519. 
fregar, 519. 
freir, 521. 

gemir, 521. 
gobernar, 515. 
grufiir, 509. 

haber, 533. 
hacer, 534. 
helar, 515. 
henchir, 521. 
hender, 515. 
herir, 520. 
hervir, 520. 
herrar, 515. 
holgar, 519. 
hollar, 515. 

impedir, 521. 
imponer, 538. 
imprimir, 549. 
improbar, 515. 
incensar, 515. 
inducir, 529. 
inferir, 520. 
irjquirir, 515. 
interponer, 538. 
intervenir, 547. 
introducir, 529. 
invernar, 515. 
invertir, 520. 
investir, 521. 
ir, 535. 

jugar, 516. 

leer, 511. 
Hover, 515. 



THE VERB 



175 



maldecir, 531. , 
malherir, 520. 
maltraer, 544. 
manifestar, 515. 
mantener, 543. 
medir, 521. 
mentar, 515. 
mentir, 520. 
merendar, 515. 
moblar, 515. 
moler, 515. 
morder, 515. 
morir, 520. 
mostrar, 515. 
mover, 515. 

negar, 519. 
nevar, 515. 

obtener, 543. 
oir, 536. 
oler, 517. 
cponer, 539. 
oprimir, 549. 

pedir, 521. 
pensar, 515. 
perder, 515. 
perseguir, 522 b. 
pervertir, 520. 
placer, 548. 
plegar, 519. 
poblar, 515. 
poder, 537. 
poner, 538. 
poseer, 511. 
posponer, 538. 
predecir, 531. 
preferir, 520. 
prender, 549. 
preponer, 538. 
presentir, 520. 
presuponer, 538. 
prevenir, 547. 
prever, 546. 
probar, 515. 
producir, 529. 
proferir, 520. 
promover, 515. 
proponer, 538. 



proseguir, 522 b. 
proveer, 511. 
provenir, 547. 

quebrar, 515. 
querer, 539. 

recaer, 528. 
recocer, 519. 
recomendar, 515. 
recomponer, 538. 
recontar, 515. 
reconvenir, 547. 
recordar, 515. 
recostar, 515. 
1 educir, 529. 
reelegir, 522 b. 
referir, 520. 
reforzar, 519. 
regar, 519. 
regir, 522 b. 
regoldar, 519. 
rehacer, 534. 
rehollar, 515. 
reir, 522 a. 
remendar, 515. 
rementir, 520. 
remoter, 515. 
remorder, 515. 
remover, 515. 
rendir, 521. 
renegar, 519. 
renovar, 515. 
renir, 522 b. 
repetir, 521. 
replegar, 519. 
reponer, 538. 
reprobar, 515. 
reproducir, 529. 
requebrar, 515. 
requerir, 520. 
resalir, 541. 
resentirse, 520. 
resolver, 518. 
resollar, 515. 
resonar, 515. 
restregar, 519. 
retemblar, 515. 
retener, 543. 
retorcer, 519. 



\yb 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



retraer, 544. 
reventar, 515. 
rever, 546. 
reverter, 515. 
revestir, 521. 
revolcarse, 519. 
revolver, 518. 
rodar, 515. 
roer, 548. 
rogar, 519. 

saber, 540. 
salir, 541. 
satisfacer, 534. 
segar, 519. 
seguir, 522 b. 
sembrar, 515. 
sementar, 515. 
sentar, 515. 
sentir, 520. 
ser, 542. 
serrar, 515. 
servir, 521. 
sobre(e)ntender, 515. 
sobreponer, 538. 
sobresalir, 541. 
sobrevenir, 547. 
sobrevestir, 521. 
solar, 515. 
soldar, 515. 
soler, 548. 
soltar, 515. 
solver, 518. 
sonar, 515. 
sonreir, 522 a. 
sonar, 515. 
sosegar, 519. 
sostener, 543. 
subarrendar, 515. 
subtender, 515. 
subvenir, 547. 
subvertir, 520. 
sugerir, 520. 



superponer, 538. 
supervenir, 547. 
suponer, 538. 
suprimir, 549. 
sustraer, 544. 

taner, 509. 
temblar, 515. 
tender, 515. 
tener, 543. 
tentar, 515. 
tenir, 522 b. 
torcer, 519. 
tostar,5i5. 
traducir, 529. 
traer, 544. 
transcender, 515. 
transferir, 520. 
transponer, 538. 
trascender, 515. 
trascordarse, 515. 
trasegar, 519. 
trasofiar, 515. 
trasponer, 538. 
trastrocar, 519. 
travesar, 515. 
trocar, 519. 
tronar, 515. 
tropezar, 519. 

valer, 545. 
venir, 547. 
ventar, 515. 
ver, 546. 
verter, 515. 
vestir, 521. 
volar, 515. 
volcar, 519. 
volver, 518. 

yacer, 548. 

za(m)bullirse, 509. 
zaherir, 520. 



VOCABULARY 



This vocabulary does not include the personal pronouns, the demon- 
stratives, the possessives, or the cardinal numerals. Gender is not given 
for nouns whose gender is regular by termination or meaning. A few new 
words are included, for the most part synonyms of words already used in 
the lessons. Inverted exclamation points and question marks are not used. 
The dash ( — ) is used to avoid repetition of the English word whose Spanish 
equivalent is being given. 



ability, habilidad, f. 

about, de ; cerca de (nearly) ; — 5 

pesetas, cosa de 5 pesetas. 
above, sobre ; — all, sobre todo. 
absent, ausente. 
absolutely, absolutamente. 
abundance, abundaricia. 
accompany, acompanar. 
according as, according to, segun. 
account, cuenta ; on this — , por 

esto ; on that — , por eso. 
ache, dolor, m. ; doler. 
acquaintance, conocido ; make the — 

of, conocer. 
acquainted, be — with, conocer. 
act, representar (a play), 
acute, agudo. 

addition: in — to, ademas de. 
address, dirigirse a. 
advance: in — , adelantado. 
advantage: be of — , aprovechar. 
advise, aconsejar. 
affair, caso, asunto. 
affirm, afirmar. 
afraid : be — , tener miedo. 
after, despues de (prep.), despues 

que (conj.). 
afternoon, tarde, f. ; in the — , por 

la tarde. 
afterwards, despues. 
again, otra vez ; eat — , volver a 

comer. 
age, edad, f. ; siglo. 
ago : a year — , hace un afio. 
agreeable, amable, agradable. 
air, aire, m. ; in the open — , al 

fresco. 
Alas! Ayl 
Alexander, Alejandro. 



all, todo ; at — , del todo ; — right, 
Esta bien ; — that, cuanto, todo 
lo que; — day, todo el dia. 

allow, dejar, permitir. 

almost, casi. 

alms, limosna. 

alone, solo. 

already, ya. 

also, tambien. 

amount, importe, m. ; cantidad, f. 

Alphonso, Alfonso. 

although, aunque. 

always, siempre. 

American, americano. 

and, y (e) ; — not, ni. 

Anna, Ana. 

another, otro. 

answer, contestar (a), responder (a). 

anterior, anterior. 

Anthony, Antonio. 

antique, antiguo. 

anxiety, cuidado. 

any, alguno ; — at all, cualquier(a), 
cualesquier(a). 

apartment, habitacion, f. 

appear, parecer. 

appetite, apetito. 

apple, manzana. 

April, abril, m. 

arm, brazo. 

arrival, llegada. 

arrive (at), llegar (a). 

artery, arteria. 

as, tan, como ; — for, en cuanto a. 

ashamed: be — , tener vergtienza. 

aside; — from, fuera de. 

ask, pedir (a), preguntar (a). 

assortment, surtido. 

assure, asegurar. 



i 7 8 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



at, a, en ; — last, al fin ; — all, del 

todo ; — once, luego. 
attention, atencion, f. ; pay — to, 

hacer caso a. 
August, agosto. 
aunt, tia. 

automobile, automovil, m. 
Autumn, otofio. 

avail oneself of, aprovecharse de. 
awake, despertarse. 

back, espalda (n.), posterior (adj.). 

bacon, toeino. 

bad, malo. 

badly, mal. 

baggage, equipaje, m. 

bald, calvo. 

ball, pelota. 

bank, banco ; — note, billete de 
banco. 

bargain, regatear. 

bath, bano ; — room, cuarto de 
bano. 

bathe, banar (se). 

bazaar, bazar, m. 

be, ser, estar, haber Cimpers. ) ; 
hallarse, encontrarse ; — contained 
in, caber ; — glad, alegrarse ; — 
of advantage to, aprovechar ; — 
willing, querer ; — with, acom- 
pafiar ; — worried, apurarse. 

bean, frijol, m. (Mexico), judia 
(Spain). 

bear, sufrir. 

beard, barba. 

beau, novio. 

because, porque ; — of, a causa de, 
con motivo de. 

become, hacerse, ponerse ; — night, 
anochecer. 

becoming: be — , sentar bien, ir bien, 
caer bien. 

bed, cama. 

bed-clothes, ropa de cama. 

bedroom, alcoba. 

beef, carne, f. ; beefsteak, biste, m. 

before, antes de (prep.), antes que 
(conj.) ; delante de ; day — yes- 
terday, antier ; a year — , hacia un 
ano. 



beg, suplicar (a), pedir limosna. 

beggar, mendigo. 

begin, empezar (a). 

beginning, principio ; — of June, 
principios de junio. 

behind, detras de (prep.), atras, 
(adv.). 

believe, creer. 

belly, vientre, m. 

below, bajo (prep.), abajo, (adv.). 

best, mejor. 

better, mejor; it is — , vale mas; 
be — , estar mejor de salud. 

bicycle, bicicleta. 

big, grande, grueso. 

bill, cuenta; — of fare, lista de los 
platos. 

birthday, cumpleaiios, m. 

bit; little — , un poquito. 

black, negro ; blackboard, pizarron, 
m. 

blessed, santo. 

blind, ciego. 

blood, sangre, f. 

blue, azul. 

board, comida. 

boarding-house, casa de huespedes. 

boat: by — , por vapor. 

body, cuerpo. 

boil, cocer. 

bene, hueso. 

book, libro ; bookseller, librero ; book- 
store, libreria ; bookcase, armario. 

born: be — , nacer. 

both, los (las) dos. 

bottle, botella. 

ccy, muchacho, nino, chico. 

brain, cerebro. 

Brazil, el Brasil. 

bread, pan, m. 

breadth, anchura, ancho. 

break, romper. 

breakfast, desayuno, desayunarse. 

breast, pecho. 

breath, breathing, respiracion, f. 

breathe, respirar. 

breeches, pantalon, m. 

brick, ladrillo. 

bride, novia ; bridegroom, novio. 

bright, claro ; listo (of people). 



VOCABULARY 



179 



bring, traer ; — up, subir. 

broad, ancho. 

broth, caldo. 

brother, hermano. 

build, construir. 

building, edificio. 

bull, toro; bull-fighting, los toros; 

bull-fighter, torero, 
business, asunto, comercio ; — house, 

casa de comercio. 
busy, ocupado; — oneself, ocuparse. 
but, pero, sino. 
butcher, carnicero. 
butter, mantequilla. 
buy, comprar. 
by, por, de, a fuerza de. 

cab, coche, m ; cabman, cochero. 

cafe, cafe, in. 

calendar, calendario. 

call, llamar; be called, llamarse. 

Canada, el Canada. 

candy, dulces (m. pi.). 

cape, capa. 

capital, capital, f., corte, f. 

car, coche, m. [visita. 

card, tarjeta; visiting — , tarjeta de 

care, cuidado ; — for, curar ; I don't 

— , No me importa, Lo mismo me 

da. 
careful: be — , tener cuidado. 
carriage, coche, m. ; in a — , en 

coche ; ride in a — , pasearse en 

coche. 
carry, llevar, transportar. 
case, caso. 
Castile, Castilla. 
catalogue, catalogo. 
catch, coger ; — cold, constiparse, 

coger un resfriado. 
cathedral,, catedral, f. 
cause, causa, motivo. 
cellar, sotano. 
cent, centavo. 
center, centro. 
centime, centime 
century, siglo. 

certain, cierto, seguro, tal. 
chair, silla. 
change, vuelta, vueltas : loose •— , 



suelto ; cambiar ; — cars, cambiar 

de tren ; — clothes, cambiar de 

traje. 
chapter, capitulo. 
characteristic, caracteristico. 
Charles, Carlos, 
cheap, barato. 
check, talon, m. ; facturar. 
cheerful, alegre. 
cheese, queso. 
chest, pecho. 
chicken, polio, 
chickpea, garbanzo. 
child, nifio ; little — , chiquillo. 
chin, barba. 

chocolate, chocolate, m. 
choice, selecto. 
choose, escoger. 
church, iglesia; in (at) — , en la 

iglesia ; to — , a la iglesia. 
circumstance, caso. 
city, ciudad, f. [clase. 

class, clase, f. ; first — , de primera 
clean, limpio, limpiar. 
clear, claro. 
clerk, dependiente. 
clever, listo. 
climate, clima, m. 
clock, reloj, m. 
cloth, pano (woolen), 
clothes, ropa ; soiled — , ropa sucia ; 

clothes-press, armario. 
cloud, nube, f. 
coachman, cochero. 
coat: sack — , chaqueta. 
cobbler, zapatero. 
codfish, bacalao. 
coffee, cafe, m. 
coin, moneda. 
cold, frio (n. or adj.) ; constipado, 

resfriado. 
collar, cuello. 
college, colegio. 
color, color, m. 
come, venir ; — in, entrar ; — into, 

entrar en ; — down, bajar ; — 

down in price, rebajar ; — upon, 

encontrar, hallar ; — up, subir ; 

— out, salir ; — back, volver ; — 

in ! Adelante ! 



i8o 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



comedy, comedia. 

common, ordinario, comun. 

companion, compafiero. 

company, convidados (plu.). 

complete, complete 

completely, por complete 

compose (of), componer (de). 

comfort, comodidad, f. 

comfortable, comfortable, comodo. 

command, mandar. 

concerning, acerca de, con motivo 

de. 
condiment, condimento. 
congratulate (on), felicitar (por). 
consequently, por consiguiente. 
considerably, bastante. 
consist (of), consistir (en), 
construct, construir. 
consult, consultar. 
contain, contener. 
contained : be — in, caber, 
continue, seguir. 

contrary: on the — , al contrario. 
convenience, comodidad, f. 
cook, guisar ; cooking, cocina. 
cool, fresco. 
copper, cobre, m. 
Cordova, Cordoba. 
corner, esquina (outside) ; rincon, m. 

(inside), 
corridor, corredor, m. 
correspond, corresponder. 
cost, costar. 
costume, vestido, traje. 
cotton, algodon, m. 
cough, tos, f., toser. 
count, contar. 

country, pais, m. ; tierra, campo. 
couple, par, m. ; pareja (of persons) ; 

married — , un matrimonio. 
court, corte, f. ; patio. 
course, curso ; of — , por supuesto ; 

principal — , principio. 
cousin, primo, -a. 
cover (by), cubrir (de). 
cow, vaca ; cow-boy, vaquero. 
cross, cruz, f. ; cruzar. 
cry, grito, llorar. 
cup, taza. 
cupboard, armario. 



cure, curar. 

current, corriente ; be — , correr ; 
— month, mes actual. 

custom, costumbre, f. ; custom- 
house, aduana. 

cutler, cuchillero. 

cutlery store, cuchilleria. 

danger, peligro. 

dare, atreverse a. 

date, datar. 

daughter, hija. 

dawn, amanecer. 

day, dia, m. ; — before yesterday, 

antier ; — after to-morrow, pasado 

manana ; every — , todos los dias ; 

during the — , por el dia; this 

very — , hoy mismo. 
dead, muerto. 
deaf, sordo. 

deal: a great — , mucho. 
dear, caro, querido. 
December, diciembre, m. 
defer, diferir. 
degree, grado. 
delay, tardar. 
delicate, fino. 
dentist, dentista. 
departure, salida. 
depth, profundidad, f. 
design, modelo. 
desk, mesa de escribir. 
dessert, postres (m. plu.). 
devote (oneself to), dedicarse a. 
die, morir (se). 
difference, diferencia ; make a — , 

importar. 
digest, digerir. 
digestion, digestion, f. 
diligent, aplicado. 
diminish, rebajar. 
dine, almorzar (at noon), comer (at 

night), 
dining-room, comedor, m. 
dinner, almuerzo (at noon) ; comida 

(at night), 
dint: by — of, a fuerza de. 
direct, dirigir. 

dirty, sucio ; make — , ensuciar. 
dish, plato. 



VOCABULARY 



181 



dishevelled, despeinado. 

disobey, desobedecer. 

distance, distancia. 

distressed; be — , apurarse. 

divine, divino. 

do, hacer. 

Doctor, Doctor. 

doctor, medico. 

dog, perro, -a. 

dollar, duro, peso. 

door, puerta ; outer — , portal, m. 

doubt, duda, dudar. 

downstairs, abajo. 

dozen, docena. 

drawer, cajon, m. 

dress, traje, m., vestido. 

dress, vestir (se). 

dressed in, vestido de. 

drink, bebida, beber. 

drug store, botica. 

dull, triste, sordo. 

dumb, mudo. 

during, durante, por. 

each, cada; — one, cada uno, cada 

cual ; — other, uno a otro. 
ear, oreja. 
early, temprano ; five minutes — , con 

cinco minutos de anticipacion. 
earn, ganar. 
earth, tierra. 
East, el Este. 
easy, facil. 
eat, comer. 

eatables, comestibles (m. plu.). 
Edward, £duardo. 
egg, huevo. 
eighth, octavo, 
either ... or, 6 ... 6. 
Emma, Manuela. 

employee, dependiente, empleado. 
empty, desocupado (unoccupied) ; 

vacio. 
end, fin, m. ; terminar, concluir, aca- 

bar; — of March, fines de marzo. 
England, Inglaterra. 
English, ingles, -a. 
Englishman, ingles ; Englishwoman, 

inglesa. 
enjoy: — oneself, divertirse. 



enough, bastante. 

enthusiastic (over), aficionado (a). 

entire, entero. 

entreat, suplicar (a). 

entry, corredor, m. 

envelope, sobre, m. 

equal, igual. 

especial especial. 

especially, sobre todo, especialmente. 

establish, establecer. 

estate, hacienda. 

Europe, Europa. 

even, ni, ami. 

evening, noche, f. ; in the — , even- 
ings, por la noche; every — , todas 
las noches. 

every, cada, todo ; — one, cada uno, 
cada cual ; — day, todos los dias. 

everybody, todo el mundo. 

everything, todo. 

examine, registrar. 

example, ejemplo. 

except, excepting, fuera de. 

excess, exceso. 

excessive, excesivo. 

exchange, cambio, cambiar. 

excuse, perdonar. 

exercise, ejercicio. 

expect, esperar. 

expense, gasto ; expensive, caro. 

exterior, exterior (as noun, m.). 

extreme, excesivo. 

extremely, muy, sumamente. 

eye, ojo. 

eye-glasses, anteojos (plu.). 

fail: — to* dejar de. 

fall, caer ; — down, caerse. 

family, familia. 

famous, famoso. 

fan, abanico. 

far, lejos; as — as, hasta. 

face, cara. 

farm, hacienda. 

fashion, moda ; be the — , estilarse. 

fat, gordo. 

father, padre. 

fault, falta. 

favor, favor, m. 

fear, miedo, temer. 



1 82 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



leather, pluma. 

February, febrero. 

feel, sentir ; — well, sentirse bueno ; 
I don't feel like it, No me da la 
gana ; — the pulse, tomar el pulso. 

feeling, tacto. 

fever, calentura. 

feverish: be — , tener calentura. 

few, pocos, -as ; a — , algunos, unos. 

field, campo. 

fifth, quinto. 

fiance, -ee, novio, -a. 

fill, llenar. 

finally, al fin. 

find, hallar, encontrar. 

fine, magnifico, fino. 

finger, dedo ; ring — , dedo anular ; 
middle — , dedo del corazon ; in- 
dex — , dedo indice ; little — , dedo 
mefiique. 

finish, acabar, terminar, concluir. 

first, primer (o), antes. 

fish, pescado ; — dealer, pescadero. 

fish-market, pescaderia. 

fist, pufio. 

flee, huir. 

floor, piso. 

flour, harina. 

flower, flor, f. 

flushed, encendido. 

folks, gente, f. 

follow, seguir. 

following, siguiente. 

fond (of), aficionado a. 

food, comestibles (m. plu.). 

foot, pie ; on — , a pie. 

for, por, para, mediante ; pues 
(conj.). 

forbid, prohibir. 

fore, anterior. 

forehead, frente, f. 

foreign, extranjero. 

foreigner, extranjero, -a. 

forget, olivdar (a). 

forgive, perdonar. 

fork, tenedor, m. 

former, antiguo; the — , aquel. 

fortnight, quince dias. 

fortunate, afortunado. 

forward, adelante. 



found, establecer. 

fourth, cuarto. 

France, Francia. 

free, libre. 

freeze, helar. 

French, frances, -esa. 

Frenchman, Frenchwoman, frances, 

-esa. 
frequently, a menudo. 
Friday, viernes, m. 
fried, frito. 
friend, amigo, -a. 
from, de; — ... to, desde . . . 

hasta. 
front: in — of, delante de. 
frontier, frontera. 
frost, hielo. 
fruit, fruta (picked), fruto (on the 

tree), 
fun: make — of, burlarse de. 

gain, ganar. 

gay, alegre. 

gender, genero. 

gentleman, sefior, caballero; young 
— , sefiorito. 

genuine, lejitimo. 

German, aleman, -ana. 

Germany, Alemania. 

get, buscar (fetch) ; — to, llegar a ; 
— up, levantarse ; — used to, 
acostumbrarse a ; — a suit made, 
hacer hacer un traje. 

girl, muchacha, chica, nifia. 

give, dar ; — a play, representar una 
comedia. 

glad: be — , alegrarse. 

gladly, de buena gana: con mucho 
gusto. 

glass, vaso ; vidrio (material). 

glove, guante, m. 

go, ir, andar ; — away, marcharse, 
irse, partir; — back, volverse ; — 
down, bajar; — in, entrar ; — in- 
to, entrar en ; — out, salir ; — up, 
subir ; — towards, dirigirse a ; — 
to walk, ir a paseo, dar un paseo ; 
— to ride, pasearse en coche ; — 
over, repasar; — to bed, acostarse. 

God, Dios. 



VOCABULARY 



183 



gold, oro ; golden, de oro. 

gone: be all — , concluirse. 

good, bueno. 

Good bye, Adios. 

goodness, bondad, f. 

goods, generos (m. pi.) cotton — , 

algodones, tejidos de algodon. 
grace, gracia. 

grade, grado ; nota (in school). 
grammar, gramatica. 
grape, uva. 
gray, gris. 
great, gran(de). 
green, verde. 
greens, verdura. 
greet, saludar. 
grocer, especiero. 
grocery, especieria. 
guest, huesped ; invited — , convi- 

dado. 

haggle, regatear. 

hair, pelo. 

half, medio (adj.) ; mitad (n f.). 

hall, corredor, m. 

ham, jamon, m. 

hand, mano, f . ; — of a watch, aguja. 

handkerchief, pafiuelo. 

handsome, hermoso. 

handwriting, pufio, letra. 

happen, ocurrir ; — to be, encon- 
trarse, hallarse. 

happy, feliz. 

bard, dificil ; work — , trabajar 
mucho ; — cough, fuerte tos ; — 
cold, fuerte constipado. 

haste, prisa. 

hat, sombrero. 

have, tener, haber ; — to, tener que ; 
— on, tener puesto ; — a head- 
ache, tener dolor de cabeza. 

head, cabeza. 

health, salud, f. ; in good — , bueno 
de salud. 

healthy, sano. 

hear, oir, entender. 

hearing, oido. 

heart, corazon, m. 

heat, calor, f. ; calendar. 

heated, encendido, calentado. 



heaven, cielo. 

heel, talon, m. 

height, altura, alto. 

Hello! Hola! 

help, ayudar ; — oneself, ayudarse. 

Henry, Enrique. 

here, aqui (place where), ac? (place 

to which) ; — is, aqui tiene Vd. 
hide, esconder (se). 
high, alto, 
higher, superior, 
hinder, posterior, 
hit, pegar. 
hog, cerdo. 
holy, santo. 
home, a casa (direction) ; en casa 

(place where) ; at — , en casa. 
homely, feo. 
hope, esperar. 
horrible, horrible, 
horse, caballo. 

horseback: on — , a caballo. 
hose, calcetines (m. plu.). 
host, huesped. 
hotel, hotel, m. 
hour, hora. 

house, casa ; at the — ; en casa. 
how? como? que? que tal? de que 

modo? de que manera? 
how ! como ! que ! cuanto ! 
how, como (rel.). 
how long? cuanto tiempo? 
how much? how many? cuanto, -a. 

-os, -as. 
how much, how many, cuanto, -a, 

-os, -as. 
however, comoquiera que (conj.), 

sin embargo (adv.). 
human, humano. 
hunger, hambre, f. 
hurry, darse prisa ; be in a — , tener 

prisa. 
hurt, dolor, doler; My hand hurts, 

Me duele la mano. 
husband, esposo, marido. 

ice, hielo; helado (to eat), 
ice-cream, helado. 

idea: The — ! No faltaba mas! Va- 
ya! 



184 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



if, si ; — not, sino. 

ill, malo, enfermo. 

illness, enfermedad, f. 

imagine, figurarse ; just — , figurese 

Vd. 
immense, inmenso. 
importance, importancia. 
in, en, dentro de ; en casa ; de (after 

superl.). 
inch, pulgada. 
inclination, gana. 
indeed ! Si ! Vaya ! 
indicate, indicar. 
inferior, inferior, 
infinitely, infinito. 
inflamed, encendido. 
information, informes (m. pi.), 
inhabitant, habitante. # 

ink, tinta. 
inkstand, tintero. 
inside (of), dentro (de) ; interior, 

(m. as noun), 
insist (on), insistir, (en), 
instance; for — , por eiemplo. 
instruction, instruccion, f. 
insure, asegurar. 
intend, pensar. 
interesting, interesante. 
interior, interior (m. as noun), 
intestines, intestinos (m. pi.), 
introduce, presentar* 
invite (to), invitar (a). 
Isidore, Isidro. 
Italy, Italia. 
Italian, italiano. 

jacket, chaqueta.. 
James, Diego, 
janitor, portero, -a. 
January, enero. 
jewel, alhaja. 
John, Juan. 
Joseph, Jose. 
journey, viaje, m. 
July, julio. 
June, junio. 

keep, guardar ; — on, seguir. 
kilogram, kilogramo, kilo, 
kind, amable (adj.) ; clase, f., 
especie, f., genero. 



kindness, amabilidad, f. 

king, rey. 

kiss, beso, besar. 

kitchen, cocina. 

knock, llamar. 

know, saber, conocer ; — how, saber. 

knowledge, conocimiento. 

lace, encaje, m. 

lack, falta, faltar. 

lady, sefiora ; young — , setiorita. 

jamb, cordero. 

lame, cojo. 

land, tierra ; native — , patria. 

language, lengua, idioma, m. 

large, grande. 

larger, largest, mayor. 

last, ultimo, postrer(o) ; pasado 

(past) ; at — , al fin ; — night, 

anoche. 
late, tarde ; five minutes iate, con 

cinco minutos de retraso. 
latter: the — , este. 
laugh, reir(se) ; — at, reirse de. 
lawful, lejitimo. 
lawyer, abogado. 
lazy, perezoso. 
leap-frog, saltacarnero. 
learn, aprender ; — about, saber, 
learned, sabio. 
least : at — , lo menos, a lo menos, 

por lo menos. 
leave, dejar, salir, partir, marcharse, 

irse ; — off, dejar de. 
left, izquierdo ; on the — , to the — . 

a la izquierda. 
leg, pierna. 
legitimate, lejitimo. 
lemon, limon, m. 
length, longitud, f. ; largo. 
less, menos. 
lesson, leccion, f. 
let, dejar, permitir. 
letter, carta ; — box, buzon, m. ; — 

carrier, cartero. 
library, biblioteca. 
lie, mentira, mentir ; — down, acos- 

tarse ; — on, estar en. 
life, vida. 
lift, levantar. 



VOCABULARY 



185 



light, claro; luz, f. (noun); encen- 

der (vb.). 
lighten, relampaguear. 
likeable, simpatico. 
limb, miembro (of body) ; rama (of 

tree, etc.) 
linen, hilo, lienzo, ropa blanca. 
lip, labio. 
list, lista. 
listen, escuchar. 

little, poco (adv.) ; pequefio, (adj.). 
live, vivir. 
liver, higado. 
loin, lomo. 
long, largo, mucho tiempo ; how — ? 

cuanto tiempo? 
look, mirar; — at, mirar ; — for, 

buscar ; — like, parecer a ; — out 

on, dar a ; — over, repasar ; Look 

out ! Cuidado ! 
lose, perder. 

Louis, Louise, Luis, Luisa. 
love, amor, m. ; amar, querer. 
lovely, divino, precioso. 
low, bajo. 
lower, inferior, 
lunch, almuerzo, almorzar 
lung, pulmon, m. 
lying, mentira. 

Madam, Sefiora. 

Madrid: of — , madrileno. 

mail, correo ; — a letter, echar una 

carta al correo. 
majority, mayor parte, 
make, hacer ; — fun of, burlarse de. 
mamma, mama. 

man, hombre ; — alive! Hombre ! 
manner, manera, modo. 
many, muehos, -as ; so — , tantos, -as. 
March, marzo. 
mark, nota (in school), 
market, mercado. 
marry, casar, casarse con. 
Mary, Maria, 
master, dueno. 

match, fosforo ; wax — , cerilla. 
mathematics, matematica. 
matter, asunto, cosa ; to — , impor- 

tar; dangerous — , cosa de peligro. 



mature, maduro. 

May, mayo. 

meal, comida ; meals, la comida. 

mean, significar, querer decir. 

means : by — of, mediante. 

meat, carne, f. ; — market, carni- 

ceria. 
medicine, medicina. 
meet, encontrar. 
melon, melon, m. 
member, miembro (of body) ; socio 

(of club, etc.). 
mention, mencionar, nombrar. 
message, recado. 
metal, metal, m. 
metre, metro. 
Mexico, Mejico. 
middle, centro ; in the — of, en 

medio de ; — of July, mediados 

de julio. 
midnight, medianoche, f. 
midsummer, estio, m. 
milk, leche, f. 
minute, minuto ; this very — , ahora 

mismo. 
Miss, Sefiorita. 
mistake, error, m. 
mistaken: be — , equivocarse. 
modern, moderno. 
moment, momento. 
Monday, lunes, m. 
money, dinero, moneda. 
month, mes, m. ; per — , al mes. 
more, mas ; — or less, poco mas 6 

menos. 
morning, mafiana ; in the — , morn- 
ings, por la mafiana ; become — , 

amanecer. 
most, mas, mayor parte de. 
mother, madre. 
motive, motive 

mountain, montafia ; — range, sierra, 
moustache, bigote, m. 
mouth, boca. 
move, andar, mover (se). 
much, mucho ; very — , muchisimo ; 

so — , tanto ; as — as, cuanto, 

tanto como ; too — , demasiado. 
muscle, musculo. 
museum, museo. 



i86 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



must, tener que. 
mute, mudo. 

name, nombre, m. ; nombrar ; What 
is your — ? Como sc llama Vd.? 
Cual es su gracia? 

napkin, servilleta. 

narrow, estrecho. 

national, nacional. 

native, natural (n.) ; — land, patria. 

natural, natural. 

near, cerca de ; — by, cerca. 

necessary, necesario, preciso. 

neck, cuello. 

necklace, collar, m. 

need, necesitar, hacer falta. 

needle, aguja. 

negro, negro. 

neighbor, neighboring, vecino, -a. 

neither, tampoco ; — ... nor, ni 

... ni. 

nephew, sobrino. 

never, nunca, jamas ; — in my life, 
en mi vida. 

nevertheless, sin embargo. 

new, nuevo. 

news, noticias (plu.) ; piece of — , 
noticia. 

newspaper, periodico. 

next, proximo, siguiente. 

nice, simpatico. 

niece, sobrina. 

night, noche, f. ; at — , por la noche ; 
last — , anoche ; every — , todas 
las noches ; become — , anochecer. 

ninth, nono, noveno. 

no, no, ningun(o), tampoco; — one, 
nadie. 

nobody, nadie, ninguno. 

noise, ruido. 

none, ningun(o). 

noon, mediodia, m. 

North, el Norte. 

North America, America del Norte. 

nose, nariz, f. 

not, no ; — ever, no . . . nunca ; — 
anything, no . . . nada ; — any- 
body, no . . . nadie ; — either, ni 
. . . ni, no . . . tampoco. 
note, nota, notar. 



nothing, nada, no . . . nada. 

notice, notar. 

noun, sustantivo, nombre. 

novelty, novedad, f. 

November, noviembre, m. 

now, ahora ; just — , ahora mismo. 

number, numero. 

obey, obedecer (a). 

object, objeto. 

occupy, ocupar. 

occur, ocurrir. 

October, octubre, m. 

of, de. 

office, despacho, oficina. 

often, a menudo. 

Oh! Ay! 

old, viejo ; I am ten years — , Ten- 

go diez afios. 
older, oldest, mayor, 
olive, aceituna ; — oil, aceite, m. 
omelet, tortilla, 
omnibus, omnibus, m. 
on, en. con motivo de ; have — , 

tener puesto. 
once, una vez ; at — , en seguida, 

luego. 
one, uno, -a ; each — , cada uno, 

cada cual ; — armed, manco ; — 

eyed, tuerto. 
only, solamente, no mas que, no . . . 

sino. 
open, abrir ; abierto (adj.); — on, 

dar a. 
or, 6, u. 
orange, naranja. 
order, orden, f. ; mandar ; in — to, 

para (with inf.), para que (with 

subj.) ; In — that, para que. 
ordinarily, por lo comun. 
ordinary, ordinario. 
organ, organo. 
other, otro, demas. 
otherwise, de otra manera. 
Ouch! Ay! 
ought, deber. 
outcome, resultado. 
outer, exterior, 
outside, fuera (adv.) ; — of, fuera 

de ; exterior n., m. 



VOCABULARY 



i8 7 



over, sobre; be all — , concluirse. 
overcoat, gaban. m. 
owe, deber. 
own, mismo. 
owner, dueno. 

package, paquete, m. 

page, pagina. 

pain, dolor, m., doler. 

painting, pintura. 

pair, par, m. 

palace, palacio. 

palm, palma. 

pantry, despensa. [secante. 

paper, papel, m. ; blotting — , papel 

pardon, perdon, m. 

Paris, Paris. 

parlor, sala. 

part, parte, f. 

pass, pasar. 

pattern, modelo. . 

pay, pagar; — attention to hacer 

caso a. 
peach, melocoton, m. 
pearl, perla. 
peasant, aldeano. 
pen, pluma. 
pencil, lapiz, m. 
people, pueblo, gente, f. 
pepper, pimenton, m. (spice) ; pi- 

miento, (fruit), 
per, por; three times — day, tres 

veces al dia ; five pesos per day, 

cinco pesos por dia. 
perfectly, perfectamente. 
perhaps, quizas, tal vez (often with 

subj.). 
permitir, dejar, permitir. 
person, persona, f. 
Peter, Pedro. 
Philip, Felipe, 
phrase, frase, f. 
physician, medico, 
pick, escoger. 
piece, bulto ; pedazo (broken) ; tro- 

zo (slice, etc.). 
pig, cerdo. 
place, punto, lugar (n. m.) ; poner 

(vb.). 
plate, plato. 



play, comedia, n. 

play, jugar; jugar a (game); tocar 
(instrument) ; representar (show). 

plaything, juguete, m. 

please, gustar, placer, hacer el favor, 
tener la bondad, servirse. 

pleasure, gusto, placer, m. 

plenty: a — , bastante. 

point, punto. 

polite, cortes ; — ly, cortesmente. 

pomegranate, granada. 

poor, pobre. 

pork, carne de cerdo. 

porter, mozo. 

postal, postal. 

Portuguese, portugues, -esa. 

possible, posible. 

post-office, correo. 

postpone, diferir. 

potato, patata. 

pound, libra. 

pour, echar. 

prefer, preferir. 

prepare, preparar. 

present, actual ; at the — time, 
actualmente. 

prescription, receta. 

president, presidente. 

pretty, bonito. 

price, precio. 

priest, cura. 

principal, principal. 

print, imprimir. 

private, particular. 

probable, probable. 

profession, profesion, f. 

professor, catedratico. 

profit, aproyechar. 

prohibit, prohibir. 

proprietor, amo, -a. 

proverb, refran, m. 

promise, prometer. 

public, publico. 

pulse, pulso. 

punish, castigar. 

pupil, discipulo (of a teacher) ; alum- 
no (of a school). 

purchase, compra. 

pure, puro. 

put. poner ; — on, ponerse. 



i88 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



quantity, cantidad, f. 
quarter, cuarto. 
queen, reina. 
question, preguntar ; 

una pregunta. 
quite, bastante. 



ask a 



hacer 



railroad, ferrocarril, m. 

rain, lluvia, Hover. 

rainy, lluvioso. 

raise, levantar. 

ranch, hacienda. 

rare, raro. 

reach, llegar a. 

read, leer. 

reading, lectura. 

ready, listo. 

real, lejitimo. 

rear, posterior. 

recall, acordarse de, recordar. 

receipt, receta ; recibo (for payment). 

receive, recibir. 

recitation, clase, f. 

red, encarnado. 

recommend, recomendar. 

remove (from), quitar (a), sacar 

(de). 
regret, sentir. 
relate, contar. 
relative, pariente, -ta. 
remain, quedar. 
remedy, remedio. 

remember, acordarse de, recordar. 
remind, recordar. 
republic, republica. 
resemble, parecer a. 
resort: bathing — , bafios. 
responsibility, responsibihdad, f. 
rest, descansar. 
rest, demas. 

restaurant, restauran, m. 
result, resultado. 

return, regreso, vuelta; volver(se). 
review, repasar. 
rich, rico. 
ride, paseo ; take a — , pasearse (en 

coche, a caballo, en automovil, en 

bicicleta). 
right, derecho ; on the — , to the — , 

a la derecha ; be — , tener razon. 



ripe, maduro. 

road, camino: be on the right — to, 

ir bien para, 
roast, asar; — meat, asado ; — beef, 

rosbif, m. 
roof, tejado. 

room, habitacion, cuarto. 
rotten, podrido. 
royal, real, 
rowdy, pillo. 
ruin, arruinar. 
rule, regla. 
run, correr; — away, huir. 

sad, triste. 

safe, seguro. 

Saint, San, m., Santa, f. 

salad, ensalada. 

salt, sal, f. 

same, mismo ; it's all the — to me, 

lo mismo me da. 
sample, muestra. 
satisfied, contento. 
Saturday, sabado, m. 
save, salvar; guardar (keep), 
saw, sierra. 
say, decir; — good bye, despedirse, 

decir adios ; I should — so ! Ya 

lo creo ! 
scamp, pillo. 

school, escuela ; boarding — , colegio. 
science, ciencia. 
sea, mar, m. 
season, estacion, f. 
seat, asiento. 
seated, sentado. 

second-, segundo (adj. and n.). 
see, ver ; let's — , a ver. 
seek, buscar. 
seem, parecer. 
select, selecto, escoger. 
self, mismo. 
sell, vender, 
.seller, vendedor. 
send, enviar, mandar. 
sense, sentido. 
sentence, frase, f. 
September, setiembre, m. 
servant, criado, -a ; servidor, -a. 
serve, servir. 



VOCABULARY 



189 



seventh, septimo, setimo. 

Seville, Sevilla. 

shade, sombra ; in the — , a la som- 

bra. 
shame, vergiienza. 
sharp, agudo. 
shawl, manta. 
sheet, sabana. 
shelf, estante, m. 
shirt, camisa. 
shoe, zapato ; — dealer, zapatero ; — 

store, zapateria. 
shop, tienda. 
short, corto ; bajo (of people) ; in — ', 

en fin. 
shortly, luego. 
should, deber (ought), 
shoulders, espaldas (f. plu.). 
shout, grito. 
show, . indicar, mostrar, ensefiar ; — 

window, escaparate, m. 
shower, aguacero. 
shut, cerrar; cerrado (adj.). 
sick, enfermo, malo. 
side, lado ; on the other — , al otro 

lado. 
sideboard, aparador, m. 
sidewalk, acera. 
sight, vista, 
signify, significar. 
silent, mudo, silencioso. 
silk, seda ; silken, de seda. 
silver, plata. 

sin, pecado ; pecar (vb.). 
since, desde (prep.) ; desde que 

(conj.). 
sing, contar. 
sister, hermana. 
sit: — down, sentarse. 
sitting-roorn, despacho. 
sixth, sexto, sesto. 
skill, habilidad, f. 
skin, cutis, m. 
skull, craneo. 
sky, cielo. 

sleep, suefio, dormir. 
sleeve, manga, 
slender, delgado. 
slice, trozo. 
slowly, despacio. 



smell, olfato . (sense) ; olor, m. 

(odor), 
small, chico, pequefio. 
smaller, smallest, menor. 
smart, listo. 
smoke, fumar ; — a pipe, fumar en 

pipa. 
sneeze, estornudar. 
snow, nieve, nevar. 
so, tan (adv.) ; asi, por consiguiente 

(conj.) ; and — , conque. 
society, sociedad, f. 
some, algun(o), -a, -os, -as; — or 

other, alguno que otro. 
something, algo, alguna cosa. 
somewhat, algo. 
son, hijo. 
scon, luego, pronto, en seguida, al 

instante ; as — as, luego que ; as 

— as possible, cuanto antes, 
sorry: be — , sentir. 

soul, alma. 

soup, sopa. 

sour, agrio. 

South, el Sur. 

South America, America del Sur. 

Sud America. 
Spain, Espafia. 
Spaniard, espaiiol, -a. 
Spanish, espafiol, -a. 
speak, hablar. 
species, especie, m. 
spectacles, anteojos, pi. 
speech, habla. 
speed, velocidad, f. 
spell, rato. 
spend, gastar, pasar. 
spice, especia. 
spinal, espinal ; — column, espinazo ; 

— cord, medula espinal. 
splendid, magninco. 

spoil, arruinar. 
spoon, cuchara. 
Spring, primavera. 
square, plaza; cuadrado (adj.). 
stairs, escalera. 
stamp, sello. 

standing: of long — , antiguo ; — up, 
de pie. 



190 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



state, estado. 

station, estacion, f. 

stay, estancia ; quedar (se) ; — in 

bed, guardar cama. 
steam, vapor, m. 
steamer, vapor, m. ; — rug", manta 

de viaje. 
stew, cocido. 
stick, pegar. 
still, todavia. aun, aun. 
stock, surtidb. 

stomach, estomago, vientre, m. 
stone, piedra. 
stop, parar, dejar de. 
store, tienda; department — , bazar, 

m. ; — keeper, tendero. 
story, piso (of a house) ; cuento 

(that is told), 
stout, gordo. 
straight, directo. 
straw, paja. 
strawberry, fresa. 
street, calle, f. ; State St., calle del 

Estado. 
street-car, tranvia, m. ; in a — , en 

tranvia. 
strike, dar, pegar. 
strong, fuerte. 
student, estudiante. 
study, estudio, estudiar. 
stuff, (woven), tejido, tela, 
style, modelo, moda (fashion) ; be in 

— , estilarse; in the Spanish — , a 

la espafiola. 
such, such a, tal, (plu. tales), 
suffer, sufrir. 
sugar, azucar, m. 
suit, vestido, traje, m. 
summer, verano. 
sun, sol, m. ; in the — , al sol. 
Sunday, domingo. 
superior, superior. 

sure, cierto, seguro ; to be — , claro. 
surprise, sorprender. 
sweet, dulce ; sweets, dulces, m. plu. 
sweetheart, novio, -a ; corazon, alma, 

vida (in address). 

table, mesa ; table-cloth, mantel, m. 
tailor, sastre. 



take, tomar, quedarse con, llevar; — 

off, quitar; — up, subir ; — out, 

sacar. 
talk, hablar. 
tall, alto, grande. 
taste, gusto. 
tea, te, m. 
leach, ensefiar. 
teacher, maestro, -a. 
tear, romper, 
teaspoon, cucharilla. 
teaspoonful, cucharadita. 
telegram, telegrama, m. 
telegraph, telegrafiar. 
telephone, telefono, telefonar. 
tell, decir, contar ; — lies, mentir. 
temperature, temperatura. 
tenth, decimo. 
terrible, horrible. 

than, que, de, del que, de lo que. 
thank, agradecer, dar las gracias ; 

thanks, gracias. 
that, que (conj. or rel.) ; — which, 

lo que. 
the . . . the, cuanto . . . tanto. 
theatre, teatro. 
there, alii (place where) ; alia (place 

to which) ; — is, hay. 
thermometer,' termometro. 
thick, grueso. 
thickness, espesura. 
then, entonces, pues. 
thin, delgado. 
thing, cosa ; — to worry about, cosa 

de cuidado. 
think, creer, pensar. 
third, tercer(o). 
thirst, sed, f. 
thread, hilo. 
throat, garganta. 
through, por. 
throw, echar. 
thumb, dedo pulgar. 
thunder, trueno, tronar ; — storm, 

tempestad, f. 
Thursday, jueves, m. 
thus, asi, de esta manera. 
ticket, billete, m. 
tight, estrecho. 



VOCABULARY 



IQI 



time, tiempo, rato, vez, f. ; from — 
to — , de vez en cuando ; at the 
present — , en este momento, en 
el momento actual; What — is it? 
iQue hora es? have a good — , 
divertirse. 

tired, cansado ; be — , estar cansado. 

tiresome: be — , ser cansado. 

toast, tostadas (f. plu.). 

tobacco, tabaco ; — store, estanco. 

toe, dedo del pie; big — , dedo 
grande del pie. 

to-day, hoy. 

tomato, tomate, m. 

to-mcrrow, mafiana. 

tongue, lengua. 

together, juntos, -as. 

to-night, esta noche. 

too, — much, demasiado. 

tooth, diente, m. ; muela (molar). 

towards, hacia. 

towel, toalla. 

town, lugar, m. ; pueblo. 

toy, juguete, m. 

train, tren, m. ; accommodation — , 
tren mixto. 

translate, traducir. 

transport, transportar. 

travel, viajar, andar. 

traveler, viajero. 

traveling-bag, maleta. 

treat, tratar. 

tree, arbol, m. 

trip, viaje, m. 

trouble, molestia, molestar ; have 
heart — , estar enfermo del cora- 
zcn. 

trousers, pantalon, m. 

trout, trucha. 

true, verdadero. 

trunk, haul, m. ; tronco. 

truth, verdad, f. 

try, tratar de. 

Tuesday, martes, m. 

turn, volver. 

twice, dos veces. 

two, dos ; the — , los (las) dos. 

ugly, feo. 

umbrella, paraguas, (m. s.). 



unbecoming: be — , sentar mal, ir 

mal, caer mal. 
uncle, tio. 
under, debajo de. 
underclothes, ropa interior, 
understand, comprender, entender. 
unfortunately, desgraciadamente. 
united, unido ; the — States, los 

Estados Unidos. 
university, universidad, f. 
unmarried, soltero, -a. 
unoccupied, desocupado. 
unripe, verde. 
until, hasta (prep.) ; hasta que 

(conj.). 
up: — to, hasta. 
upper, superior, 
upstairs, arriba. 
use, uso, emplear; be used to, acos- 

tumbrar a. 
utensil, utensilio. 

various, varies, -as. 

veal, ternera. 

vein, vena. 

velvet, terciopelo. 

verb, verbo. 

very, muy ; I am — cold, Tengo 

mucho frio. 
vice versa, vice versa, 
view, vista, 
village, pueblo, aldea. 
villager, aldeano, lugarefio 
vinegar, vinagre, m. 
visit, visita, visitar ; be on a — , estar 

de visita. 
vital, vital, 
voice, voz, f. 

wait, esperar, aguardar. 

waiter, mozo, camarero. 

wake, despertar; — up, despertarse. 

walk, paseo ; andar a pie ; take a — , 

pasearse, dar un paseo. 
want, querer, desear, tener ganas. 
wardrobe, armario. 
warm, caliente. 
wash, lavar (se). 
waste, gastar. 
watch, mirar ; reloj, m. ; — maker, 

relojero: — maker's, relojeria. 



192 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



water, agua. 

way, modo, manera ; in this — , de 

este modo, de este- manera, asi ; 

in another — , de otra manera ; in 

what — ? de que manera? to be on 

the right — for, ir bien para; this 

— , por aqui; what — ? por donde? 

a long — off, lejos ; a long — , 

mucha distancia. 
weak, debil. 

wearing (dressed in), vestido de. 
weather, tiempo. 
Wednesday, miercoles, m. 
week, semana ;• a — ago, hace una 

semana. 
weigh, pesar. 
weight, peso. 

well, bien (adv.) ; pues (conj.). 
West, el Oeste. 
what? que? como? cual? 
what, lo que (rel.). 
whatever, lo que, cualquiera cosa 

que. 
when? cuando? 
when, cuando. 

whenever, cuandoquiera que. 
where? donde? 
wherever, dondequiera que. 
whether, si. 
which? cual? 

which, que, el que, el cual. 
whichever, cualquiera que. 
while, mientras que (conj.) ; rato 

(n.). 
white, bianco, 
who? quien? 
who, que. 

whoever, quienquiera que. 
whole, todo, entero. 
wholesome, sano. 
whom? a quien? 
whose? de quien? cuyo? 
whose, cuyo. 
why? por que (cause) ; para que 

(purpose) ; a que (with vb. of 

motion). 



why, si. 

wicked, feo, malo. 

wide, ancho. 

widower, widow, viudo, -a. 

width, anchura, ancho. 

wife, mujer, esposa, sefiora. 

will, querer. 

wind, viento. 

window, ventana. 

win, ganar. 

wine, vino. 

winter, invierno. 

wish, desear, querer. 

with, con. 

within,- dentro (adv.) ; dentro de 

(prep.). 
without, sin (prep.) ; sin que (conj.). 
woman, mujer. 

wood, madera ; wooden, de madera. 
wool, lana ; woolen, de lana. 
word, palabra. 

work, trabajo (n.) ; trabajar. 
world, mundo. 
worry, apurarse ; don't — , pierda 

Vd. cuidado. 
worse, worst, peor. 
worth : be — , valer ; How much is 

this — ? iCuanto vale esto? 
wrapper, sobre, m. 
write, escribir. 
writing-table, mesa de escribir. 

yard, vara (measure). 

yam, hilo. 

year, afio ; three times a — , tres 

veces al afio. 
yellow, amarillo. 
yes, si. 

yesterday, ayer. 
yet, todavia, aun, aun ; not — , aun 

no, todavia no. 
young, ioven; — man or woman, 

joven ; — chap, mozuelo. 
younger, youngest, menor. 

zero, cero. 



INDEX 



a before personal obj., 56, 180; with 
prepositional form of personal 
pron., 66; with indirect obj., 24; 
expresses "and" after ir, 62 a ; with 
verbs meaning "to ask," "buy," 
150; with names of places, 63. 

abbreviations: D., Da., Sr., Sra., 95 
note ; V., VV., 27 c. 

acabar, use, 120. 

accent, 7-8 ; on adverbs in -mente, 
155a; on verb forms taking ob- 
ject pron. as suffix, 65, 113 note. 

acordarse and recordar, 213 

acostumbrarse a, to express habitual 
action, 72 a. 

acute accent, 7-8. 

adjectives: agreement, 33, 58; num- 
ber, 34; gender, 35; position, 36, 
in, 192; used as nouns, 37; lose 
final letter, in, 193; comparison, 
94, 174, 175; of nationality, 37 a; 
of quantity, 36 a ; vary in mean- 
ing used with ser or estar, 47 B, 
d, note b. 

adverbs: in -mente, 155; comparison, 
173, 174; si and no, 182; nunca, 
jamas, 181, ni, tampoco, 232, aun, 
197. 

age, with tener, 40 ; with mayor and 
menor, 219. 

agradecer, use, 14&. 

agreement, of pronoun with verb, 27 ; 
of adj. with noun, 33, 58. 

ai with infinitive, 85 a, b. 

alphabet, 1 ; names of letters, p. 8. 

andar: conj., 525; contrasted with 
ir, 205. 

antiguo, 220. 

article: see indefinite article, and 
definite article. 

asir: conj., 526. 

aun, 197. 



auxiliaries : ir, 62 a ; haber, 43, 503 ; 
estar, 504 ; ser, 207, 503 ; not to 
be separated from verb, 44 a. 

"by," after a passive, 207 a. 

caber: conj., 527. 

cada, cada uno, cada cual, 194 a. 

caer: conj., 528; use, 234. 

capital letters, 9. 

cardinal points, 145. 

causative construction, 161. 

ciento loses -to, 156 a. 

comparison: of adjectives, 94, 174, 
175; of adverbs, 173, 174; see 
"than," 175. 

compound tenses, 44, 502. 

concluir: conj., 523; use, 218. 

conditional: forms and use, 90, 91, 
128, 178 b. 

conditional perfect: 93, 172c, 178b. 

conditions: in general, 128 note; ex- 
pressed by pres. part., 97; con- 
trary to fact, 128, 172 c. 

conjunctions: ni, 232; sino, 195; y 
(e), p. 101, note; 6 (u), 232a; 
that take subj., 133. 

conocer: conj., 513; contrasted with 
saber, 144 a. 

consonants, 4, 5, 12 f. 

correlatives: the former . . . the lat- 
ter, 153; the more . . . the more, 
221 ; ni . . . ni, 232. 

continued action: expressed by pres- 
ent, 22 ; imperfect, 70 b ; see also 
504. 

cual, 80. 

cualquiera, 147. 

cuyo, 176. 

dar: conj., 530; in idioms, 196. 
days of the week, 131. 
deber: use, 30 b; takes directly de- 
pendent infin. s 105. 



194 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



decir: conj., 531. 

defective verbs, 548. 

definite article : forms and agree- 
ment, 15; contractions, 15 b; used 
with adj., used substantively, 37; 
with names of countries, 82 ; with 
names of languages, 37 a; with 
titles, 95 ; with names of seasons, 
131; with cardinal points, 145; in 
substitute poss. expressions, 50, 53 ; 
for poss. with parts of the body, 
89 ; with indir. obj. to express 
poss., 169; with nouns used in 
general sense, 152; with abstract 
nouns, 152 a; with infinitives, 
152b; with noun in app. with a 
personal pron., 183 ; with expres- 
sions of physical characteristic, 
214; in time expressions, 132; for 
personal or demonst. pronoun, 154; 
with modified names of countries 
or people, 238 ; with escuela and 
casa, 63 ; in expressing price, 228 ; 
omitted before noun in app., 119; 
omitted before numeral after a title, 
236 a; omitted with poss. pron. in 
the predicate, 52 a ; neuter lo, 
117a; lo used with todo, 189 c. 

dejar, 212. 

demonstrative adjectives : forms and 
use, 59. 

demonstrative pronouns : forms and 
use, 60; neuter, 117c; as correla- 
tives, 153- 

desear: with infin., 105. 

desde (que) in time expressions 
187 e. 

dimensions, 235. 

diminutive suffixes, 231. 

diphthongs, 3. 

distance, with haber, 146. 

"do," auxiliary: 22 f 25c, note: 182. 

Don, Dona, 95. 

-ducir: conj., 529. 

endings of the verb, 19 ; complete 

table of, 501. 
estar: conj., 532; contrasted with 

ser, 47 ; as auxiliary, 504. 

feminine : see gender. 



future indicative, 90, 91 ; irregular, 
92; expresses conjecture, 178 b. 

future perfect indicative, 93, 178 b. 

future perfect subj., 172, 172 c. 

future subjunctive, 138, 139, 140; ir- 
regular, 141. 

gender: or nouns, 13; of adjectives. 

35- 
greetings, Ex. XXI. 
gustar: use, 68. 

haber: conj., 533; as auxiliary, 43, 
502 ; impersonal, 43 a ; expresses 
distance, 146; expresses impersonal 
obligation, 163; with de and inf., 
163 a. 

hacer: conj., 534; causative use, 161; 
in time expressions, 187; expresses 
weather, 137. 

hacer falta: use, 168. 

imperative: 142, 222; subjunctive 
used for, 122, 222 b. 

imperfect indicative, 69, 70. 

imperfect subj., 125; use, 126; in 
conditions, 128; irregular, 127. 

impersonal verbs, 202 ; impersonal 
use of 3d pers. plural, 81 ; with 
indirect obj., 190; with subj., 102. 

inceptive verbs, 513. 

indefinite article: forms, j6; repeat- 
ed, 16 a; omitted with predicate 
noun, 96 ; in certain exclamations, 
204 ; in expressions of a general 
character, 216; with otro, 194; 
may not follow tal, 171 ; used with 
cualquiera, 147. 

indefinite pronouns and adjectives : 
negative, 135; cualquiera, 147; 
uno, 151; tal, 171; todo, 189; otro, 
194; cada, 194 A; reciprocal use 
of uno a otro, 200. 

indicative: contrasted with subj., 99. 

infinitive, 18, 19, 20; equivalent to 
I£ng. pres. part, after prepositions, 
85 ; with para, 31 ; dependent on 
verbs, 105 ; after expressions of 
quantity and que, 136; preceded 
by article, 152 b; after hacer and 
mandar, 161. 



INDEX 



195 



interrogative pronoun: que and cual, 

80; cuyo, 176. 
interrogative words: come first in 

sentence, 32. 
ir: conj., 535; use, 62 a, 234, 504; 

contrasted with andar, 205. 
irregular past participles, 549. 
irregular verbs, 512-550. 
"it," 38 note ; 47 B, d. 

jamas, 181. 
joven, 220. 
jugar: conj., 516; use, 226. 

language, names of, 37 a. 
leave-taking, Ex. XXI. 
list of irregular verbs, 540. 

mandar: used causatively, 161 a. 
mayor, menor, 219. 
mil, millon, 156 b. 
mismo, 112. 
money, 227. 

moods: see name of mood. 
months, 131. 

"must:" expressed by tener que, 
30 a. 

nada, nadie, 135. 

nationality: adjectives of, 37a; suf- 
fixes indicating, 239. 

negative words : nada, nadie, . nin- 
guno, 135; nunca, jamas, 181; ni, 
tampoco, 232; no, 182. 

neuter, 117; relative pron., 160; per- 
sonal pron. 117 b. 

ni, 22,2. 

ninguno, 135; loses o, in. 

no, 25 note; 182. 

nouns: gender, 13; number, 14, note 
to vocab. XXIX ; special use of 
masc. plu., 54; special use of sing., 
237 ; does not vary in form for 
case, 231; formation of poss., 17; 
as indirect object, 24; as personal 
object, 56, 68, 180; expression of 
material, etc., 55, , 191 ; may not 
be omitted in possessive const., 
57 ; collective nouns, 203 ; see suf- 
fixes. 



number: of nouns, 14; of adjectives, 
34- 

numerals : cardinal, 39, 87, 156; or- 
dinals, 236. 

nunca, 181. 

6, u, 6 ... 6, 232. 

obligation: expressed by tener que, 

30 a; haber, 163; by deber, 30 b. 
oir: conj., 536; use, 188. 
orthographical changing verbs, 73, 

505-511. 
otro, 194. 

para: with indirect obj., 24; with 
rnfin., 32; with prep, form of pers. 
pron., 116 c. 
parecer: use 168. 
participle : see present participles and 

past participles, 
passive, 503, 207 ; passive absolute 
const., 208; reflexive subst. for, 
210, 211. 
past definite indie, 69, 70 ; irregular 

84. 
past participle: see 42, 44; in com- 
pound tenss, 502 ; in passive, 207, 
503 ; with estar, 209 ; in absolute 
const., 208; with que and past 
def., 179 b; irregular, 549. 
perfect indicative, 44. 
perfect subjunctive, 172, 172 a. 
perfect of the past def., 179. 
personal objective, 56, 68, 180. 
personal pronouns : 

subject forms : 26, 27 ; omission, 
28 ; intimate forms, 27 a ; usted, 
27 b, c, d; nos, vos, 199 a; neu- 
ter ello, 117 b. 
prepositional forms : 61 ; used with 
regular object forms, 66, 115; 
used alone as object, it6; neu- ' 
ter, ello, 117b; used reilexively, 
76 a. 
object forms : 64 ; use, 64 note ; 
position, 65, 113, 121 b, 122, 
222 a, b; double const., 66, 115; 
used reflexively, 76, 77 ; used im- 
personally, 162; indirect obj. 
used to express possession, 169; 



196 



SPANISH GRAMMAR 



indirect obj. with impersonal 
verbs, 190; dative of interest, 
199c; neuter forms, 117 b. 

pluperfect indicative, 74. 

pluperfect subjunctives, 172, 172 b. 

plural : see number. 

poder: conj., 537; takes dependent 
infin., 105. 

poner: conj., 538; use, 170a. 

position: of obj. pronouns, 65, 113, 
121 b, 122, 222 a, b; of reflexive 
pronoun, yy. 

possession expressed by def. art. and 
indirect obj., 169. 

possessive adjectives: forms, 48; 
use, 49 ; substitutes for su, 50 ; 
the long forms, 167; article used 
in place of, 89. 

possessive pronoun: forms, 51; use, 
52 ; substitutes for el suyo, 53 ; 
neuter, 1 1 7 d. 

predicate adj. : position in interrog. 
sentence, 41. 

prepositions : general statement, 
235 A; before dependent infin., 
105; clauses introduced by, 165; 
never omitted before noun as in- 
direct obj., 24, note. 

present indicative, 21, 22; used for 
future or past, 178 a. 

present participles : 45 ; with clause 
equal to condition, 97 ; used in 
progressive conjugation, 47 A, c, 
y2 and 504. 

present subjunctive, 100; use, 103; 
used for imperative, 122, 222 b. 

price, idiomatic expression of, 228. 

primero; loses o, in. 

progressive conjugation : see 47 a, c ; 
72; 504. 

prometer: use, 224. 

pronoun : see personal pronoun, pos- 
sessive pronoun, demonstrative 
pronoun, interrogative pronoun, rel- 
ative pronoun, indefinite pronoun. 

pronunciation, 1-12; irregularities of, 
1 1 ; exercises in, page 7. 

punctuation, 10. 

purpose: with para and inf., 31; 
with para que and subj., 133. 



que, 80. 

querer: conjugated, 539; use, 67 b; 

takes dependent infin., 105. 
quisiera, 129. 

radical-changing verbs, 106-109; 505- 

$22. 

reciprocal conjugation, 200. 

reflexive pronouns : forms, 76 ; posi- 
tion, yy. 

reflexive verbs, 75, 78; used imper- 
sonally, or for the passive, 79, 
210. 

regular verbs, 500-511. 

reir: conj., 522 a. 

relative pronouns: que, 157; quien, 
158; el que and el cual, 160; 
cuyo, 176 a; never omitted, 157 
note. 

saber: conj., 540; contrasted with 
conocer, 144. 

salir: conj., 541. 

se reflexive: position, 113. 

se substitute pronoun, 114. 

seasons, 131. 

sentar: use, 234. 

Seiior, Seiiora: in address, 184. 

ser: conj., 542; compared with estar, 
47 ; in giving dimensions, 235 a ; 
as auxiliary, 207, 503. 

should, 30 b. 

si, 182. 

sino, 195. 

some, any : not expressed, note, p. 
21; unos, 151; obj. pronoun, 162. 

stress and accent, 7 ; stress in pres. 
indie, 21 note; on imperfect and 
past definite, 69, note 1 ; in fu- 
ture subj., note to 138; in imper- 
ative, 142 note; in future and 
cond. indie, 90 note; in pres. 
subj., 100 note. 

subjunctive: general statement, 98, 
99. 

in dependent clauses: subject, 102; 
object, 101, 149, 161, 166; ad- 
verb, 133, 201; adjective, 134. 
in main clauses: 121; used for 
imperatives, 122, 222 b. 



INDEX 



197 



after certain verbs, 101, 102, 
149, 166, 161 ; after certain con- 
junctions, 133, 201 ; after rela- 
tives, 134; in alternative expres- 
sions, 201 ; introduced by que 
only, 121 ; in conditions con- 
trary to fact, 128, 172 c. 
suffixes : -ero, 229 ; -eria, 230 ; -ito, 
-illo, -uelo, 231; -ano, -eiio, -ino, 
-es, 239. 
superlative without comparison, 174. 
syllabification, 6. 

tal, 171. 

tampoco, 22,2. 

tener: conj., 543; use, 29; auxiliary 
tener que, 30 a ; expresses age, 40 ; 
physical or mental condition, 86; 
in giving dimensions, 235. 

tenses : see names of tenses ; irreg- 
ularities in use of, 178; sequence 
of tenses of the subjunctive, 103, 
126, 140, 172. 

tercero: loses o, in. 

"than," 175. 

time expressions with hacer, 187. 

time telling, 88, 196. 

todo, 189. 

traer: conj., 544. 

tripthongs, 3 d. 

-uir verbs, 523. 

unclassable irregular verbs, 524-547. 



uno, 151 ; loses o, 39 note, 
usted, 2^, b, c, d; 64, note 3. 

valer: conj., 545. 

venir: conj., 547; as auxiliary, 504. 

\er: conj., 546; use, 188. 

verbs: 500-550. 

the regular verb, 500-511. 

irregular verbs, 512-550. 

orthographical-changing verbs, 33, 
505-511. 

radical-changing, 106, 514; first 
class, 107, 515-519; second class, 
108, 520; third class, 109, 522. 

-uir verbs, 523. 

inceptive verbs, 513. 

irregular, unclassable, 524-547. 

defective, 548. 

irregular past participles, 549. 

reflexive, 75-78, 79, 210, 211. 

reciprocal, 200. 

impersonal, 202. 

list of most irregular verbs, 440. 
verdad, 164. 
volver: use, 225. 
vowels, 2, 12 b, 3. 

weather, with hacer, 137. 

willingness : expressed by querer, 
67 b. 

word-order, affirmative, 25 a; inter- 
rogative, 25 b, 32, 41 ; negative, 
25 c ; see position. 



*30V 11 1SD9 



TO CAT. 

NOV 11 11309 



